---
title: "On the Articulations · Περὶ ἄρθρων"
author: "Hippocrates"
translator: "Francis Adams"
languages: [grc, en]
shelf: "Classical Greek"
url: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/
cite: "Hippocrates, tr. Francis Adams, On the Articulations · Περὶ ἄρθρων. Scriptura (scriptura.si), https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/"
---

# On the Articulations · Περὶ ἄρθρων

*Hippocrates, tr. Francis Adams*

Dislocated joints and how to reduce them.

> Greek: ed. Émile Littré, from the Perseus Digital Library (canonical-greekLit, tlg0627.tlg010, CC BY-SA 4.0).

> English: Francis Adams, from the Perseus Digital Library (tlg0627.tlg010.perseus-eng2). Notes are not included.

> Rows follow the references the two texts share (chapters and sections), cut where both reach the end of a sentence.

## Contents

1. [Sections 1–13](https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/1.md)
2. [Sections 14–36](https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/2.md)
3. [Sections 37–47](https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/3.md)
4. [Sections 48–56](https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/4.md)
5. [Sections 57–69](https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/5.md)
6. [Sections 70–87](https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/6.md)

## 1. Sections 1–13

Source: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/1/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/1/#p-N

[¶0] 1. I am acquainted with one form in which the shoulder-joint is dislocated, namely, that into the armpit; I have never seen it take place upward nor outward; and yet I do not positively affirm whether it might be dislocated in these directions or not, although I have something which I might say on this subject. But neither have I ever seen what I considered to be a dislocation forward. Physicians, indeed, fancy that dislocation is very apt to occur forward, and they are more particularly deceived in those persons who have the fleshy parts about the joint and arm much emaciated; for, in all such cases, the head of the arm appears to protrude forward. And I in one case of this kind having said that there was no dislocation, exposed myself to censure from certain physicians and common people on that account, for they fancied that I alone was ignorant of what everybody else was acquainted with, and I could not convince them but with difficulty, that the matter was so. But if one will strip the point of the shoulder of the fleshy parts, and where the muscle (deltoid?) extends, and also lay bare the tendon that goes from the armpit and clavicle to the breast (pectoral muscle?), the head of the humerus will appear to protrude strongly forward, although not dislocated, for the head of the humerus naturally inclines forward, but the rest of the bone is turned outward. The humerus is connected obliquely with the cavity of the scapula, when the arm is stretched along the sides; but when the whole arm is stretched forward, then the head of the humerus is in a line with the cavity of the humerus, and no longer appears to protrude forward. And with regard to the variety we are now treating of, I have never seen a case of dislocation forward; and yet I do not speak decidedly respecting it, whether such a dislocation may take place or not. When, then, a dislocation into the armpit takes place, seeing it is of frequent occurrence, many persons know how to reduce it, for it is an easy thing to teach all the methods by which physicians effect the reductions, and the best manner of applying them. The strongest of those methods should be used when the difficulty of reduction is particularly great. The strongest is the method to be last described.

> Greek: 1. 1. ὤμου δὲ ἄρθρον ἕνα τρόπον οἶδα ὀλισθάνον, τὸν ἐς τὴν μασχάλην· ἄνω δὲ οὐδέποτε εἶδον, οὐδὲ ἐς τὸ ἔξω· οὐ μέντοι διισχυριείω ἔγωγε, εἰ ὀλισθάνοι ἂν, ἢ οὒ, καίπερ ἔχων περὶ αὐτοῦ ὅ τι λέγω. ἀτὰρ οὐδὲ ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν οὐδέπω ὄπωπα, ὅ τι ἔδοξέ μοι ὠλισθηκέναι. τοῖσι μέντοι ἰητροῖσι δοκέει κάρτα ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν ὀλισθάνειν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐξαπατέονται ἐν τουτέοισιν, ὧν ἂν φθίσις καταλάβῃ τὰς σάρκας τὰς περὶ τὸ ἄρθρον τε καὶ τὸν βραχίονα· φαίνεται γὰρ ἐν τοῖσι τοιουτέοισι παντάπασιν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος ἐξέχουσα ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν. καὶ ἔγωγέ ποτε τὸ τοιοῦτον οὐ φὰς ἐκπεπτωκέναι, ἤκουσα φλαύρως ὑπό τε τῶν ἰητρῶν, ὑπό τε τῶν δημοτέων, διὰ τοῦτο τὸ πρῆγμα· ἐδόκεον γὰρ αὐτοῖσιν ἠγνοηκέναι μοῦνος, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ἐγνωκέναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάμην αὐτοὺς ἀναγνῶσαι, εἰ μὴ μόλις, ὅτι τόδʼ ἐστὶ τοιόνδε· εἴ τις τοῦ βραχίονος ψιλώσειε μὲν τῶν σαρκέων τὴν ἐπωμίδα, ψιλώσειε δὲ ᾗ ὁ μῦς ἀνατείνει, ψιλώσειε δὲ τὸν τένοντα τὸν κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην καὶ τὴν κληῗδα πρὸς τὸ στῆθος ἔχοντα, φαίνοιτο ἂν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν ἐξέχουσα ἰσχυρῶς, καίπερ οὐκ ἐκπεπτωκυῖα· πέφυκε γὰρ ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν προπετὴς ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος· τὸ δʼ ἄλλο ὀστέον τοῦ βραχίονος ἐς τὸ ἔξω καμπύλον. Ὁμιλέει δὲ ὁ βραχίων τῷ κοίλῳ τῆς ὠμοπλάτης πλάγιος, ὅταν παρὰ τὰς πλευρὰς παρατεταμένος ἔῃ· ὅταν μέντοι ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν ἐκτανυσθῇ ἡ ξύμπασα χεὶρ, τότε ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος κατʼ ἴξιν τῆς ὠμοπλάτης τῷ κοίλῳ γίνεται, καὶ οὐκ ἔτι ἐξέχειν ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν φαίνεται. περὶ οὗ οὖν ὁ λόγος, οὐδέποτε εἶδον οὐδὲ ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν ἐκπεσόν· οὐ μὴν ἰσχυριείω γε οὐδὲ περὶ τούτου, εἰ μὴ ἐκπέσοι ἂν οὕτως, ἢ οὔ. ὅταν οὖν ἐκπέσῃ ὁ βραχίων ἐς τὴν μασχάλην, ἅτε πολλοῖσιν ἐκπίπτοντος, πολλοὶ ἐπίστανται ἐμβάλλειν· εὐπαίδευτον δέ ἐστι τὸ εἰδέναι πάντας τοὺς τρόπους, οἷσιν οἱ ἰητροὶ ἐμβάλλουσι, καὶ ὡς ἄν τις αὐτοῖσι τοῖσι τρόποισι τούτοισι κάλλιστα χρῷτο. χρέεσθαι δὲ χρὴ τῷ κρατίστῳ τῶν τρόπων, ἢν τὴν ἰσχυρονάτην ἀνάγκην ὁρᾷς· κράτιστος δὲ ὁ ὕστατος γεγραψόμενος.

[¶1] 2. Those who are subject to frequent dislocations at the shoulder-joint, are for the most part competent to effect the reduction themselves; for, having introduced the knuckles of the other hand into the armpit, they force the joint upward, and bring the elbow toward the breast. The physician might reduce it in the same manner, if having introduced his fingers into the armpit on the inside of the dislocated joint, he would force it from the ribs, pushing his own head against the acromion, in order to make counter-pressure, and with his knees applied to the patient’s elbow pushing the arm to the sides. It will be of advantage if the operator has strong hands, or the physician may do as directed with his head and hands, while another person brings the elbow toward the breast. Reduction of the shoulder may also be effected by carrying the fore-arm backward to the spine, and then with the one hand grasping it at the elbow, to bend the arm upward, and with the other to support it behind at the articulation. This mode of reduction, and the one formerly described, are not natural, and yet by rotating the bone of the joint, they force it to return.

> Greek: 2. 2. Ὅσοισι μὲν οὖν πυκινὰ ἐκπίπτει ὁ ὦμος, ἱκανοὶ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖστον αὐτοὶ σφίσιν αὐτοῖσιν ἐμβάλλειν εἰσίν· ἐνθέντες γὰρ τῆς ἑτέρης χειρὸς τοὺς κονδύλους ἐς τὴν μασχάλην, ἀναγκάζουσιν ἄνω τὸ ἄρθρον, τὸν δὲ ἀγκῶνα παράγουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθος. τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον τοῦτον καὶ ὁ ἰητρὸς ἂν ἐμβάλλοι, εἰ αὐτὸς μὲν ὑπὸ τὴν μασχάλην ἐσωτέρω τοῦ ἄρθρου τοῦ ἐκπεπτωκότος ὑποτείνας τοὺς δακτύλους, ἀπαναγκάζοι ἀπὸ τῶν πλευρέων, ἐμβάλλων τὴν ἑωυτοῦ κεφαλὴν ἐς τὸ ἀκρώμιον, ἀντερείσιος ἕνεκα, τοῖσι δὲ γούνασι παρὰ τὸν ἀγκῶνα ἐς τὸν βραχίονα ἐμβάλλων, ἀντωθέοι πρὸς τὰς πλευράς· ξυμφέρει δὲ κρατερὰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔχειν τὸν ἐμβάλλοντα. ἢ αὐτὸς μὲν τῇσι χερσὶ καὶ τῇ κεφαλῇ οὕτω ποιοίη, ἄλλος δέ τις τὸν ἀγκῶνα παράγοι παρὰ τὸ στῆθος. ἐστὶ δὲ ἐμβολὴ ὤμου, καὶ ἐς τοὐπίσω ὑπερβάλλοντα τὸν πῆχυν ἐπὶ τὴν ῤάχιν, ἔπειτα τῇ μὲν ἑτέρῃ χειρὶ ἀνακλᾷν ἐς τὸ ἄνω τοῦ ἀγκῶνος ἐχόμενον, τῇ δὲ ἑτέρῃ παρὰ τὸ ἄρθρον ὄπισθεν ἐρείδειν. αὕτη ἡ ἐμβολὴ, καὶ ἡ πρόσθεν εἰρημένη, οὐ κατὰ φύσιν ἐοῦσαι, ὅμως ἀμφισφάλλουσαι τὸ ἄρθρον, ἀναγκάζουσιν ἐμπίπτειν.

[¶2] 3. Those who attempt to perform reduction with the heel, operate in a manner which is an approach to the natural. The patient must lie on the ground upon his back, while the person who is to effect the reduction is seated on the ground upon the side of the dislocation; then the operator, seizing with his hand the affected arm, is to pull it, while with his heel in the armpit he pushes in the contrary direction, the right heel being placed in the right armpit, and the left heel in the left armpit. But a round ball of a suitable size must be placed in the hollow of the armpit; the most convenient are very small and hard balls, formed from several pieces of leather sewed together. For without something of the kind the heel cannot reach to the head of the humerus, since, when the arm is stretched, the armpit becomes hollow, the tendons on both sides of the armpit making counter-contraction so as to oppose the reduction. But another person should be seated on the other side of the patient to hold the sound shoulder, so that the body may not be dragged along when the arm of the affected side is pulled; and then, when the ball is placed in the armpit, a supple piece of thong sufficiently broad is to be placed round it, and some person taking hold of its two ends is to seat himself above the patient’s head to made counter-extension, while at the same time he pushes with his foot against the bone at the top of the shoulder. The ball should be placed as much on the inside as possible, upon the ribs, and not upon the head of the humerus.

> Greek: 3. 3. οἱ δὲ τῇ πτέρνῃ πειρώμενοι ἐμβάλλειν, ἐγγύς τι τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν ἀναγκάζουσιν· χρὴ δὲ τὸν μὲν ἄνθρωπον χαμαὶ κατακλῖναι ὕπτιον, τὸν δὲ ἐμβάλλοντα χαμαὶ ἵζεσθαι ἐφʼ ὁκότερα ἂν τὸ ἄρθρον ἐκπεπτώκῃ· ἔπειτα λαβόμενον τῇσι χερσὶ τῇσιν ἑωυτέου τῆς χειρὸς τῆς σιναρῆς, κατατείνειν αὐτὴν, τὴν δὲ πτέρνην ἐς τὴν μασχάλην ἐμβάλλοντα ἀντωθέειν, τῇ μὲν δεξιῇ ἐς τὴν δεξιὴν, τῇ δὲ ἀριστερῇ ἐς τὴν ἀριστερήν. δεῖ δὲ ἐς τὸ κοῖλον τῆς μασχάλης ἐνθεῖναι στρογγύλον τι ἐναρμόσσον· ἐπιτηδειόταται δὲ αἱ πάνυ σμικραὶ σφαῖραι καὶ σκληραὶ, οἷαι ἐκ τῶν πολλῶν σκυτέων ῤάπτονται· ἢν γὰρ μή τι τοιοῦτον ἐγκέηται, οὐ δύναται ἡ πτέρνη ἐξικνέεσθαι πρὸς τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος· κατατεινομένης γὰρ τῆς χειρὸς, κοιλαίνεται ἡ μασχάλη· οἱ γὰρ τένοντες οἱ ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν τῆς μασχάλης, ἀντισφίγγοντες, ἐναντίοι εἰσίν. χρὴ δέ τινα ἐπὶ θάτερα τοῦ κατατεινομένου καθήμενον κατέχειν κατὰ τὸν ὑγιέα ὦμον, ὡς μὴ περιέλκηται τὸ σῶμα, τῆς χειρὸς τῆς σιναρῆς ἐπὶ θάτερα τεινομένης· ἔπειτα ἱμάντος μαλθακοῦ πλάτος ἔχοντος ἱκανὸν, ὅταν ἡ σφαίρη ἐντεθῇ ἐς τὴν μασχάλην, περὶ τὴν σφαίρην περιβεβλημένου τοῦ ἱμάντος, καὶ κατέχοντος, λαβόμενον ἀμφοτερέων τῶν ἀρχέων τοῦ ἱμάντος, ἀντικατατείνειν τινὰ, ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς τοῦ κατατεινομένου καθήμενον, τῷ ποδὶ προσβάντα πρὸς τοῦ ἀκρωμίου τὸ ὀστέον. ἡ δὲ σφαίρη ὡς ἐσωτάτω καὶ ὡς μάλιστα πρὸς τῶν πλευρέων κείσθω, καὶ μὴ ἐπὶ τῇ κεφαλῇ τοῦ βραχίονος.

[¶3] 4. There is another method of reduction performed by the shoulder of a person standing. The person operating in this way, who should be taller than the patient, is to take hold of his arm and place the sharp point of his own shoulder in the patient’s armpit, and push it in so that it may lodge there, and having for his object that the patient may be suspended at his back by the armpit, he must raise himself higher on this shoulder than the other; and he must bring the arm of the suspended patient as quickly as possible to his own breast. In this position he should shake the patient when he raises him up, in order that the rest of the body may be a counterpoise to the arm which is thus held. But if the patient be very light, a light child should be suspended behind along with him. These methods of reduction are all of easy application in the palestra, as they can all be performed without instruments, but they may also be used elsewhere.

> Greek: 4. 4. ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἄλλη ἐμβολὴ, ᾗ κατωμίζουσιν ἐς ὀρθόν· μείζω μέντοι εἶναι χρὴ τὸν κατωμίζοντα, διαλαβόντα δὲ τὴν χεῖρα, ὑποθεῖναι τὸν ὦμον τὸν ἑωυτοῦ ὑπὸ τὴν μασχάλην ὀξύν· κἄπειτα ὑποστρέψαι, ὡς ἂν ἐνίζηται ἕδρῃ, οὕτω στοχασάμενον ὅκως ἀμφὶ τὸν ὦμον τὸν ἑωυτοῦ κρεμάσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην· αὐτὸς δὲ ἑωυτὸν ὑψηλότερον ἐπὶ τοῦτον τὸν ὦμον ποιεέτω, ἢ ἐπὶ τὸν ἕτερον· τοῦ δὲ κρεμαμένου τὸν βραχίονα πρὸς τὸ ἑωυτοῦ στῆθος προσαναγκαζέτω ὡς τάχιστα· ἐν τούτῳ δὲ τῷ σχήματι προσανασειέτω, ὁκόταν μετεωρίσῃ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ὡς ἀντιῤῥέποι τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα αὐτῷ, ἀντίον τοῦ βραχίονος τοῦ κατεχομένου· ἢν δὲ ἄγαν κοῦφος ἔῃ ὁ ἄνθρωπος, προσεπικρεμασθήτω τούτου ὄπισθέν τις κοῦφος παῖς. αὗται δὲ αἱ ἐμβολαὶ πᾶσαι κατὰ παλαίστρην εὔχρηστοί εἰσιν, ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀλλοίων ἀρμένων δέονται ἐπεισενεχθῆναι· χρήσαιτο δʼ ἄν τις καὶ ἄλλοθι.

[¶4] 5. Those who accomplish the reduction by forcibly bending it round a pestle, operate in a manner which is nearly natural. But the pestle should be wrapped in a soft shawl (for thus it will be less slippery), and it should be forced between the ribs and the head of the humerus. And if the pestle be short, the patient should be seated upon something, that his arm can with difficulty pass above the pestle. But for the most part the pestle should be longer, so that the patient when standing may be almost suspended upon the piece of wood. And then the arm and forearm should be stretched along the pestle, whilst some person secures the opposite side of the body by throwing his arms round the neck, near the clavicle.

> Greek: 5. 5. ἀτὰρ καὶ οἱ περὶ τὸ ὕπερον ἀναγκάζοντες, ἐγγύς τι τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν ἐμβάλλουσιν· χρὴ δὲ τὸ μὲν ὕπερον κατειλίχθαι ταινίῃ τινὶ μαλθακῇ (ἧσσον γὰρ ἂν ὑπολισθάνοι), ὑπηναγκάσθαι δὲ μεσηγὺ τῶν πλευρέων καὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ βραχίονος· καὶ ἢν μὲν βραχὺ ἔῃ τὸ ὕπερον, καθῆσθαι χρὴ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐπί τινος, ὡς μόλις τὸν βραχίονα περιβάλλειν δύνηται περὶ τὸ ὕπερον· μάλιστα δὲ ἔστω μακρότερον τὸ ὕπερον, ὡς ἂν ἑστεὼς ὁ ἄνθρωπος κρέμασθαι μικροῦ δέῃ ἀμφὶ τῷ ξύλῳ. κἄπειτα ὁ μὲν βραχίων καὶ ὁ πῆχυς παρατεταμένος παρὰ τὸ ὕπερον ἔστω, τὸ δὲ ἐπὶ θάτερα τοῦ σώματος καταταγκαζέτω τις, περιβάλλων κατὰ τὸν αὐχένα παρὰ τὴν κληῗδα τὰς χεῖρας. αὕτη ἡ ἐμβολὴ κατὰ φύσιν ἐπιεικέως ἐστὶ, καὶ ἐμβάλλειν δύναται, ἢν χρηστῶς σκευάσωνται αὐτήν.

[¶5] 6. But the method with a ladder is another of the same kind, and still better, since by it the body can be more safely counterpoised on this side; and that, while in the method which the piece of wood resembling a pestle, there is danger of the body tumbling to either side. But some round thing should be tied upon the step of the ladder which may be fitted to the armpit, whereby the head of the bone may be forced into its natural place.

> Greek: 6. 6. ἀτὰρ καὶ ἡ διὰ τοῦ κλιμακίου ἑτέρη τις τοιαύτη, καὶ ἔτι βελτίων, ὅτι ἀσφαλεστέρως ἂν τὸ σῶμα, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ, ἀντισηκωθείη μετεωρισθέν· περὶ γὰρ τὸ ὑπεροειδὲς ὁ ὦμος ἢν καὶ καταπεπήγῃ, περισφάλλεσθαι τὸ σῶμα κίνδυνος ἢ τῇ, ἢ τῇ· χρὴ μέντοι, καὶ ἐπὶ τῷ κλιμακτῆρι ἐπιδεδέσθαι τι ἄνωθεν στρογγύλον ἐναρμόσσον ἐς τὸ κοῖλον τῆς μασχάλης, ὃ προσδιαναγκάσει τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος ἐς τὴν φύσιν ἀπιέναι.

[¶6] 7. The following, however, is the strongest of all the methods of reduction. We must get a piece of wood, five, or at least four inches broad, two inches in thickness, or still thinner, and two cubits in length, or a little less; and its extremity at one end should be rounded, and made very narrow and very slender there, and it should have a slightly projecting edge (ambe) on its round extremity, not on the part that is to be applied to the side, but to the head of the humerus, so that it may be adjusted in the armpit at the sides under the head of the humerus; and a piece of soft shawl or cloth should be glued to the end of the piece of wood, so as to give the less pain upon pressure. Then having pushed the head of this piece of wood as far inward as possible between the ribs and the head of the humerus, the whole arm is to be stretched along this piece of wood, and is to be bound round at the arm, the fore-arm, and the wrist, so that it may be particularly well secured; but great pains should be taken that the extremity of this piece of wood should be introduced as far as possible into the armpit, and that it is carried past the head of the humerus. Then a cross-beam is to be securely fastened between two pillars, and afterward the arm with the piece of wood attached to it is to be brought over this cross-beam, so that the arm may be on the one side of it and the body on the other, and the cross-beam in the armpit; and then the arm with the piece of wood is to be forced down on the one side of the cross-beam, and the rest of the body on the other. The cross-beam is to be bound so high that the rest of the body may be raised upon tip-toes. This is by far the most powerful method of effecting reduction of the shoulder; for one thus operates with the lever upon the most correct principles, provided only the piece of wood be placed as much as possible within the head of the humerus, and thus also the counter-balancing weights will be most properly adjusted, and safely applied to the bone of the arm. Wherefore recent cases in this way may be reduced more quickly than could be believed, before even extension would appear to be applied; and this is the only mode of reduction capable of replacing old dislocations, and this it will effect, unless flesh has already filled up the (glenoid) cavity, and the head of the humerus has formed a socket for itself in the place to which it has been displaced; and even in such an old case of dislocation, it appears to me that we could effect reduction (for what object would a lever power properly applied not it move?), but it would not remain in its place, but would be again displaced as formerly. The same thing may be effected by means of the ladder, by preparing it in the same manner. If the dislocation be recent, a large Thessalian chair may be sufficient to accomplish this purpose; the wood, however, should be dressed up as described before; but the patient should be seated sideways on the chair, and then the arm, with the piece of wood attached to it, is to be brought over the back of the chair, and force is to be applied to the arm, with the wood on the one side, and the body on the other side. The same means may be applied with a double door. One should always use what happens to be at hand.

> Greek: 7. 7. κρατίστη μέντοι πασέων τῶν ἐμβολέων ἡ τοιήδε· ξύλον χρὴ εἶναι, πλάτος μὲν ὡς πενταδάκτυλον, ἢ τετραδάκτυλον τὸ ἐπίπαν, πάχος δὲ ὡς διδάκτυλον, ἢ καὶ λεπτότερον, μῆκος δὲ δίπηχυ, ἢ ὀλίγῳ ἔλασσον· ἔστω δὲ ἐπὶ θάτερα τὸ ἄκρον περιφερὲς καὶ στενότατον ταύτῃ καὶ λεπτότατον· ἄμβην δὲ ἐχέτω, σμικρὸν ὑπερέχουσαν, ἐπὶ τῷ ὑστάτῳ τοῦ περιφερέος, ἐν τῷ μέρεϊ, μὴ τῷ πρὸς τὰς πλευρὰς, ἀλλὰ τῷ πρὸς τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος ἔχοντι, ὡς ὑφαρμόσειε τῇ μασχάλῃ παρὰ τὰς πλευρὰς ὑπὸ τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος ὑποτιθέμενον· ὀθονίῳ δὲ ἢ ταινίῃ μαλθακῇ κατακεκολλήσθω ἄκρον τὸ ξύλον, ὅκως προσηνέστερον ἔῃ. ἔπειτα χρὴ ὑπώσαντα τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ ξύλου ὑπὸ τὴν μασχάλην ὡς ἐσωτάτω μεσηγὺ τῶν πλευρέων καὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ βραχίονος, τὴν δὲ ὅλην χεῖρα πρὸς τὸ ξύλον κατατείναντα, προσκαταδῆσαι κατά τε τὸν βραχίονα, κατά τε τὸν πῆχυν, κατά τε τὸν καρπὸν τῆς χειρὸς, ὡς ἂν ἀτρεμέῃ ὅτι μάλιστα· περὶ παντὸς δὲ χρὴ ποιέεσθαι, ὅκως τὸ ἄκρον τοῦ ξύλου ὡς ἐσωτάτω τῆς μασχάλης ἔσται, ὑπερβεβηκὸς τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος. ἔπειτα χρὴ μεσηγὺ δύο στύλων στρωτῆρα πλάγιον εὖ προσδῆσαι, ἔπειτα ὑπερενεγκεῖν τὴν χεῖρα ξὺν τῷ ξύλῳ ὑπὲρ τοῦ στρωτῆρος, ὅκως ἡ μὲν χεὶρ ἐπὶ θάτερα ἔῃ, ἐπὶ θάτερα δὲ τὸ σῶμα, κατὰ δὲ τὴν μασχάλην ὁ στρωτήρ· κἄπειτα ἐπὶ μὲν θάτερα τὴν χεῖρα καταναγκάζειν ξὺν τῷ ξύλῳ περὶ τὸν στρωτῆρα, ἐπὶ θάτερα δὲ τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα. ὕψος δὲ ἔχων ὁ στρωτὴρ προσδεδέσθω, ὥστε μετέωρον τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα εἶναι ἐπʼ ἄκρων τῶν ποδῶν. οὗτος ὁ τρόπος παραπολὺ κράτιστος ἐμβολῆς ὤμου· δικαιότατα μὲν γὰρ μοχλεύει, ἢν μοῦνον ἐσωτέρω ἔῃ τὸ ξύλον τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ βραχίονος· δικαιόταται δὲ αἱ ἀντιῤῥοπαὶ, ἀσφαλέες δὲ τῷ ὀστέῳ τοῦ βραχίονος. τὰ μὲν οὖν νεαρὰ ἐμπίπτει θᾶσσον, ἢ ὡς ἄν τις οἴοιτο, πρὶν ἢ καὶ κατατετάσθαι δοκέειν· ἀτὰρ καὶ τὰ παλαιὰ μούνη αὕτη τῶν ἐμβολέων οἵη τε ἐμβιβάσαι, ἢν μὴ ἤδη ὑπὸ χρόνου σὰρξ μὲν ἐπεληλύθῃ ἐπὶ τὴν κοτύλην, ἡ δὲ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος ἤδη τρίβον ἑωυτῇ πεποιημένη ἔῃ ἐν τῷ χωρίῳ, ἵνα ἐξεκλίθη· οὐ μὴν ἀλλʼ ἐμβάλλειν γάρ μοι δοκέει καὶ οὕτω πεπαλαιωμένον ἔκπτωμα τοῦ βραχίονος (τί γὰρ ἂν δικαίη μόχλευσις οὐχὶ κινήσειε);, μένειν μέντοι οὐκ ἄν μοι δοκέοι κατὰ χώρην, ἀλλʼ ὀλισθάνοι ἂν ὡς τὸ ἔθος. τὸ αὐτὸ δὲ ποιέει καὶ περὶ κλιμακτῆρα καταναγκάζειν, τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον σκευάσαντα. πάνυ μὴν ἱκανῶς ἔχει, καὶ περὶ μέγα ἕδος θεσσαλικὸν ἀναγκάζειν, ἢν νεαρὸν ἔῃ τὸ ὀλίσθημα· ἐσκευάσθαι μέντοι χρὴ τὸ ξύλον οὕτως, ὥσπερ εἴρηται· ἀτὰρ τὸν ἄνθρωπον καθίσαι πλάγιον ἐπὶ τῷ δίφρῳ· κἄπειτα τὸν βραχίονα ξὺν τῷ ξύλῳ ὑπερβάλλειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἀνακλισμοῦ, καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν θάτερα τὸ σῶμα καταναγκάζειν, ἐπὶ δὲ θάτερα τὸν βραχίονα σὺν τῷ ξύλῳ. τὸ αὐτὸ δὲ ποιέει καὶ ὑπὲρ δίκλειδος θύρης ἀναγκάζειν. χρέεσθαι δὲ χρὴ αἰεὶ τούτοισιν, ἃ ἂν τύχῃ παρεόντα.

[¶7] 8. Wherefore it should be known that one constitution differs much from another as to the facility with which dislocations in them may be reduced, and one articular cavity differs much from another, the one being so constructed that the bone readily leaps out and another less so; but the greatest difference regards the binding together of the parts by the nerves (ligaments?) which are slack in some and tight in others. For the humidity in the joints of men is connected with the state of the ligaments, when they are slack and yielding; for you may see many people who are so humid (flabby?) that when they choose they can disarticulate their joints without pain, and reduce them in like manner. The habit of the body also occasions a certain difference, for in those who are in a state of embonpoint and fleshy the joint is rarely dislocated, but is more difficult to reduce; but when they are more attenuated and leaner than usual, then they are subject to dislocations which are more easily reduced. And the following observation is a proof that matters are so; for in cattle the thighs are most apt to be dislocated at the hip-joint, when they are most particularly lean, which they are at the end of winter, at which time then they are particularly subject to dislocations (if I may be allowed to make such an observation while treating of a medical subject); and therefore Homer has well remarked, that of all beasts oxen suffer the most at that season, and especially those employed at the plow as being worked in the winter season. In them, therefore, dislocations happen most frequently, as being at that time most particularly reduced in flesh. And other cattle can crop the grass when it is short, but the ox cannot do so until it becomes long; for, in the others, the projection of the lip is slender, and so is the upper lip, but in the ox the projection of the lip is thick, and the upper jaw is thick and obtuse, and therefore they are incapable of seizing short herbs. But the solidungula as having prominent teeth in both their front jaws, can crop the grass and grasp it with their teeth while short, and delight more in short grass than in rank; for, in general, short grass is better and more substantial than rank, as having not yet given out its fructification. Wherefore the poet has the following line: “As when to horned cattle dear the vernal season comes,” because rank grass appears to be most sought after by them. But otherwise in the ox, this joint is slacker than in other animals, and, therefore, this animal drags his foot in walking more than any other, and especially when lank and old. For all these reasons the ox is most particularly subject to dislocations; and I have made the more observations respecting him, as they confirm all that was said before on this subject. With regard, then, to the matter on hand, I say that dislocations occur more readily, and are more speedily reduced in those who are lean than in those who are fleshy; and in those who are humid and lank there is less inflammation than in such as are dry and fleshy, and they are less compactly knit hereafter, and there is more mucosity than usual in cases not attended with inflammation, and hence the joints are more liable to luxations; for, in the main, the articulations are more subject to mucosities in those who are lean than in those who are fleshy; and the flesh of lean persons who have not been reduced by a proper course of discipline abounds more with mucosity than that of fat persons. But in those cases in which the mucosity is accompanied with inflammation, the inflammation binds (braces?) the joint, and hence those who have small collections of mucosities are not very subject to dislocations, which they would be if the mucosity had not been accompanied with more or less inflammation.

> Greek: 8. 8. εἰδέναι μὲν οὖν χρὴ, ὅτι φύσιες φυσίων μέγα διαφέρουσιν ἐς τὸ ῤηϊδίως ἐμπίπτειν τὰ ἐκπίπτοντα· διενέγκοι μὲν γὰρ ἄν τι κα κοτύλη κοτύλης, ἡ μὲν εὐυπέρβατος ἐοῦσα, ἡ δὲ ἧσσον· πλεῖστον δὲ διαφέρει καὶ τῶν νεύρων ὁ σύνδεσμος, τοῖσι μὲν ἐπιδόσιας ἔχων, τοῖσι δὲ ξυντεταμένος ἐών. καὶ γὰρ ἡ ὑγρότης τοῖσιν ἀνθρώποισι γίνεται ἡ ἐκ τῶν ἄρθρων, διὰ τῶν νεύρων τὴν ἀπάρτισιν, ἢν χαλαρά τε ἔῃ φύσει, καὶ τὰς ἐπιτάσιας εὐφόρως φέρῃ· συχνοὺς γὰρ ἄν τις ἴδοι, οἳ οὕτως ὑγροί εἰσιν, ὥστε, ὁπόταν ἐθέλωσι, τότε αὐτοῖσι τὰ ἄρθρα ἐξίσταται ἀνωδύνως, καὶ καθίσταται ἀνωδύνως. διαφέρει μέντοι τι καὶ σχέσις τοῦ σώματος· τοῖσι μὲν γὰρ εὖ ἔχουσι τὸ γυῖον καὶ σεσαρκωμένοισιν ἐκπίπτει τε ἧσσον, ἐμπίπτει τε χαλεπώτερον· ὅταν δὲ αὐτοὶ σφέων αὐτῶν λεπτότεροι καὶ ἀσαρκότεροι ἔωσι, τότε ἐκπίπτει τε μᾶλλον, ἐμπίπτει τε ῤᾷον. σημήϊον δὲ, ὅτι ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει, καὶ τόδε· τοῖσι γὰρ βουσὶ τότε ἐκπίπτουσι μᾶλλον οἱ μηροὶ ἐκ τῆς κοτύλης, ἡνίκα ἂν αὐτοὶ σφέων αὐτῶν λεπτότατοι ἔωσιν· γίνονται δὲ βόες λεπτότατοι, τοῦ χειμῶνος τελευτῶντος· τότε οὖν καὶ ἐξαρθρέουσι μάλιστα, εἰ δή τι καὶ τοιοῦτο δεῖ ἐν ἰητρικῇ γράψαι· δεῖ δέ· καλῶς γὰρ Ὅμηρος καταμεμαθήκει, ὅτι πάντων τῶν προβάτων βόες μάλιστα πονέουσι ταύτην τὴν ὥρην, καὶ βοῶν οἱ ἀρόται, ὅτι κατὰ τὸν χειμῶνα ἐργάζονται. τούτοισι τοίνυν ἐκπίπτει μάλιστα· οὗτοι γὰρ μάλιστα λεπτύνονται. τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἄλλα βοσκήματα δύναται βραχείην τὴν ποίην βόσκεσθαι· βοῦς δὲ οὐ μάλα, πρὶν βαθεῖα γένηται· τοῖσι μὲν γὰρ ἄλλοισίν ἐστι λεπτὴ ἡ προβολὴ τοῦ χείλεος, λεπτὴ δὲ ἡ ἄνω γνάθος· βοϊ δὲ παχείη μὲν ἡ προβολὴ τοῦ χείλεος, παχείη δὲ καὶ ἀμβλεῖα ἡ ἄνω γνάθος· διὰ ταῦτα ὑποβάλλειν ὑπὸ τὰς βραχείας ποίας οὐ δύναται. τά τε αὖ μώνυχα τῶν ζώων, ἅτε ἀμφόδοντα ἐόντα, δύναται μὲν σαρκάζειν, δύναται δὲ ὑπὸ τὴν βραχείην ποίην ὑποβάλλειν τοὺς ὀδόντας, καὶ ἥδεται τῇ οὕτως ἐχούσῃ ποίῃ μᾶλλον, ἢ τῇ βαθείῃ· καὶ γὰρ τὸ ἐπίπαν ἀμείνων καὶ στερεωτέρη ἡ βραχείη ποίη τῆς βαθείης, ποτὶ καὶ πρὶν ἐκκαρπεῖν τὴν βαθείην. διὰ τοῦτο οὖν ἐποίησεν ὧδε τάδε τὰ ἔπη· [Ὡς δʼ ὁπότʼ ἀσπάσιον ἔαρ ἤλυθε βουσὶν ἕλιξιν], ὅτι ἀσμενωτάτη αὐτοῖσιν ἡ βαθείη ποίη φαίνεται. ἀτὰρ καὶ ἄλλως ὁ βοὺς χαλαρὸν φύσει τὸ ἄρθρον τοῦτο ἔχει μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ζώων· διὰ τοῦτο καὶ εἰλίπουν ἐστὶ μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ζώων, καὶ μάλιστα ὅταν λεπτὸν καὶ γηραλέον ἔῃ. διὰ ταῦτα πάντα καὶ ἐκπίπτει βοϊ μάλιστα· πλείω δὲ γέγραπται περὶ αὐτέου, ὅτι πάντων τῶν προειρημένων ταῦτα μαρτύριά ἐστιν. περὶ οὗ οὖν ὁ λόγος, τοῖσιν ἀσάρκοισι μᾶλλον ἐκπίπτει, καὶ θᾶσσον ἐμπίπτει, ἢ τοῖσι σεσαρκωμένοισιν· καὶ ἧσσον ἐπιφλεγμαίνει τοῖσιν ὑγροῖσιν καὶ τοῖσιν ἀσάρκοισιν, ἢ τοῖσι σκελιφροῖσι καὶ σεσαρκωμένοισιν, καὶ ἧσσόν γε δέδεται ἐς τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον· ἀτὰρ καὶ ἡ μύξα πλείων ὑπείη τοῦ μετρίου μὴ ξὺν φλεγμονῇ, καὶ οὕτως ἂν ὀλισθηρὸν εἴη· μυξωδέστερα γὰρ τοὐπίπαν τὰ ἄρθρα τοῖσιν ἀσάρκοισιν, ἢ τοῖσι σεσαρκωμένοισίν ἐστιν· καὶ γὰρ αὗται αἱ σάρκες τῶν μὴ ἀπὸ τέχνης ὀρθῶς λελιμαγχημένων, αἱ τῶν λεπτῶν, μυξωδέστεραί εἰσιν, ἢ αἱ τῶν παχέων. Ὅσοισι μέντοι ξὺν φλεγμονῇ μύξα ὑπογίνεται, ἡ φλεγμονὴ δήσασα ἔχει τὸ ἄρθρον· διὰ τοῦτο οὐ μάλα ἐκπίπτει τὰ ὑπόμυξα, ἐκπίπτοντα ἂν, εἰ μή τι ἢ πλέον, ἢ ἔλασσον φλεγμονῆς ὑπεγένετο.

[¶8] 9. In cases of dislocation those persons who are not attacked with inflammation of the surrounding parts, can use the shoulder immediately without pain, and do not think it necessary to take any precautions with themselves; it is therefore the business of the physician to warn them beforehand that dislocation is more likely to return in such cases than when the tendons have been inflamed. This remark applies to all the articulations, but particularly to those of the shoulder and knee, for these are the joints most subject to luxations. But those who have inflammation of the ligaments cannot use the shoulder, for the pain and the tension induced by the inflammation prevent them. Such cases are to be treated with cerate, compresses, and plenty of bandages; but a ball of soft clean wool is to be introduced into the armpit, to fill up the hollow of it, that it may be a support to the bandaging, and maintain the joint in situ. The arm, in general, should be inclined upward as much as possible, for thus it will be kept at the greatest possible distance from the place at which the head of the humerus escaped. And when you bandage the shoulder you must fasten the arms to the sides with a band, which is to be carried round the body. The shoulder should be rubbed gently and softly. The physician ought to be acquainted with many things, and among others with friction; for from the same name the same results are not always obtained; for friction could brace a joint when unseasonably relaxed, and relax it when unseasonably hard; but we will define what we know respecting friction in another place. The shoulder, then, in such a state, should be rubbed with soft hands; and, moreover, in a gentle manner, and the joint should be moved about, but not roughly, so as to excite pain. Things get restored sometimes in a greater space of time, and sometimes in a smaller.

> Greek: 9. 9. οἷσι μὲν οὖν, ὅταν ἐμπέσῃ τὸ ἄρθρον, μὴ ἐπιφλεγμαίνει τὰ περιέχοντα, χρῆσθαί τε ἀνωδύνως αὐτίκα τῷ ὤμῳ δύνανται, οὗτοι μὲν οὐδὲν νομίζουσι δεῖν ἑωυτῶν ἐπιμελέεσθαι· ἰητροῦ μήν ἐστι καταμαντεύσασθαι τῶν τοιούτων· τοῖσι τοιούτοισι γὰρ ἐκπίπτει καὶ αὖθις μᾶλλον, ἢ οἷσιν ἂν ἐπιφλεγμήνῃ τὰ νεῦρα. τοῦτο κατὰ πάντα τὰ ἄρθρα οὕτως ἔχει, καὶ μάλιστα κατʼ ὦμον καὶ κατὰ γόνυ· μάλιστα γὰρ οὖν ὀλισθάνει ταῦτα. οἷσι δʼ ἂν ἐπιφλεγμήνῃ τὰ νεῦρα, οὐ δύνανται χρέεσθαι τῷ ὤμῳ· κωλύει γὰρ ἡ ὀδύνη καὶ ἡ ξύντασις τῆς φλεγμονῆς. τοὺς οὖν τοιούτους ἰῆσθαι χρὴ κηρωτῇ καὶ σπλήνεσι καὶ ὀθονίοισι πολλοῖσιν ἐπιδέοντα· ὑποτιθέναι δὲ ἐς τὴν μασχάλην εἴριον μαλθακὸν, καθαρὸν ξυνειλίσσοντα, ἐκπλήρωμα τοῦ κοίλου ποιέοντα, ἵνα ἀντιστήριγμα μὲν τῇ ἐπιδέσει ἔῃ, ἀνακωχέῃ δὲ τὸ ἄρθρον· τὸν δὲ βραχίονα ἐς τὸ ἄνω ῤέποντα ἴσχειν χρὴ τὰ πλεῖστα· οὕτω γὰρ ἂν ἑκαστάτω εἴη τοῦ χωρίου, ἐς ὃ ὤλισθεν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ ὤμου. χρὴ δὲ, ὅταν ἐπιδησῃς τὸν ὦμον, ἔπειτα προσκαταδεῖν τὸν βραχίονα πρὸς τὰς πλευρὰς ταινίῃ τινὶ, κύκλῳ περὶ τὸ σῶμα περιβάλλοντα. χρὴ δὲ καὶ ἀνατρίβειν τὸν ὦμον ἡσυχαίως καὶ λιπαρῶς. πολλῶν δὲ ἔμπειρον δεῖ εἶναι τὸν ἰητρὸν, ἀτὰρ δὴ καὶ ἀνατρίψιος· ἀπὸ γὰρ τοῦ αὐτέου ὀνόματος οὐ τωὐτὸ ἀποβαίνει· καὶ γὰρ ἂν δήσειεν ἄρθρον ἀνάτριψις, χαλαρώτερον τοῦ καιροῦ ἐὸν, καὶ λύσειεν ἄρθρον, σκληρότερον τοῦ καιροῦ ἐόν· ἀλλὰ διοριεῖται ἡμῖν περὶ ἀνατρίψιος ἐν ἄλλῳ λόγῳ. τὸν γοῦν τοιοῦτον ὦμον μαλθακῇσι ξυμφέρει τῇσι χερσὶν ἀνατρίβειν, καὶ ἄλλως πρηέως· τὸ δὲ ἄρθρον διακινέειν μὴ βίῃ, ἀλλὰ τοσοῦτον, ὅσον ἀνωδύνως κινῆσαι. καθίσταται δὲ πάντα, τὰ μὲν ἐν πλείονι χρόνῳ, τὰ δʼ ἐν ἐλάσσονι.

[¶9] 10. A dislocation may be recognized by the following symptoms:—Since the parts of a man’s body are proportionate to one another, as the arms and the legs, the sound should always be compared with the unsound, and the unsound with the sound, not paying regard to the joints of other individuals (for one person’s joints are more prominent than another’s), but looking to those of the patient, to ascertain whether the sound joint be unlike the unsound. This is a proper rule, and yet it may lead to much error; and on this account it is not sufficient to know this art in theory, but also by actual practice; for many persons from pain, or from any other cause, when their joints are not dislocated, cannot put the parts into the same positions as the sound body can be put into; one ought therefore to know and be acquainted beforehand with such an attitude. But in a dislocated joint the head of the humerus appears lying much more in the armpit than it is in the sound joint; and also, above, at the top of the shoulder, the part appears hollow, and the acromion is prominent, owing to the bone of the joint having sunk into the part below; there is a source of error in this case also, as will be described afterward, for it deserves to be described; and also, the elbow of the dislocated arm is farther removed from the ribs than that of the other; but by using force it may be approximated, though with considerable pain; and also they cannot, with the elbow extended, raise the arm to the ear, as they can the sound arm, nor move it about as formerly in this direction and that. These, then, are the symptoms of dislocation at the shoulder. The methods of reduction and the treatment are as described.

> Greek: 10. 10. γινώσκειν δὲ, εἰ ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ βραχίων, τοισίδε χρὴ τοῖσι σημείοισιν· τοῦτο μὲν, ἐπειδὴ δίκαιον ἔχουσι τὸ σῶμα οἱ ἄνθρωποι, καὶ τὰς χεῖρας, καὶ τὰ σκέλεα, παραδείγματι χρέεσθαι δεῖ τῷ ὑγιέϊ πρὸς τὸ μὴ ὑγιὲς, καὶ τῷ μὴ ὑγιεῖ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιὲς, μὴ τὰ ἀλλότρια ἄρθρα καθορῶντα (ἄλλοι γὰρ ἄλλων μᾶλλον ἔξαρθροι πεφύκασιν), ἀλλὰ τὰ αὐτοῦ τοῦ κάμνοντος, ἢν ἀνόμοιον ἔῃ τὸ ὑγιὲς τῷ κάμνοντι. καὶ τοῦτο εἴρηται μὲν ὀρθῶς, παραξύνεσιν δὲ ἔχει πάνυ πολλήν· διὰ τὰ τοιαῦτα, καὶ οὐκ ἀρκέει μοῦνον λόγῳ εἰδέναι τὴν τέχνην ταύτην, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὁμιλίῃ ὁμιλέειν· πολλοὶ γὰρ ὑπὸ ὀδύνης, ἢ καὶ ὑπʼ ἀλλοίης προφάσιος, οὐκ ἐξεστεώτων αὐτέοισι τῶν ἄρθρων, ὅμως οὐ δύνανται ἐς τὰ ὅμοια σχήματα καθίστασθαι ἐς οἷά περ τὸ ὑγιαῖνον σῶμα σχηματίζεται· προσξυνιέναι μὲν οὖν, καὶ ἐννοεῖν καὶ τὸ τοιόνδε σχῆμα χρή. ἀτὰρ καὶ ἐν τῇ μασχάλῃ ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος φαίνεται ἐγκειμένη πολλῷ μᾶλλον τοῦ ἐκπεπτωκότος ἢ τοῦ ὑγιέος· τοῦτο δὲ, ἄνωθεν κατὰ τὴν ἐπωμίδα κοῖλον φαίνεται τὸ χωρίον, καὶ τὸ τοῦ ἀκρωμίου ὀστέον ἐξέχον φαίνεται, ἅτε ὑποδεδυκότος τοῦ ἄρθρου ἐς τὸ κάτω χωρίον· παραξύνεσιν μὴν καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἔχει τινὰ, ἀλλʼ ὕστερον περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγράψεται, ἄξιον γὰρ γραφῆς ἐστιν· τοῦτο δὲ, τοῦ ἐκπεπτωκότος ὁ ἀγκὼν φαίνεται ἀφεστεὼς μᾶλλον ἀπὸ τῶν πλευρέων, ἢ τοῦ ἑτέρου· εἰ μέντοι τις προσαναγκάζοι, προσάγεται μὲν, ἐπιπόνως δέ· τοῦτο δὲ, ἄνω τὴν χεῖρα ἆραι εὐθεῖαν παρὰ τὸ οὖς, ἐκτεταμένου τοῦ ἀγκῶνος, οὐ μάλα δύνανται, ὥσπερ τὴν ὑγιέα, οὐδὲ παράγειν ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα ὁμοίως. τά τε οὖν σημήϊα ταῦτά ἐστιν ὤμου ἐκπεπτωκότος· αἵ τε ἐμβολαὶ αἱ γεγραμμέναι, αἵ τε ἰητρεῖαι αὗται.

[¶10] 11. It deserves to be known how a shoulder which is subject to frequent dislocations should be treated. For many persons owing to this accident have been obliged to abandon gymnastic exercises, though otherwise well qualified for them; and from the same misfortune have become inept in warlike practices, and have thus perished. And this subject deserves to be noticed, because I have never known any physician treat the case properly; some abandon the attempt altogether, and others hold opinions and practice the very what is proper. For physicians have burned the shoulders subject to dislocation, at the top of the shoulder, at the anterior part where the head of the humerus protrudes, and a little behind the top of the shoulder; these burnings, if the dislocation of the arm were upward, or forward, or backward, would have been properly performed; but now, when the dislocation is downward, they rather promote than prevent dislocations, for they shut out the head of the humerus from the free space above. The cautery should be applied thus: taking hold with the hands of the skin at the armpit, it is to be drawn into the line, in which the head of the humerus is dislocated; and then the skin thus drawn aside is to be burnt to the opposite side. The burnings should be performed with irons, which are not thick nor much rounded, but of an oblong form (for thus they pass the more readily through), and they are to be pushed forward with the hand; the cauteries should be red-hot, that they may pass through as quickly as possible; for such as are thick pass through slowly, and occasion eschars of a greater breadth than convenient, and there is danger that the cicatrices may break into one another; which, although nothing very bad, is most unseemly, or awkward. When you have burnt through, it will be sufficient, in most cases, to make eschars only in the lower part; but if there is no danger of the ulcers passing into one another, and there is a considerable piece of skin between them, a thin spatula is to be pushed through these holes which have been burned, while, at the same time, the skin is stretched, for otherwise the instrument could not pass through; but when you have passed it through you must let go the skin, and then between the two eschars you should form another eschar with a slender iron, and burn through until you come in contact with the spatula. The following directions enable you to determine how much of the skin of the armpit should be grasped; all men have glands in the armpit greater or smaller, and also in many other parts of the body. But I will treat in another work of the whole constitution of the glands, and explain what they are, what they signify, and what are their offices. The glands, then, are not to be taken hold of, nor the parts internal to the glands; for this would be attended with great danger, as they are adjacent to the most important nerves. But the greater part of the substances external to the glands are to be grasped, for there is no danger from them. And this, also, it is proper to know, that if you raise the arm much, you will not be able to grasp any quantity of skin worth mentioning, for it is all taken up with the stretching; and also the nerves, which by all means you must avoid wounding, become exposed and stretched in this position; but if you only raise the arm a little, you can grasp a large quantity of skin, and the nerves which you ought to guard against are left within, and at a distance from the operation. Should not, then, the utmost pains be taken in the whole practice of the art to find out the proper attitude in every case? So much regarding the armpit, and these contractions will be sufficient, provided the eschars be properly placed. Without the armpit there are only two places where one might place the eschars to obviate this affection; the one before and between the head of the humerus and the tendon at the armpit; and then the skin may be fairly burned through, but not to any great depth, for there is a large vein adjacent, and also nerves, neither of which must be touched with the heat. But externally, one may form another eschar considerably above the tendon at the armpit, but a little below the head of the humerus; and the skin must be burned fairly through, but it must not be made very deep, for fire is inimical to the nerves. Through the whole treatment the sores are to be so treated, as to avoid all strong extension of the arm, and this is to be done moderately, and only as far as the dressing requires; for thus they will be less cooled (for it is of importance to cover up all sorts of burns if one would treat them mildly), and then the lips of them will be less turned aside; there will be less hemorrhage and fear of convulsions. But when the sores have become clean, and are going on to cicatrization, then by all means the arm is to be bound to the side night and day; and even when the ulcers are completely healed, the arm must still be bound to the side for a long time; for thus more especially will cicatrization take place, and the wide space into which the humerus used to escape will become contracted.

> Greek: 11. 11. ἐπάξιον δὲ τὸ μάθημα, ὡς χρὴ ἰητρεύειν τοὺς πυκνὰ ἐκπίπτοντας ὤμους· πολλοὶ μὲν γὰρ ἤδη ἀγωνίης ἐκωλύθησανδιὰ ταύτην τὴν ξυμφορὴν, τἄλλα πάντα ἀξιόχρεοι ἐόντες· πολλοὶ δὲ ἐν πολεμικοῖσιν ἀχρήϊοι ἐγένοντο, καὶ διεφθάρησαν διὰ ταύτην τὴν ξυμφορήν· ἅμα δὲ ἐπάξιον καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ὅτι οὐδένα οἶδα ὀρθῶς ἰητρεύοντα, ἀλλὰ τοὺς μὲν μηδὲ ἐγχειρέοντας, τοὺς δὲ τἀναντία τοῦ ξυμφέροντος φρονέοντάς τε καὶ ποιέοντας. συχνοὶ γὰρ ἤδη ἰητροὶ ἔκαυσαν ὤμους ἐκπίπτοντας, κατά τε τὴν ἐπωμίδα, κατά τε τὸ ἔμπροσθεν, ᾗ ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος ἐξογκέει, κατά τε τοὔπισθεν ὀλίγον τῆς ἐπωμίδος· αὗται οὖν αἱ καύσιες, εἰ μὲν ἐς τὸ ἄνω ἐξέπιπτεν ὁ βραχίων, ἢ ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν, ἢ ἐς τοὔπισθεν, ὀρθῶς ἂν ἔκαιον· νῦν δὲ δὴ, ὅτε ἐς τὸ κάτω ἐκπίπτει, ἐκβάλλουσιν αὗται αἱ καύσιες μᾶλλον, ἢ κωλύουσιν· ἀποκλείουσι γὰρ τῆς ἄνω εὐρυχωρίης τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος. χρὴ δὲ ὧδε καίειν ταῦτα· ἀπολαβόντα τοῖσι δακτύλοισι κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην τὸ δέρμα ἀφελκύσαι κατʼ αὐτὴν τὴν ἴξιν μάλιστα, καθʼ ἣν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος ἐκπίπτει· ἔπειτα οὕτως ἀφελκυσάμενον τὸ δέρμα διακαῦσαι ἐς τὸ πέρην. σιδηρίοισι δὲ χρὴ ταῦτα καίειν, μὴ παχέσι, μηδὲ λίην φαλακροῖσιν, ἀλλὰ προμήκεσι (ταχυπορώτερα γὰρ), καὶ τῇ χειρὶ ἐπερείδειν· χρὴ δὲ καὶ διαφανέσι καίειν, ὡς ὅτι τάχιστα περαιωθῇ κατὰ δύναμιν· τὰ γὰρ παχέα, βραδέως περαιούμενα, πλατυτέρας τὰς ἐκπτώσιας τῶν ἐσχαρῶν ποιέεται, καὶ κίνδυνος ἂν εἴη ξυῤῥαγῆναι τὰς ὠτειλας· καὶ κάκιον μὲν οὐδὲν ἂν εἴη, αἴσχιον δὲ καὶ ἀτεχνότερον. ὅταν δὲ διακαύσῃς ἐς τὸ πέρην, τῶν μὲν πλείστων ἱκανῶς ἂν ἔχοι ἐν τῷ κάτω μέρεϊ τὰς ἐσχάρας ταύτας μόνας θεῖναι· ἢν δὲ μὴ κίνδυνος φαίνηται εἶναι ξυῤῥαγῆναι τὰς ὠτειλὰς, ἀλλὰ πολὺ τὸ διὰ μέσου ἔῃ, ὑπάλειπτρον χρὴ λεπτὸν διέρσαι διὰ τῶν καυμάτων, ἔτι ἀναλελαμμένου τοῦ δέρματος, οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἄλλως δύναιο διέρσαι· ἐπὴν δὲ διέρσῃς, ἀφεῖναι τὸ δέρμα, ἔπειτα μεσηγὺ τῶν ἐσχαρέων ἄλλην ἐσχάρην ἐμβάλλειν λεπτῷ σιδηρίῳ, καὶ διακαῦσαι, ἄχρις ἂν τῷ ὑπαλείπτρῳ ἐγκύρσῃ. ὁκόσον δέ τι χρὴ τὸ δέρμα τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς μασχάλης ἀπολαμβάνειν, τοισίδε χρὴ τεκμαίρεσθαι· ἀδένες ὕπεισιν ἢ ἐλάσσους ἢ μείζους πᾶσιν ὑπὸ τῇ μασχάλῃ, πολλαχῆ δὲ καὶ ἄλλῃ τοῦ σώματος. ἀλλὰ ἐν ἄλλῳ λόγῳ περὶ ἀδένων οὐλομελίης γεγράψεται, ὅ τι τέ εἰσι, καὶ οἷα ἐν οἵοισι σημαίνουσί τε καὶ δύνανται. τοὺς μὲν οὖν ἀδένας οὐ χρὴ προσαπολαμβάνειν, οὐδʼ ὅσα ἐσωτέρω τῶν ἀδένων· μέγας γὰρ ὁ κίνδυνος· τοῖσι γὰρ ἐπικαιροτάτοισι τόνοισι γειτονεύονται· ὅσον δὲ ἐξωτέρω τῶν ἀδένων, ἐπιπλεῖστον ἀπολαμβάνειν· ἀσινέα γάρ. γινώσκειν δὲ χρὴ. καὶ τάδε, ὅτι, ἢν μὲν ἰσχυρῶς τὸν βραχίονα ἀνατείνῃς, οὐ δυνήσῃ τοῦ δέρματος ἀπολαβεῖν οὐδὲν τοῦ ὑπὸ τῇ μασχάλῃ, ὅ τι καὶ ἄξιον λόγου· καταναισιμοῦται γὰρ ἐν τῇ ἀνατάσει· οἱ δʼ αὖ τόνοι, οὓς οὐδεμιῇ μηχανῇ δεῖ τιτρώσκειν, οὗτοι πρόχειροι γίνονται καὶ κατατεταμένοι ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι· ἢν δὲ μικρὸν ἐπάρῃς τὸν βραχίονα, πολὺ μὲν τοῦ δέρματος ἀπολήψῃ, οἱ δὲ τόνοι, ὧν δεῖ προμηθέεσθαι, εἴσω καὶ πρόσω τοῦ χειρίσματος γίνονται. ἆρʼ οὖν οὐκ ἐν πάσῃ τῇ τέχνῃ περὶ παντὸς χρὴ ποιέεσθαι, τὰ δίκαια σχήματα ἐξευρίσκειν ἐφʼ ἑκάστοισιν; ταῦτα μὲν τὰ κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην, καὶ ἱκαναὶ αὐταὶ αἱ καταλήψιες, ἢν ὀρθῶς τεθῶσιν αἱ ἐσχάραι. ἔκτοσθεν δὲ τῆς μασχάλης, δισσὰ μόνα ἐστὶ χωρία, ἵνα ἄν τις ἐσχάρας θείη, τιμωρεούσας τῷ παθήματι· μίαν μὲν ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν μεσηγὺ τῆς τε κεφαλῆς τοῦ βραχίονος καὶ τοῦ τένοντος τοῦ κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην· καὶ ταύτῃ τὸ μὲν δέρμα τελέως διακαίειν χρὴ, βαθύτερον δὲ οὐ χρή· φλέψ τε γὰρ παχείη πλησίη, καὶ νεῖρα, ὧν οὐδέτερα θερμαντέα. ἔξωθεν δʼ αὖ ἄλλην ἐσχάρην ἐνδέχεται ἐνθεῖναι ἀνωτέρω μὲν συχνῷ τοῦ τένοντος τοῦ κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην, κατωτέρω δὲ ὀλίγῳ τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ βραχίονος· καὶ τὸ μὲν δέρμα τελέως χρὴ διακαίειν, βαθείην δὲ μηδὲ κάρτα ταύτην ποιέειν· πολέμιον γὰρ τὸ πῦρ νεύροισιν. ἰητρεύειν μὲν οὖν χρὴ διὰ πάσης τῆς ἰητρείης τὰ ἕλκεα, μηδέποτε ἰσχυρῶς ἀνατείνοντα τὸν βραχίονα, ἀλλὰ μετρίως, ὅσον τῶν ἑλκέων ἐπιμελείης εἵνεκα· ἧσσον μὲν γὰρ ἂν διαψύχοιτο (ξυμφέρει γὰρ πάντα τὰ καύματα σκέπειν, ὡς ἐπιεικέως ἰητρεύεσθαι)· ἧσσον δʼ ἂν ἐκπλίσσοιτο· ἧσσον δʼ ἂν αἱμοῤῥαγοίη· ἧσσον δʼ ἂν σπασμὸς ἐπιγένοιτο. ὅταν δὲ δὴ καθαρὰ γένηται τὰ ἕλκεα, ἐς ὠτειλάς τε ἴῃ, τότε δὴ καὶ παντάπασι χρὴ αἰεὶ τὸν βραχίονα πρὸς τῇσι πλευρῇσι προσδεδέσθαι, καὶ νύκτα καὶ ἡμέρην· ἀτὰρ καὶ ὅταν ὑγιέα γένηται τὰ ἕλκεα, ὁμοίως ἐπὶ πολὺν χρόνον χρὴ προσδεῖν τὸν βραχίονα πρὸς τὰς πλευράς· οὕτω γὰρ ἂν μάλιστα ἐπουλωθείη, καὶ ἀποληφθείη ἡ εὐρυχωρίη, καθʼ ἣν μάλιστα ὀλισθάνει ὁ βραχίων.

[¶11] 12. When attempts to reduce a dislocated shoulder have failed, if the patient be still growing, the bone of the affected arm will not increase like the sound one, for although it does increase in so far it becomes shorter than the other; and those persons called weasel-armed, become so from two accidents, either from having met with this dislocation in utero, or from another accident, which will be described afterward. But those who while they were children have had deep-seated suppurations about the head of the bone, all become weasel-armed; and this, it should be well known, will be the issue, whether the abscess be opened by an incision or cautery, or whether it break spontaneously. Those who are thus affected from birth are quite able to use the arm yet neither can they raise the arm to the ear, by extending the elbow, but they do this much less efficiently than with the sound arm. But in those who have had the shoulder dislocated after they were grown up, and when it has not been reduced, the top of the shoulder becomes much less fleshy, and the habit of body at that part is attenuated; but when they cease to have pain, whatever they attempt to perform by raising the elbow from the sides obliquely, they can no longer accomplish as formerly; but whatever acts are performed by carrying the arm around by the sides, either backward or forward, all those they can perform; for they can work with an auger or a saw, or with a hatchet, and can dig, by not raising the elbow too much, and do all other kinds of work which are done in similar attitudes.

> Greek: 12. 12. Ὅσοισι δʼ ἂν ὦμος καταπορηθῇ ἐμβληθῆναι, ἢν μὲν ἔτι ἐν αὐξήσει ἔωσιν, οὐκ ἐθέλει συναύξεσθαι τὸ ὀστέον τοῦ βραχίονος ὁμοίως τῷ ὑγιέϊ, ἀλλὰ αὔξεται μὲν ἐπί τι, βραχύτερον δὲ τοῦ ἑτέρου γίνεται καὶ οἱ καλεομενοι δὲ ἐκ γενεῆς γαλιάγκωνες· διὰ δισσὰς ξυμφορὰς ταύτας γίνονται, ἤν τέ τι τοιοῦτον αὐτοὺς ἐξάρθρημα καταλάβῃ ἐν τῇ γαστρὶ ἐόντας, διά τε ἄλλην ξυμφορὴν, περὶ ἧς ὕστερόν ποτε γεγράψεται· ἀτὰρ καὶ οἷσιν ἔτι νηπίοισιν ἐοῦσι κατὰ τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος βαθεῖαι καὶ ὑποβρύχιοι ἐκπυήσιες γίνονται, καὶ οὗτοι πάντες γαλιάγκωνες γίνονται· καὶ ἤν τε τμηθῶσιν, ἤν τε καυθῶσιν, ἤν τε αὐτόματόν σφιν ἐκραγῇ, εὖ εἰδέναι χρὴ, ὅτι ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει. χρέεσθαι μέντοι τῇ χειρὶ δυνατώτατοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐκ γενεῆς γαλιάγκωνες, οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ ἐκεῖνοί γε ἀνατεῖναι παρὰ τὸ οὖς τὸν βραχίονα, ἐκτανύσαντες τὸν ἀγκῶνα, δύνανται, ἀλλὰ πολὺ ἐνδεεστέρως, ἢ τὴν ὑγιέα χεῖρα. οἷσι δʼ ἂν ἤδη ἀνδράσιν ἐοῦσιν ἐκπέσῃ ὁ ὦμος, καὶ μὴ ἐμβληθῇ, ἡ ἐπωμὶς ἀσαρκοτέρη γίνεται, καὶ ἡ ἕξις λεπτὴ ἡ κατὰ τοῦτο τὸ μέρος· ὅταν μέντοι ὀδυνώμενοι παύσωνται, ὁκόσα μὲν δεῖ ἐργάζεσθαι ἐπάραντας τὸν ἀγκῶνα ἀπὸ τῶν πλευρέων ἐς τὸ πλάγιον, ταῦτα μὲν οὐ δύνανται ἅπαντα ὁμοίως ἐργάζεσθαι· ὁκόσα δὲ δεῖ ἐργάζεσθαι, παραφέροντας τὸν βραχίονα παρὰ τὰς πλευρὰς, ἢ ἐς τοὐπίσω, ἢ ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν, ταῦτα δὲ δύνανται ἐργάζεσθαι· καὶ γὰρ ἂν ἀρίδα ἑλκύσαιεν, καὶ πρίονα, καὶ πελεκήσαιεν ἂν, καὶ σκάψαιεν ἂν, μὴ κάρτα ἄνω αἴροντες τὸν ἀγκῶνα, καὶ τἄλλα ὅσα ἐκ τῶν τοιούτων σχημάτων ἐργάζονται.

[¶12] 13. In those cases where the acromion has been torn off, the bone which is thus separated appears prominent. The bone is the bond of connection between the clavicle and scapula, for in this respect the constitution of man is different from that of other animals; physicians are particularly liable to be deceived in this accident (for as the separated bone protrudes, the top of the shoulder appears low and hollow), so that they make preparations as if for dislocation of the shoulder; for I have known many physicians, otherwise not inexpert at the art, who have done much mischief by attempting to reduce such shoulders, thus supposing it a case of dislocation; and they did not desist until they gave over mistake of supposing that they had reduced the shoulder. The treatment, in these cases, is similar to that which is applicable in others of a like kind, namely, cerate, compresses, and suitable bandaging with linen cloths. The projecting part must be pushed down, and the greater number of compresses are to be placed on it, and most compression is to be applied at that part, and the arm being fastened to the side is to be kept elevated; for thus the parts which had been torn asunder are brought into closest proximity with one another. All this should be well known, and if you choose you may prognosticate safely that no impediment, small or great, will result from such an injury at the shoulder, only there will be a deformity in the place, for the bone cannot be properly restored to its natural situation, but there must necessarily be more or less tumefaction in the upper part. For neither can any other bone be made exactly as it was, which having become incorporated with another bone, and having grown to it as an apophysis, has been torn from its natural situation. If properly bandaged, the acromion becomes free of pain in a few days.

> Greek: 13. 13. Ὅσοισι δʼ ἂν τὸ ἀκρώμιον ἀποσπασθῇ, τουτέοισι φαίνεται ἐξέχον τὸ ὀστέον τὸ ἀπεσπασμένον· ἔστι δὲ τοῦτο ὁ ξύνδεσμος τῆς κληῗδος καὶ τῆς ὠμοπλάτης· ἑτεροίη γὰρ ἡ φύσις ἀνθρώπου ταύτῃ, ἢ τῶν ἄλλων ζώων. οἱ οὖν ἰητροὶ μάλιστα ἐξαπατέονται ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρώματι (ἅτε γὰρ ἀνασχόντος τοῦ ὀστέου τοῦ ἀποσπασθέντος, ἡ ἐπωμὶς φαίνεται χαμαιζήλη καὶ κοίλη), ὥστε καὶ προμηθέεσθαι τῶν ὤμων τῶν ἐκπεπτωκότων· πολλοὺς οὖν οἶδα ἰητροὺς, τἄλλα οὐ φλαύρους ἐόντας, οἳ πολλὰ ἤδη ἐλυμήναντο, ἐμβάλλειν πειρώμενοι τοὺς τοιούτους ὤμους, οὕτως οἰόμενοι ἐκπεπτωκέναι, καὶ οὐ πρόσθεν παύονται, πρὶν ἢ ἀπογνῶναι, ἢ ἀπορῆσαι, δοκέοντες αὐτοὶ σφέας αὐτοὺς ἐμβάλλειν τὸν ὦμον. τούτοισιν ἰητρείη μὲν, ἥπερ καὶ τοῖσιν ἄλλοισιν τοῖσι τοιούτοισι, κηρωτὴ καὶ σπλῆνες καὶ ὀθόνια, καὶ ἐπίδεσις τοιαύτη. καταναγκάζειν μέντοι τὸ ὑπερέχον χρὴ, καὶ τοὺς σπλῆνας κατὰ τοῦτο τιθέναι πλείστους, καὶ πιέζειν ταύτῃ μάλιστα, καὶ τὸν βραχίονα πρὸς τῇσι πλευρῇσι ποοσηρτημένον ἐς τὸ ἄνω μέρος ἔχειν· οὕτω γὰρ ἂν μάλιστα πλησιάζοι τὸ ἀπεσπασμένον. τάδε μὴν εὖ εἰδέναι χρὴ, καὶ προλέγειν ὡς ἀσφαλέα, εἰ ἄλλως ἐθέλοις, ὅτι βλάβη μὲν οὐδεμίη, οὔτε σμικρὴ, οὔτε μεγάλη, τῷ ὤμῳ γίνεται ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ τρώματος, αἴσχιον δὲ τὸ χωρίον· οὐδὲ γὰρ τοῦτο τὸ ὀστέον ἐς τὴν ἀρχαίην ἕδρην ὁμοίως ἂν ἱδρυνθείη, ὥσπερ ἐπεφύκεεν, ἀλλʼ ἀνάγκη πλέον ἢ ἔλασσον ὀγκηρότερον εἶναι ἐς τὸ ἄνω. οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄλλο ὀστέον οὐδὲν ἐς τωὐτὸ καθίσταται, ὅ τι ἂν κοινωνέον ἔῃ ἑτέρῳ ὀστέῳ, καὶ προσπεφυκὸς ἀποσπασθῇ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχαίης φύσιος. ἀνώδυνον δὲ τὸ ἀκρώμιον ἐν ὀλίγῃσιν ἡμέρῃσι γίνεται, ἢν χρηστῶς ἐπιδέηται.

## 2. Sections 14–36

Source: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/2/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/2/#p-N

[¶0] 14. When a fractured clavicle is fairly broken across it is more easily treated, but when broken obliquely it is more difficult to manage. Matters are different in these cases from what one would have supposed; for a bone fairly broken across can be more easily restored to its natural state, and with proper care the upper part may be brought down by means of suitable position and proper bandaging, and even if not properly set, the projecting part of the bone is not very sharp. But in oblique fractures the case is similar to that of bones which have been torn away, as formerly described; for they do not admit of being restored to their place, and the prominence of the bone is very sharp. For the most part, then, it should be known, no harm results to the shoulder or to the rest of the body from fracture of the clavicle, unless it sphacelate, and this rarely happens. A deformity, however, may arise from fracture of the clavicle, and in these cases it is very great at first, but by and by it becomes less. A fractured clavicle, like all other spongy bones, gets speedily united; for all such bones form callus in a short time. When, then, a fracture has recently taken place, the patients attach much importance to it, as supposing the mischief greater than it really is, and the physicians bestow great pains in order that it may be properly bandaged; but in a little time the patients, having no pain, nor finding any impediment to their walking or eating, become negligent; and the physicians finding they cannot make the parts look well, take themselves off, and are not sorry at the neglect of the patients, and in the meantime the callus is quickly formed. The method of dressing which is most appropriate, is similar to that used in ordinary cases, consisting of cerate, compresses, and bandages; and it should be most especially known in this operation, that most compresses should be placed on the projecting bone, and that the greatest pressure should be made there. There are certain physicians who make a show of superior skill by binding a heavy piece of lead on the part in order to depress the projecting bone; but this mode of treatment does not apply to the clavicle, for it is impossible to depress the projecting part to any extent worth mentioning. There are others who, knowing the fact that the bandages are apt to slip off, and that they do not keep the projecting parts in their place, apply compresses and bandages like the others, and then having girt the patient with a girdle, where it is usually applied with most effect, they make a heap of the compresses upon the projecting bone when they apply them, and having fastened the head of the bandage to the girdle in front, they apply it so as to bring the turns of it into the line of the clavicle, carrying them to the back, and then bringing them around the girdle they carry them to the fore part and again backward. There are others who do not apply the bandage round the girdle, but carry the rounds of it by the perineum and anus, and along the spine, so as to compress the fracture. To an inexperienced person these methods will appear not far from natural, but when tied, they will be found of no service; for they do not remain firm any length of time, even if the patient keep his bed, although in this position they answer best; and yet even when lying in bed, should he bend his leg, or should his trunk be bent, all the will be displaced; and, moreover, the bandaging is inconvenient, in as much as the anus is comprehended by it, and many turns of the bandage are crowded there in a narrow space. And in the method with the girdle, the girdle cannot be so firmly girt around, but that the turns of the bandage force the girdle to ascend, and hence of necessity all the other bandages must be slackened. He would seem to me to come nearest his purpose, although after all he effects but little, who would take a few turns round the girdle, but would use the bandage principally to secure the former bandaging; for in this manner the bandages would be most secure, and would mutually assist one another. Every thing now almost has been said which applies to fracture of the clavicle. But this also should be known, that in fractures of the clavicle, it is the part attached to the breast which is uppermost, and that the piece attached to the acromion is the lowermost. The cause of this is, that for the most part the breast can neither be depressed nor raised, there being but a slight movement of the joint at the breast, for the sternum is connected together on both sides with the spine. The clavicle admits of most motion at the joint of the shoulder, and this arises from its connection with the acromion. And, moreover, when broken, the part which is connected with the sternum flies upward, and is not easily forced downward; for it is naturally light, and there is more room for it above than below. But the shoulder, the arm, and the parts connected with them, are easily moved from the sides and breast, and, on that account, they admit of being considerably elevated and depressed. When, therefore, the clavicle is broken, the fragment attached to the shoulder inclines downward, for it inclines much more readily with the shoulder and arm downward than upward. Matters being as I have stated, they act imprudently who think to depress the projecting end of the bone. But it is clear that the under part ought to be brought to the upper, for the former is the movable part, and that which has been displaced from its natural position. It is obvious, therefore, that there is no other way of applying force to it (for the bandages no more force it to than they force it from); but if one will push the arm when at the sides as much as possible upward, so that the shoulder may appear as sharp as possible, it is clear that in this way it will be adjusted to the fragment of the bone connected with the breast from which it was torn. If one then will apply a bandage, secundum artem, for the purpose of promoting a speedy cure, and will reckon everything else of no value, except the position as described, he will form a correct opinion of the case, and will effect a cure in the speediest and most appropriate manner. It is of great importance, however, that the patient should lie in a recumbent posture. Fourteen days will be sufficient if he keep quiet, and twenty at most.

> Greek: 14. 14. κληϊς δὲ κατεαγεῖσα, ἢν μὲν ἀτρεκέως ἀποκαυλισθῇ, εὐιητοτέρη ἐστίν· ἢν δὲ παραμηκέως, δυσιητοτέρη. τἀναντία δὲ τούτοισίν ἐστιν, ἢ ὡς ἄν τις οἴοιτο· τὴν μὲν γὰρ ἀτρεκέως ἀποκαυλισθεῖσαν προσαναγκάσειεν ἄν τις μᾶλλον ἐς τὴν φύσιν ἐλθεῖν· καὶ γὰρ εἰ πάνυ προμηθηθείη, τὸ ἀνωτέρω κατωτέρω ἂν ποιήσειε, σχήμασί τε ἐπιτηδείοισι καὶ ἐπιδέσει ἁρμοζούσῃ· εἰ δὲ μὴ τελέως ἱδρυνθείη, ἀλλʼ οὖν τὸ ὑπερέχον γε τοῦ ὀστέου οὐ κάρτα ὀξὺ γίνεται. ὧν δὲ ἂν παράμηκες τὸ ὀστέον κατεαγῇ, ἰκέλη ἡ ξυμφορὴ γίνεται τοῖσιν ὀστέοισι τοῖσιν ἀπεσπασμένοισι, περὶ ὧν πρόσθεν γέγραπται· οὔτε γὰρ ἱδρυνθῆναι αὐτὸ πρὸς ἑωυτὸ κάρτα ἐθέλει, ἥ τε ὑπερέχουσα ὄκρις τοῦ ὀστέου ὀξείη γίνεται κάρτα. τὸ μὲν οὖν ξύμπαν, εἰδέναι χρὴ, ὅτι βλάβη οὐδεμίη τῷ ὤμῳ, οὐδὲ τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι γίνεται διὰ τὴν κάτηξιν τῆς κληῗδος, ἢν μὴ ἐπισφακελίσῃ· ὀλιγάκις δὲ τοῦτο γίνεται. αἶσχός γε μὴν προσγίνεται περὶ τὴν κάτηξιν τῆς κληῗδος, καὶ τούτοισι τὸ πρῶτον αἴσχιστον, ἔπειτα μὴν ἐπὶ ἧσσον γίνεται. ξυμφύεται δὲ ταχέως κληϊς, καὶ τἄλλα πάντα ὅσα χαῦνα ὀστέα· ταχείην γὰρ τὴν ἐπιπώρωσιν ποιέεται τὰ τοιαῦτα. ὅταν μὲν οὖν νεωστὶ κατεαγῇ, οἱ τετρωμένοι σπουδάζουσιν, οἰόμενοι μέζον τὸ κακὸν εἶναι, ἢ ὅσον ἐστίν· οἵ τε ἰητροὶ προθυμέονται δῆθεν ὀρθῶς ἰῆσθαι· προϊόντος δὲ τοῦ χρόνου, οἱ τετρωμένοι, ἅτε οὐκ ὀδυνώμενοι, οὐδὲ κωλυόμενοι οὔτε ὁδοιπορίης, οὔτε ἐδωδῆς, καταμελέουσιν· οἵ τε αὖ ἰητροὶ, ἅτε οὐ δυνάμενοι καλὰ τὰ χωρία ἀποδεικνύναι, ἀποδιδράσκουσι, καὶ οὐκ ἄχθονται τῇ ἀμελείῃ τῶν τετρωμένων· ἐν τούτῳ δὲ ἡ ἐπιπώρωσις ξυνταχύνεται. ἐπιδέσιος μὲν οὖν τρόπος καθέστηκε παραπλήσιος τοῖσι πλείστοισι, κηρωτῇ καὶ σπλήνεσι καὶ ὀθονίοισι μαλθακοῖσιν ἰητρεύειν· καὶ τάδε δεῖ προσξυνιέναι καὶ μάλιστα ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χειρίσματι, ὅτι τούς τε σπλῆνας πλείστους κατὰ τὸ ἐξέχον χρὴ τιθέναι, καὶ τοῖσιν ἐπιδέσμοισι πλείστοισι καὶ μάλιστα κατὰ τοῦτο πιέζειν. Ἐἰσὶ δὲ δή τινες, οἳ ἐπεσοφίσαντο ἤδη μολύβδιον βαρὺ προσεπικαταδεῖν, ὡς καταναγκάζειν τὸ ὑπερέχον· ξυνιᾶσι μὲν οὖν ἴσως οὐδὲ οἱ ἁπλῶς ἐπιδέοντες· ἀτὰρ δὴ οὐδʼ οὗτος ὁ τρόπος κληῗδος κατήξιός ἐστιν· οὐ γὰρ δυνατὸν τὸ ὑπερέχον καταναγκάζεσθαι οὐδὲν, ὅ τι καὶ ἄξιον λόγου. ἄλλοι δʼ αὖ τινές εἰσιν, οἵτινες, καταμαθόντες τοῦτο, ὅτι αὗται αἱ ἐπιδέσιες παράφοροί εἰσι καὶ οὐ κατὰ φύσιν καταναγκάζουσι τὰ ὑπερέχοντα, ἐπιδέουσι μὲν αὐτοὺς, σπλήνεσι καὶ ὀθονίοισι χρώμενοι, ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι· ζώσαντες δὲ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ταινίῃ τινὶ, ᾗ εὐζωστότατος αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ἐστιν, ὅταν ἐπιθῶσι τοὺς σπλῆνας ἐπὶ τὰ ὑπερέχοντα τοῦ κατήγματος, ἐξογκώσαντες ἐπὶ τὰ ἐξέχοντα, τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ ὀθονίου προσέδησαν πρὸς τὸ ζῶσμα ἐκ τοῦ ἔμπροσθεν, καὶ οὕτως ἐπιδέουσιν, ἐπὶ τὴν ἴξιν τῆς κληῗδος ἐπιτανύοντες, ἐς τοὔπισθεν ἄγοντες· κἄπειτα περιβάλλοντες περὶ τὸ ζῶσμα, ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν ἄγουσι, καὶ αὖθις ἐς τοὔπισθεν. οἱ δέ τινες οὐχὶ περὶ τὸ ζῶσμα περιβάλλουσι τὸ ὀθόνιον, ἀλλὰ περὶ τὸ περίνεόν τε καὶ παρʼ αὐτὴν τὴν ἕδρην, καὶ παρὰ τὴν ἄκανθαν κυκλεύοντες τὸ ὀθόνιον, οὕτω πιέζουσι τὸ κάτηγμα. ταῦτα γοῦν ἀπείρῳ μὲν ἀκοῦσαι φαίνεται ἐγγὺς τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν εἶναι, χρεομένῳ δὲ ἄχρηστα· οὔτε γὰρ μόνιμα οὐδένα χρόνον, οὐδʼ εἰ κατακέοιτό τις, καίτοι ἐγγυτάτω ἂν οὕτως· ἀλλʼ ὅμως εἰ καὶ κατακείμενος ἢ τὸ σκέλος συγκάμψειεν, ἢ αὐτὸς καμφθείη, πάντα ἂν τὰ ἐπιδέσματα κινέοιτο· ἄλλως τε ἀσηρὴ ἡ ἐπίδεσις· ἥ τε γὰρ ἕδρη ἀπολαμβάνεται, ἀθρόα τε τὰ ὀθόνια ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ στενοχωρίῃ γίνεται· τά τε αὖ περὶ τὴν ζώνην περιβαλλόμενα, οὐχ οὕτως ἰσχυρῶς ἔζωσται, ὡς οὐκ ἀναγκάσαι ἐς τὸ ἄνω τὴν ζώνην ἐπανιέναι, καὶ οὕτως ἀνάγκη ἂν εἴη πάντα χαλᾷν τὰ ἐπιδέσματα. ἄγχιστα δʼἄν τις δοκέοι ποιέειν, καίπερ οὐ μεγάλα ποιέων, εἰ τοῖσι μέν τισι τῶν ὀθονίων περὶ τὴν ζώνην περιβάλλοι, τοῖσι δὲ πλείστοισι τῶν ὀθονιων τὴν ἀρχαίην ἐπίδεσιν ἐπιδέοι· οὕτω γὰρ ἂν μάλιστο τὰ· ἐπιδέσματα μόνιμά τε εἴη, καὶ ἀλλήλοισι τιμωρέοι. τὰ μὲν οὖν πλεῖσταεἴρηται, ἅσσα καταλαμβάνει τοὺς τὴν κληῗδα καταγνυμένους. Προσξυνιέναι δὲ καὶ τόδε χρὴ, ὅτι κληϊς ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ κατάγνυται, ὥστε τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ στήθεος πεφυκὸς ὀστέον ἐς τὸ ἄνω μέρος ὑπερέχειν, τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀκρωμίης πεφυκὸς ὀστέον ἐν τῷ κάτω μέρει εἶναι. αἴτια δὲ τούτων τάδε, ὅτι τὸ μὲν στῆθος οὔτε κατωτέρω ἂν πολὺ, οὔτε ἀνωτέρω χωρήσειεν· σμικρὸς γὰρ ὁ κιγκλισμὸς τοῦ ἄρθρου τοῦ ἐν τῷ στήθεϊ· αὐτό τε γὰρ ἑωυτῷ ξυνεχές ἐστι τὸ στήθος, καὶ τῇ ῤάχει· ἄγχιστα μὴν ἡ κληϊς πρὸς τὸ τοῦ ὤμου ἄρθρον πλοώδης ἐστίν· ἠνάγκασται γὰρ πυκινοκίνητος εἶναι διὰ τὴν τῆς ἀκρωμίης σύζευξιν. ἄλλως τε, ὅταν τρωθῇ, φεύγει ἐς τὸ ἄνω μέρος τὸ πρὸς τῷ στήθει προσεχόμενον, καὶ οὐ μάλα ἐς τὸ κάτω μέρος ἀναγκάζεσθαι ἐθέλει· καὶ γὰρ πέφυκε κοῦφον, καὶ ἡ εὐρυχωρίη αὐτῷ ἄνω πλείων ἢ κάτω. ὁ δὲ ὦμος, καὶ ὁ βραχίων, καὶ τὰ προσηρτημένα τούτοισιν εὐαπόλυτά ἐστιν ἀπὸ τῶν πλευρέων καὶ τοῦ στήθεος, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο δύναται καὶ ἀνωτέρω πολὺ ἀνάγεσθαι καὶ κατωτέρω ὅταν οὖν καταγῇ ἡ κληϊς, τὸ πρὸς τῷ ὤμῳ ὀστέον ἐς τὸ κατωτέρω ἐπιῤῥέπει· ἐς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐπιφορώτερον αὐτὸ ἅμα τῷ ὤμῳ καὶ τῷ βραχίονι κάτω ῤέψαι μᾶλλον, ἢ ἐς τὸ ἄνω. ὁπότε οὖν ταῦτα τοιαῦτά ἐστιν, ἀξυνετέουσιν ὅσοι τὸ ὑπερέχον τοῦ ὀστέου ἐς τὸ κάτω καταναγκάσαι οἴονται. ἀλλὰ δῆλον, ὅτι τὸ κάτω πρὸς τὸ ἄνω προσακτέον ἐστίν· τοῦτο γὰρ ἔχει κίνησιν, τοῦτο γάρ ἐστι καὶ τὸ ἀποστὰν ἀπὸ τῆς φύσιος. δῆλον οὖν, ὅτι ἄλλως μὲν οὐδαμῶς ἐστιν ἀναγκάσαι τοῦτο (αἱ γὰρ ἐπιδέσιες οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον προσαναγκάζουσιν ἢ ἀπαναγκάζουσιν)· εἰ δέ τις τὸν βραχίονα πρὸς τῇσι πλευρῇσιν ἐόντα ἀναγκάζοι ὡς μάλιστα ἄνω, ὡς ὅτι ὀξύτατος ὁ ὦμος φαίνηται εἶναι, δῆλον ὅτι οὕτως ἂν ἁρμοσθείη πρὸς τὸ ὀστέον τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ στήθεος πεφυκὸς, ὅθεν ἀπεσπάσθη. εἰ οὖν τις τῇ μὲν ἐπιδέσει χρῷτο τῇ νομίμῃ τοῦ ταχέως ξυναλθεσθῆναι εἵνεκα, ἡγήσαιτο δὲ τἄλλα πάντα μάτην εἶναι παρὰ τὸ σχῆμα τὸ εἰρημένον, ὀρθῶς τε ἂν ξυνίοι, ἰητρεύοι τε ἂν τάχιστα καὶ κάλλιστα. κατακέεσθαι μέντοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον μέγα τὸ διάφορόν ἐστιν· καὶ ἡμέραι ἱκαναὶ τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, εἰ ἀτρεμέοι, εἴκοσι δὲ πάμπολλαι.

[¶1] 15. But if the clavicle be fractured in the opposite manner (which does not readily happen), so that the fragment of bone connected with the breast is depressed, while the piece connected with the acromion is raised up and rides over other, this case does not require much management, for if the shoulder and arm be let go, the fragments of the bone will be adjusted to one another, and an ordinary bandage will suffice, and the callus will be formed in the course of a few days.

> Greek: 15. 15. εἰ μέντοι τινὶ ἐπὶ τἀναντία ἡ κληϊς κατεαγείη, ὃ οὐ μάλα γίνεται, ὥστε τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ στήθεος ὀστέον ὑποδεδυκέναι, τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀκρωμίης ὀστέον ὑπερέχειν καὶ ἐποχέεσθαι ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου, οὐδεμιῆς μεγάλης ἰητρείης ταῦτά γʼ ἂν δέοιτο· αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ ὦμος ἀφιέμενος καὶ ὁ βραχίων ἱδρύοι ἂν τὰ ὀστέα πρὸς ἄλληλα, καὶ φαύλη ἄν τις ἐπίδεσις ἀρκέοι, καὶ ὀλίγαι ἡμέραι τῆς πωρώσιος γένοιντʼ ἄν.

[¶2] 16. If the fracture be not thus, but if it incline either forward or backward, it may be restored to its natural position, by raising the shoulder with the arm as formerly described, and brought back to its natural place, when the cure will be speedily accomplished. Most of the varieties of displacement may be rectified by raising the arm upward. When the upper bone is displaced laterally or downward, it would favor the adaptation of the parts if the patient would lie on his back, and if some elevated substance were placed between the shoulder-blades, so that the breast may be depressed as much as possible upon the two sides; and if, while another person raised the arm extended along the sides, the physician, applying the palm of the one hand to the head of the bone, would push it away, and with the other would adjust the broken bones, he would thus reduce the parts most readily to their natural position. But, as formerly stated, the upper bone (sternal fragment?) is rarely depressed downward. In most cases, after the bandages have been applied, that position is beneficial in which the elbow is fixed to the same side, and the shoulder is kept elevated; but in certain cases, the shoulder is to be raised, as has been directed, and the elbow is to be brought forward to the breast, and the hand laid on the acromion of the sound side. If the patient has the resolution to lie in bed, something should be placed so as to support the shoulder, and keep it as much elevated as possible. But if he walk about, the arm should be slung in a shawl, which embraces the point of the elbow, and is passed round the neck.

> Greek: 16. 16. εἰ δὲ μὴ κατεαγείη μὲν οὕτως, παρολισθάνοι δὲ ἐς τὸ πλάγιον ἢ τῇ ἢ τῇ, ἐς τὴν φύσιν μὲν ἀπαγαγεῖν ἂν δέοι, ἀναγαγόντα τὸν ὦμον σὺν τῷ βραχίονι, ὥσπερ καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται· ὅταν δὲ ἵζηται ἐς τὴν ἀρχαίην φύσιν, ταχείη ἂν ἡ ἄλλη ἰητρείη εἴη. τὰ μὲν οὖν πλεῖστα τῶν παραλλαγμάτων κατορθοῖ αὐτὸς ὁ βραχίων ἀναγκαζόμενος πρὸς τὰ ἄνω. ὅσα δὲ τῶν ἄνωθεν παρολισθάνοντα ἐς τὸ πλάγιον ἦλθεν, ἢ ἐς τὸ κατωτέρω, συμπορσύνοι ἂν τὴν κατόρθωσιν, εἰ ὁ μὲν ἄνθρωπος ὕπτιος κέοιτο, κατὰ δὲ τὸ μεσηγὺ τῶν ὠμοπλατέων ὑψηλότερόν τι ὀλίγῳ ὑποκέοιτο, ὡς περιῤῥηδὲς ἔῃ τὸ στῆθος ὡς μάλιστα· καὶ τὸν βραχίονα εἰ ἀνάγοι τις παρὰ τὰς πλευρὰς παρατεταμένον, ὁ δὲ ἰητρὸς τῇ μὲν ἑτέρῃ χειρὶ ἐς τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ βραχίονος ἐμβαλὼν τὸ θέναρ τῆς χειρὸς ἀπωθέοι, τῇ δὲ ἑτέρῃ τὰ ὀστέα τὰ κατεηγότα εὐτεθίζοι, οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα ἐς τὴν φύσιν ἄγοι· ἀτὰρ, ὥσπερ ἤδη εἴρηται, οὐ μάλα τὸ ἄνωθεν ὀστέον ἐς τὸ κάτω φιλέει ὑποδύνειν. τοῖσι μὲν οὖν πλείστοισιν, ὅταν ἐπιδεθῶσι, τὸ σχῆμα ἀρήγει, παρʼ αὐτὰς τὰς πλευρὰς τὸν ἀγκῶνα ἔχοντα, οὕτως ἐς τὸ ἄνω τὸν ὦμον ἀναγκάζεσθαι· ἔστι δʼ οἷσι μὲν τὸν ὦμον ἀναγκάζειν δεῖ ἐς τὸ ἄνω, ὡς εἴρηται, τὸν δὲ ἀγκῶνα πρὸς τὸ στῆθος παράγειν, ἄκρην δὲ τὴν χεῖρα παρὰ τὸ ἀκρώμιον τοῦ ὑγιέος ὤμου ἴσχειν. ἢν μὲν οὖν κατακέεσθαι τολμᾷ, ἀντιστήριγμά τι προστιθέναι χρὴ, ὡς ἂν ὁ ὦμος ἀνωτάτω ἔῃ· ἢν δὲ περιίῃ, σφενδόνην χρὴ, ἐκ ταινίης περὶ τὸ ὀξὺ τοῦ ἀγκῶνος ποιήσαντα, ἀναλαμβάνειν περὶ τὸν αὐχένα.

[¶3] 17. When the elbow-joint is displaced or dislocated to the side or outward, while its sharp point (olecranon?) remains in the cavity of the humerus, extension is to be made in a straight line, and the projecting part is to be pushed backward and to the side.

> Greek: 17. 17. ἀγκῶνος δὲ ἄρθρον παραλλάξαν μὲν ἢ παραρθρῆσαν πρὸς πλευρὴν ἢ ἔξω, μένοντος τοῦ ὀξέος τοῦ ἐν τῷ κοίλῳ τοῦ βραχίονος, ἐς εὐθὺ κατατείναντα, τὸ ἐξέχον ἀπωθεῖν ὀπίσω καὶ ἐς τὸ πλάγιον.

[¶4] 18. In complete dislocations toward either side, extension is to be made as in bandaging fracture of the arm; for thus the rounded part of the elbow will not form an obstacle to it. Dislocation, for the most part, takes place toward the sides (inwardly?). Reduction is to be effected by separating (the bones) as much as possible, so that the end (of the humerus) may not come in contact with the olecranon, and it is to be carried up, and turned round, and not forced in a straight line, and, at the same time, the opposite sides are to be pushed together, and propelled into their proper place. It will further assist if rotation of the fore-arm be made at the elbow, sometimes turning it into a supine position, and sometimes into a prone. The position for the treatment consists in keeping the hand a little higher than the elbow, and the arm at the sides; then it may either be suspended or laid at rest, for either position will answer; and nature and the usage of common means will accomplish the cure, if the callus does not form improperly: it is formed quickly. The treatment is to be conducted with bandages according to the rule for bandaging articulations, and the point of the elbow is to be included in the bandage.

> Greek: 18. 18. τὰ δὲ τελείως ἐκβάντα ἢ ἔνθα, ἢ ἔνθα, κατάτασις μὲν, ἐν ᾗ ὁ βραχίων κατεαγεὶς ἐπιδέεται· οὕτω γὰρ ἂν τὸ καμπύλον τοῦ ἀγκῶνος οὐ κωλύσει. ἐκπίπτει δὲ μάλιστα ἐς τὸ πρὸς πλευρὰς μέρος. τὰς δὲ κατορθώσιας, ἀπάγοντα ὅτι πλεῖστον, ὡς μὴ ψαύῃ τῆς κορώνης ἡ κεφαλὴ, μετέωρον περιάγειν, καὶ περικάμπτειν, καὶ μὴ ἐς εὐθὺ βιάζεσθαι, ἅμα δὲ ὠθέειν τἀναντία ἐφʼ ἑκάτερα, καὶ παρωθέειν ἐς χώρην· ξυνωφελοίη δʼ ἂν καὶ ἐπίστρεψις ἀγκῶνος ἐν τουτέοισιν, ἐν τῷ μὲν ἐς τὸ ὕπτιον, ἐν τῷ δὲ ἐς τὸ πρηνές. ἴησις δὲ, σχήματος μὲν, ὀλίγῳ ἀνωτέρω ἄκρην τὴν χεῖρα τοῦ ἀγκῶνος ἔχειν, βραχίονα δὲ κατὰ πλευράς· οὕτω δὲ καὶ ἀνάληψις, καὶ θέσις, καὶ εὔφορον· καὶ φύσις, καὶ χρῆσις ἐν κοινῷ, ἢν ἄρα μὴ κακῶς πωρωθῇ· πωροῦται δὲ ταχέως. ἴησις δὲ, ὀθονίοισι κατὰ τὸν νόμον τὸν ἀρθριτικὸν, καὶ τὸ ὀξὺ προσεπιδέειν.

[¶5] 19. Dislocations at the elbow give rise to the most serious consequences, such as fevers, pain, nausea, vomitings of pure bile, and more especially when the humerus is displaced backward from pressure on the nerve, which occasions numbness; next to it is the dislocation forward; the treatment is the same; reduction in dislocation backward is by extension and adaptation; the symptom of this variety-loss of the power of extension; of dislocation forward-loss of the power of flexion, and in this case reduction is to be accomplished by placing a hard ball (in the bend of the elbow), and bending the fore-arm about it, along with sudden extension.

> Greek: 19. 19. Παλιγκοτώτατον δὲ ὁ ἀγκὼν πυρετοῖσιν, ὀδύνῃ ἀσώδεϊ, ἀκρητοχόλῳ, ἀγκῶνος δὲ μάλιστα τοὐπίσω διὰ τὸ ναρκῶδες, δεύτερον δὲ τοὔμπροσθεν· ἴησις δὲ ἡ αὐτή· ἐμβολαὶ δὲ, τοῦ μὲν ὀπίσω, ἐκτείναντα κατατεῖναι· σημεῖον δέ· οὐ γὰρ δύνανται ἐκτείνειν· τοῦ δὲ ἔμπροσθεν, οὐ δύνανται ξυγκάμπτειν· τουτέῳ δὲ ἐνθέντα τι ξυνειλιγμένον σκληρὸν, περὶ τοῦτο ξυγκάμψαι ἐξ ἐκτάσιος ἐξαίφνης.

[¶6] 20. Diastasis of the bones may be recognized by examining the part where the vein that runs along the arm divides.

> Greek: 20. 20. διαστάσιος δὲ ὀστέων σημήϊον, κατὰ τὴν φλέβα τὴν κατὰ τὸν βραχίονα σχιζομένην διαψαύοντι.

[¶7] 21. In those cases callus is quickly formed. In congenital dislocations the bones below the seat of the injury are shorter than natural, and, mostly, those nearest to the place; namely, the bones of the fore-arm, next those of the hand; and, third, those of the fingers. The arm and shoulder are stronger, owing to the nourishment which they receive, and the other arm, from the additional work which it has to perform, is still more strong. Wasting of the flesh takes place on the inside if the dislocation be on the outside; or otherwise, on the side opposite the dislocation.

> Greek: 21. 21. ταῦτα δὲ ταχέως διαπωροῦται· ἐκ γενεῆς δὲ, βραχύτερα τὰ κάτω τοῦ σίνεος ὀστέα, πλεῖστον τὰ ἐγγύτατα τοῦ πήχεος, δεύτερον, χειρὸς, τρίτον, δακτύλων· βραχίων δὲ καὶ ὦμος, ἐγκρατέστερα διὰ τὴν τροφήν· ἡ δὲ ἑτέρη χεὶρ διὰ τὰ ἔργα ἔτι πλείω ἐγκρατεστέρη. Μινύθησις δὲ σαρκῶν, εἰ μὲν ἔξω ἐξέπεσεν, ἔσωθεν· εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἐς τοὐναντίον, ᾗ ἐξέπεσεν.

[¶8] 22. When the elbow is dislocated either inward or outward, extension is to be made with the fore-arm at a right angle to the arm; the arm, suspended by means of a shawl passed through the armpit, and a weight attached to the extremity of the elbow; or force may be applied with the hands; when the articular extremity has been cleared, the displaced parts are to be rectified with the palms of the hand, as in dislocations of the hands. It is to be bandaged, suspended in a sling, and placed while in this attitude.

> Greek: 22. 22. ἀγκὼν δὲ ἢν ἔσω ἢ ἔξω ἐκβῇ, κατάτασις μὲν ἐν σχήματι ἐγγωνίῳ τῷ πήχεϊ πρὸς βραχίονα· τὴν μὲν μασχάλην ἀναλαμβάνοντα ταινίῃ ἀνακρεμάσαι, ἀγκῶνι δὲ ἄκρῳ ὑποτιθέντα τι παρὰ τὸ ἄρθρον βάρος, ἐκκρεμάσαι, ἢ χερσὶ καταναγκάζειν· ὑπεραιωρηθέντος δὲ τοῦ ἄρθρου, αἱ παραγωγαὶ τοῖσι θέναρσιν, ὡς τὰ ἐν χερσίν· ἐπίδεσις ἐν τουτέῳ τῷ σχήματι, καὶ ἀνάληψις, καὶ θέσις.

[¶9] 23. Dislocations backward are to be rectified by the palms of the hands, along with sudden extension; the two acts are to be performed together, as in other cases of the kind. But in dislocation forward the arm is to be bent around a ball of cloth of proper size, and at the same time replaced.

> Greek: 23. 23. τὰ δὲ ὄπισθεν, ἐξαίφνης ἐκτείνοντα, διορθοῦν τοῖσι θέναρσιν· ἅμα δὲ δεῖ ἐν τῇ διορθώσει καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἑτέροισιν. ἢν δὲ ἔμπροσθεν, ἀμφὶ ὀθόνιον ξυνειλιγμένον, εὔογκον, ξυγκάμπτοντα ἅμα διορθοῦν.

[¶10] 24. But if the displacement be on the other side, both these operations are to be performed in effecting the adjustment. For conducting the treatment, the position and bandaging are the same as in the other cases. But all these cases may be reduced by ordinary distention.

> Greek: 24. 24. ἢν δὲ ἑτεροκλινὲς ἔῃ, ἐν τῇ διορθώσει ἀμφότερα ἅμα χρὴ ποιέειν. τῆς δὲ μελέτης τῆς θεραπείης, κοινὸν τὸ σχῆμα καὶ ἡ ἐπίδεσις. δύναται δὲ καὶ ἐκ τῆς διατάσιος κοινῇ ξυμπίπτειν ἅπαντα.

[¶11] 25. Of the methods of reduction, some operate by raising up the part, some by extension, and some by rotation: the last consists in rapidly turning the fore-arm to this side and that.

> Greek: 25. 25. τῶν δὲ ἐμβολέων, αἱ μὲν ἐξ ὑπεραιωρήσιος ἐμβάλλονται, αἱ δὲ ἐκ κατατάσιος, αἱ δὲ ἐκ περισφάλσιος· αὗται δὲ ἐκ τῶν ὑπερβολέων τῶν σχημάτων, ἢ τῇ, ἢ τῇ, ξὺν τῷ τάχει.

[¶12] 26. The joint of the hand is dislocated either inward or outward, most frequently inward. The symptoms are easily recognized: if inward, the patient cannot at all bend his fingers; and if outward, he cannot extend them. With regard to the reduction,-by placing the fingers above a table, extension and counter-extension are to be made by other persons, while with the palm or heel of the hand on the projecting bone one pushes forward, and another from behind on the other bone; some soft substance is to be applied to it, and the arm is to be turned to the prone position if the dislocation was forward, but to the supine, if backward. The treatment is to be conducted with bandages.

> Greek: 26. 26. χειρὸς δὲ ἄρθρον ὀλισθάνει ἢ ἔσω, ἢ ἔξω, ἔσω δὲ τὰ πλεῖστα. σημήϊα δὲ εὔσημα· ἢν μὲν εἴσω, ξυγκάμπτειν τοὺς δακτύλους οὐ δύνανται· ἢν δὲ ἔξω, ἐκτείνειν. ἐμβολὴ δὲ, ὑπὲρ τραπέζης τοὺς δακτύλους ἔχων, τοὺς μὲν τείνειν, τοὺς δὲ ἀντιτείνειν, τὸ δὲ ἐξέχον ἢ θέναρι, ἢ πτέρνῃ ἅμα ἀπωθέειν, πρόσω καὶ κάτωθεν κατὰ τὸ ἕτερον ὀστέον, ὄγκον μαλθακὸν ὑποθεὶς, ἢν μὲν ἄνω, καταστρέψας τὴν χεῖρα, ἢν δὲ κάτω, ὑπτίην. ἴησις δὲ, ὀθονίοισιν.

[¶13] 27. The whole hand is dislocated either inward or outward, or to this side or that, but more especially inward; and sometimes the epiphysis is displaced, and sometimes the other of these bones is separated. In these cases strong extension is to be applied, and pressure is to be made on the projecting bone, and counter-pressure on the opposite side, both at the same time, behind and at the side, with the hands upon a table, or with the heel. These accidents give rise to serious consequences and deformities; but in the course of time the part gets strong, and admits of being used. The cure is with bandages, which ought to embrace both the hand and fore-arm; and splints are to be applied as far as the fingers; and when they are used they should be more frequently unloosed than infractures, and more copious affusions of water should be used.

> Greek: 27. 27. ὅλη δὲ ἡ χεὶρ ὀλισθάνει, ἢ ἔσω, ἢ ἔξω, ἢ ἔνθα, ἢ ἔνθα, μάλιστα δὲ εἴσω· ἔστι δʼ ὅτε καὶ ἡ ἐπίφυσις ἐκινήθη· ἔστι δʼ ὅτε τὸ ἕτερον τῶν ὀστέων διέστη. τουτέοισι κατάτασις ἰσχυρὴ ποιητέη· καὶ τὸ μὲν ἐξέχον ἀπωθέειν, τὸ δὲ ἕτερον ἀντωθέειν, δύο εἴδεα ἅμα, ἐς τοὐπίσω καὶ ἐς τὸ πλάγιον, ἢ χερσὶν ἐπὶ τραπέζης, ἢ πτέρνῃ. Παλίγκοτα δὲ καὶ ἀσχήμονα· τῷ δὲ χρόνῳ κρατύνεται ἐς χρῆσιν. ἴησις, ὀθονίοισι ξὺν τῇ χειρὶ καὶ τῷ πήχεϊ· καὶ νάρθηκας μέχρι δακτύλων τιθέναι· ἐν νάρθηξι δὲ τεθέντα ταῦτα πυκνότερον λύειν, ἢ τὰ κατήγματα, καὶ καταχύσει πλείονι χρέεσθαι.

[¶14] 28. In congenital dislocations (at the wrist) the hand becomes shortened, and the atrophy of the flesh occurs, for the most part, on the side opposite to the dislocation. In an adult the bones remain of their natural size.

> Greek: 28. 28. ἐκ γενεῆς δὲ, βραχυτέρη ἡ χεὶρ γίνεται, καὶ μινύθησις σαρκῶν μάλιστα τἀναντία, ἢ ᾗ τὸ ἔκπτωμα· ηὐξημένῳ δὲ τὰ ὀστέα μένει.

[¶15] 29. Dislocation at the joint of a finger is easily recognized. Reduction is to be effected by making extension in a straight line, and applying pressure on the projecting bone, and counter-pressure on the opposite side of the other. The treatment is with bandages. When not reduced, callus is formed outside of the joint. When the dislocation takes place at birth, during adolescence the bones below the dislocation are shortened, and the flesh is wasted rather on the opposite than on the same side with the dislocation. When it occurs in an adult the bones remain of their proper size.

> Greek: 29. 29. δακτύλου δὲ ἄρθρον, ὀλισθὸν μὲν, εὔσημον. ἐμβολὴ δὲ, κατατείναντα ἐς ἰθὺ, τὸ μὲν ἐξέχον ἀπωθέειν, τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον ἀντωθέειν· ἴησις δὲ, ὀθονίοισιν. μὴ ἐμπεσὸν δὲ, ἐπιπωροῦται ἔξωθεν Ἐκ γενεῆς δὲ ἢ ἐν αὐξήσει ἐξαρθρήσαντα, τὰ ὀστέα βραχύνεται τὰ κάτω τοῦ ὀλισθήματος, καὶ σάρκες μινύθουσι τἀναντία μάλιστα, ἢ ὡς τὸ ἔκπτωμα· ηὐξημένῳ δὲ τὰ ὀστέα μένει.

[¶16] 30. The jaw-bone, in few cases, is completely dislocated, for the zygomatic process formed from the upper jaw-bone (malar?) and the bone behind the ear (temporal?) shuts up the heads of the under jaw, being above the one (condyloid process?), and below the other (coronoid process?). Of these extremities of the lower jaw, the one, from its length, is not much exposed to accidents, while the other, the coronoid, is more prominent than the zygoma, and from both these heads nervous tendons arise, with which the muscles called temporal and masseter are connected; they have got these names from their actions and connections; for in eating, speaking, and the other functional uses of the mouth, the upper jaw is at rest, as being connected with the head by synarthrosis, and not by diarthrosis (enarthrosis?): but the lower jaw has motion, for it is connected with the upper jaw and the head by enarthrosis. Wherefore, in convulsions and tetanus, the first symptom manifested is rigidity of the lower jaw; and the reason why wounds in the temporal region are fatal and induce coma, will be stated in another place. These are the reasons why complete dislocation does not readily take place, and this is another reason, because there is seldom a necessity for swallowing so large pieces of food as would make a man gape more than he easily can, and dislocation could not take place in any other position than in great gaping, by which the jaw is displaced to either side. This circumstance, however, contributes to dislocation there; of nerves (ligaments?) and muscles around joints, or connected with joints, such as are frequently moved in using the member are the most yielding to extension, in the same manner as well-dressed hides yield the most. With regard, then, to the matter on hand, the jaw-bone is rarely dislocated, but is frequently slackened (partially displaced?) in gaping, in the same manner as many other derangements of muscles and tendons arise. Dislocation is particularly recognized by these symptoms: the lower jaw protrudes forward, there is displacement to the opposite side, the coronoid process appears more prominent than natural on the upper jaw, and the patient cannot shut his lower jaw but with difficulty. The mode of reduction which will apply in such cases is obvious: one person must secure the patient’s head, and another, taking hold of the lower jaw with his fingers within and without at the chin, while the patient gapes as much as he can, first moves the lower jaw about for a time, pushing it to this side and that with the hand, and directing the patient himself to relax the jaw, to move it about, and yield as much as possible; then all of a sudden the operator must open the mouth, while he attends at the same time to three positions: for the lower jaw is to be moved from the place to which it is dislocated to its natural position; it is to be pushed backward, and along with these the jaws are to be brought together and kept shut. This is the method of reduction, and it cannot be performed in any other way. A short treatment suffices, a waxed compress is to be laid on, and bound with a loose bandage. It is safer to operate with the patient laid on his back, and his head supported on a leather cushion well filled, so that it may yield as little as possible, but some person must hold the patient’s head.

> Greek: 30. 30. γνάθος δὲ ὀλίγοισι τελέως ἐξήρθρησεν· ὀστέον τε γὰρ τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς ἄνω γνάθου πεφυκὸς ὑπεζύγωται πρὸς τῷ ὑπὸ τὸ οὖς ὀστέῳ προσπεφυκότι, ὅπερ ἀποκλείει τὰς κεφαλὰς τῆς κάτω γνάθου, τῆς μὲν ἀνωτέρω ἐὸν, τῆς δὲ κατωτέρω τῶν κεφαλέων. τὰ δὲ ἄκρεα τῆς κάτω γνάθου, τὸ μὲν διὰ τὸ μῆκος οὐκ εὐπαρείσδυτον, τὸ δʼ αὖ κορωνόν τε καὶ ὑπερέχον ὑπὲρ τοῦ ζυγώματος· ἅμα τε ἀπʼ ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ἀκρέων τούτων νευρώδεες τένοντες πεφύκασιν, ἐξ ὧν ἐξήρτηνται οἱ μύες οἱ κροταφῖται καὶ μασσητῆρες καλεόμενοι· διὰ τοῦτο δὲ καλέονται, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο κινέονται, ὅτι ἐντεῦθεν ἐξήρτηνται· ἐν γὰρ τῇ ἐδωδ, καὶ ἐν τῇ διαλέκτῳ, καὶ ἐν τῇ ἄλλῃ χρήσει τοῦ στόματος, ἡ μὲν ἄνω γνάθος ἀτρεμέει· ξυνήρτηται γὰρ τῇ κεφαλῇ. καὶ οὐ διήρθρωται· ἡ δὲ κάω γνάθος κινέεται· ἀπήρθρωται γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς ἄνω γνάθου, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς. διότι μὲν οὖν ἐν σπασμοῖσι καὶ τετάνοισι πρῶτον τοῦτο τὸ ἄρθρον ἐπισημαίνει συντεταμένον, καὶ διότι πληγαὶ καίριοι καὶ καροῦσαι αἱ κροταφίτιδες γίνονται, ἐν ἄλλῳ λόγῳ εἰρήσεται. περὶ δὲ τοῦ μὴ κάρτα ἐξαρθρέειν τάδε τὰ αἴτια· αἴτιον δὲ καὶ τόδε, ὅτι οὐ μάλα καταλαμβάνουσι τοιαῦται ἀνάγκαι βρωμάτων, ὥστε τὸν ἄνθρωπον χανέειν μέζον ἢ ὅσον δύναται· ἐκπέσοι δʼ ἂν ἀπʼ οὐδενὸς ἄλλου σχήματος, ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέγα χανόντα παραγαγεῖν τὴν γένυν ἐπὶ θάτερα. Προσξυμβάλλεται μέντοι καὶ τόδε πρὸς τὸ ἐκπίπτειν· ὁκόσα γὰρ νεῦρα καὶ ὁκόσοι μύες παρὰ τὰ ἄρθρα εἰσὶν, ἢ ἀπὸ ἄρθρων ἀφʼ ὧν ξυνδέδενται, τούτων ὅσα ἐν τῇ χρήσει πλειστάκις διακινέεται, ταῦτα καὶ ἐς τὰς κατατάσιας δυνατώτατα ἐπιδιδόναι, ὥσπερ καὶ τὰ δέρματα τὰ εὐδεψητότατα πλείστην ἐπίδοσιν ἔχει. περὶ οὗ οὖν ὁ λόγος, ἐκπίπτει μὲν γνάθος ὀλιγάκις· σχᾶται μέντοι πολλάκις ἐν χάσμῃσιν, ὥσπερ καὶ ἄλλαι πολλαὶ μυῶν παραλλαγαὶ και νεύρων τούτο ποιέουσιν. δῆλον μὲν οὖν ἐκ τῶνδε μάλιστά ἐστιν, ὅταν ἐκπεπτώκῃ· προΐσχει γὰρ ἡ κάτω γνάθος ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν, καὶ παρῆκται τἀναντία τοῦ ὀλισθήματος, καὶ τοῦ ὀστέου τὸ κορωνὸν ὀγκηρότερον φαίνεται παρὰ τὴν ἄνω γνάθον, καὶ χαλεπῶς ξυμβάλλουσι τὰς κάτω γνάθους. τούτοισι δὲ ἐμβολὴ πρόδηλος, ἥτις γίνοιτʼ ἂν ἁρμόζουσα· χρὴ γὰρ τὸν μέν τινα κατέχειν τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ τετρωμένου, τὸν δὲ περιλαβόντα τὴν κάτω γνάθον καὶ ἔσωθεν καὶ ἔξωθεν τοῖσι δακτύλοισι κατὰ τὸ γένειον, χάσκοντος τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὅσον μετρίως δύναται, πρῶτον μὲν διακινέειν τὴν κάτω γνάθον χρόνον τινὰ, τῇ καὶ τῇ παράγοντα τῇ χειρὶ, καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν ἄνθρωπον κελεύειν χαλαρὴν τὴν γνάθον ἔχειν, καὶ ξυμπαράγειν, καὶ ξυνδιδόναι ὡς μάλιστα· ἔπειτα ἐξαπίνης σχάσαι, τρισὶ σχήμασιν ὁμοῦ προσέχοντα τὸν νόον· δεῖ μὲν γὰρ παράγεσθαι ἐκ τῆς διαστροφῆς ἐς τὴν φύσιν, δεῖ δὲ ἐς τοὐπίσω ἀπωσθῆναι τὴν γνάθον τὴν κάτω, δεῖ δὲ ἑπόμενον τούτοισι ξυμβάλλειν τὰς γνάθους, καὶ μὴ χάσκειν. ἐμβολὴ μὲν οὖν αὕτη, καὶ οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο ἀπʼ ἄλλων σχημάτων. ἰητρείη δὲ βραχείη ἀρκέει· σπλῆνα προστιθέντα κεκηρωμένον χαλαρῷ ἐπιδέσμῳ ἐπιδεῖν. ἀσφαλέστερον δὲ χειρίζειν ἐστὶν ὕπτιον κατακλίναντα τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐρείσαντα τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ σκυτίνου ὑποκεφαλαίου ὡς πληρεστάτου, ἵνα ὡς ἥκιστα ὑπείκῃ· προσκατέχειν δέ τινα χρὴ τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ τετρωμένου.

[¶17] 31. When the jaw is dislocated on both sides, the treatment is the same. The patients are less able to shut the mouth than in the former variety; and the jaw protrudes farther in this case, but is not distorted; the absence of distortion may be recognized by comparing the corresponding rows of the teeth in the upper and lower jaws. In such cases reduction should be performed as quickly as possible; the method of reduction has been described above. If not reduced, the patient’s life will be in danger from continual fevers, coma attended with stupor (for these muscles, when disordered and stretched preternaturally, induce coma); and there is usually diarrhea attended with billous, unmixed, and scanty dejections; and the vomitings, if any, consist of pure bile, and the patients commonly die on the tenth day.

> Greek: 31. 31. ἢν δʼ ἀμφότεραι αἱ γνάθοι ἐξαρθρήσωσιν, ἡ μὲν ἴησις ἡ αὐτή. ξυμβάλλειν δέ τι ἧσσον οὗτοι τὸ στόμα δύνανται· καὶ γὰρ προπετέστεραι αἱ γένυες τούτοισιν, ἀστραβέες δέ· τὸ δὲ ἀστραβὲς μάλιστʼ ἂν γνοίης τοῖσιν ὁρίοισι τῶν ὀδόντων, τῶν τε ἄνω καὶ τῶν κάτω κατʼ ἴξιν. τούτοισι ξυμφέρει ἐμβάλλειν ὡς τάχιστα· ἐμβολῆς δὲ τρόπος πρόσθεν εἴρηται. ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, κίνδυνος περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ὑπὸ πυρετῶν ξυνεχέων καὶ νωθρῆς καρώσιος (καρώδεες γὰρ οἱ μύες οὗτοι, καὶ ἀλλοιούμενοι, καὶ ἐντεινόμενοι παρὰ φύσιν· φιλέει δὲ καὶ ἡ γαστὴρ ὑποχωρέειν τούτοισι χολώδεα, ἄκρητα, ὀλίγα· καὶ ἢν ἐμέωσιν, ἄκρητα ἐμέουσιν· οὗτοι οὖν καὶ θνήσκουσι δεκαταῖοι μάλιστα.

[¶18] 32. In fracture of the lower jaw, when the bone is not fairly broken across, and is still partially retained, but displaced, it should be adjusted by introducing the fingers at the side of the tongue, and making suitable counter-pressure on the outside; and if the teeth at the wound be distorted and loosened, when the bone is adjusted, they should be connected together, not only two, but more of them, with a gold thread, if possible, but otherwise, with a linen thread, until the bone be consolidated, and then the part is to be dressed with cerate, a few compresses, and a few bandages, which should not be very tight, but rather loose. For it should be well known that in fracture of the jaw, dressing with bandages, if properly performed, is of little advantage, but occasions great mischief if improperly done. Frequent examinations should be made about the tongue, and prolonged pressure should be applied with the fingers, in order to rectify the displaced bone. It would be best if one could do so constantly, but that is impossible.

> Greek: 32. 32. ἢν δὲ κατεαγῇ ἡ κάτω γνάθος, ἢν μὲν μὴ ἀποκαυλισθῇ παντάπασιν, ἀλλὰ ξυνέχηται τὸ ὀστέον, ἐκκεκλιμένον δὲ ἔῃ, κατορθῶσαι μὲν χρὴ τὸ ὀστέον, παρά γε τὴν γλῶσσαν πλαγίην ὑπείραντα τοὺς δακτύλους, τὸ δὲ ἔξωθεν ἀντερείδοντα, ὡς ἂν ξυμφέρῃ· καὶ ἢν διεστραμμένοι ἔωσιν οἱ ὀδόντες οἱ κατὰ τὸ τρῶμα καὶ κεκινημένοι, ὁκόταν τὸ ὀστέον κατορθωθῇ, ζεῦξαι τοὺς ὀδόντας χρὴ πρὸς ἀλλήλους, μὴ μόνον τοὺς δύο, ἀλλὰ καὶ πλέονας, μάλιστα μὲν χρυσίῳ, ἔστʼ ἂν κρατυνθῇ τὸ ὀστέον, εἰ δὲ μὴ, λίνῳ· ἔπειτα ἐπιδεῖν κηρωτῇ καὶ σπλήνεσιν ὀλίγοισι καὶ ὀθονίοισιν ὀλίγοισι, μὴ ἄγαν ἐρείδοντα, ἀλλὰ χαλαροῖσιν. εὖ γὰρ εἰδέναι χρὴ, ὅτι ἐπίδεσις ὀθονίων, γνάθου καταγείσης, μικρὰ μὲν ἂν ὠφελέοι, εἰ χρηστῶς ἐπιδέοιτο, μεγάλα δʼ ἂν βλάπτοι, εἰ κακῶς ἐπιδέοιτο. πυκνὰ δὲ παρὰ τὴν γλῶσσαν ἐσματέεσθαι χρὴ, καὶ πουλὺν χρόνον ἀντέχειν τοῖσι δακτύλοισι κατορθοῦντα τοῦ ὀστέου τὸ ἐκκλιθέν· ἄριστον δὲ, εἰ αἰεὶ δύναιτο, ἀλλʼ οὐχ οἶόν τε.

[¶19] 33. But if the bone be fairly broken across (this, however, rarely happens), it is to be set in the manner now described. When adjusted, the teeth are to be fastened together as formerly described, for this will contribute much toward keeping the parts at rest, especially if properly fastened, and the ends of the thread secured with knots. But it is not easy to describe exactly in writing the whole manipulation of the case; but the reader must figure the thing to himself from the description given. Then one must take a piece of Carthaginian leather; if the patient be a younger person, it will be sufficient to use the outer skin, but if an adult the whole thickness of the hide will be required; it is to be cut to the breadth of about three inches, or as much as will be required, and having smeared the jaw with a little gum (for thus it sticks more pleasantly), the end of the skin is to be fastened with the glue near the fractured part of the jaw, at the distance of an inch or a little more, from the wound. This piece is to be applied below the jaw; but the thong should have a cut in it, in the direction of the chin, so that it may go over the sharp point of the chin. Another piece of thong like this, or somewhat broader, is to be glued to the upper part of the jaw, at about the same distance from the wound as the other thong; this thong should be so cut as to encircle the ear. The thongs should be sharp-pointed at the part where they unite, and in gluing them, the flesh of the thong should be turned to the patient’s skin, for in this way it will be more tenacious; then we must stretch this thong, but still more so the one at the chin, in order to prevent the fragments of the jaw from riding over each other, and the thongs are to be fastened at the vertex, and then a bandage is to be bound round the forehead, and a proper apparatus is to be put over all, to prevent the bandages from being displaced. The patient should lie upon the sound side of the jaw, not resting upon the jaw, but upon the head. He is to be kept on a spare diet for ten days, and then nourished without delay. If there be no inflammation during the first days, the jaw is consolidated in twenty days; for callus quickly forms in this, as in all the other porous bones, provided there be no sphacelus (exfoliation?). But much remains to be said on the sphacelus of bones in another place. This method of distention with glued substances is mild, of easy application, and is useful for many dislocations in many parts of the body. Those physicians who have not judgment combined with their dexterity, expose themselves in fractures of the jaws, as in other cases, for they apply a variety of bandages to a fractured jaw-bone, sometimes properly, and sometimes improperly. For all such bandaging of a fractured jawbone has a tendency rather to derange the bones connected with the fracture, than to bring them into their natural position.

> Greek: 33. 33. ἢν δὲ ἀποκαυλισθῇ παντάπασι τὸ ὀστέον (ὀλιγάκις δὲ τοῦτο γίνεται), κατορθοῦν μὲν χρὴ τὸ ὀστέον οὕτω, καθάπερ εἴρηται. ὅταν δὲ κατορθώσῃς, τοὺς ὀδόντας χρὴ ζευγνῦναι, ὡς πρόσθεν εἴρηται· μέγα γὰρ ἂν ξυλλαμβάνοι ἐς τὴν ἀτρεμίην, προσέτι καὶ ἤν τις ὀρθῶς ζεύξῃ, ὥσπερ χρὴ, τὰς ἀρχὰς ῤάψας. ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐ ῤηΐδιον ἐν γραφῇ χειρουργίην πᾶσαν ἀτρεκέως διηγέεσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ αὐτὸν ὑποτοπέεσθαι χρὴ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων. ἔπειτα χρὴ δέρματος καρχηδονίου, ἢν μὲν νηπιώτερος ἔῃ ὁ τρωθεὶς, ἀρκέει τῷ λοπῷ χρέεσθαι, ἢν δὲ τελειότερος ἔῃ, αὐτῷ τῷ δέρματι· ταμόντα δὲ χρὴ εὖρος ὡς τριδάκτυλον, ἢ ὅκως ἂν ἁρμόζῃ, ὑπαλείψαντα κόμμι τὴν γνάθον (εὐμενέστερον γὰρ), κόλλῃ προσκολλῆσαι τὸ δέρμα ἄκρον πρὸς τὸ ἀποκεκαυλισμένον τῆς γνάθου, ἀπολείποντα ὡς δάκτυλον ἀπὸ τοῦ τρώματος ἢ ὀλίγῳ πλέον· τοῦτο μὲν ἐς τὸ κάτω μέρος· ἐχέτω δὲ ἐντομὴν κατὰ τὴν ἴξιν τοῦ γενείου ὁ ἱμὰς, ὡς ἀμφιβεβήκῃ ἀμφὶ τὸ ὀξὺ τοῦ γενείου. ἕτερον δὲ ἱμάντα τοιοῦτον, ἢ ὀλίγῳ πλατύτερον προσκολλῆσαι χρὴ πρὸς τὸ ἄνω μέρος τῆς γνάθου, ἀπολείποντα καὶ τοῦτον ἀπὸ τοῦ τρώματος, ὅσονπερ ὁ ἕτερος ἀπέλιπεν· ἐσχίσθω δὲ καὶ οὗτος ὁ ἱμὰς τὴν ἀμφὶ τὸ οὖς περίβασιν. Ἀποξέες δὲ ἔστωσαν οἱ ἱμάντες ἀμφὶ τὴν ξυναφήν· ἐν δὲ τῇ κολλήσει ἡ σὰρξ τοῦ σκύτεος πρὸς τοῦ χρωτὸς ἔστω, ἐχεκολλότερον γὰρ οὕτως. ἔπειτα κακατείναντα χρὴ καὶ τοῦτον τὸν ἱμάντα μᾶλλον δέ τι τὸν περὶ τὸ γένειον, ὡς ὅτι μάλιστα μὴ ἀπομυλλήνῃ ἡ γνάθος, ξυνάψαι τοὺς ἱμάντας κατὰ τὴν κορυφὴν, κἄπειτα περὶ τὸ μέτωπον ὀθονίῳ καταδῆσαι, καὶ κατάβλημα χρὴ εἶναι, ὥσπερ νομίζεται, ὡς ἀτρεμέῃ τὰ δεσμά. τὴν δὲ κατάκλισιν ποιεέσθω ἐπὶ τὴν ὑγιέα γνάθον, μὴ τῇ γνάθῳ ἐρηρεισμένος, ἀλλὰ τῇ κεφαλῇ. ἰσχναίνειν δὲ χρὴ τὸ σῶμα ἄχρι ἡμερέων δέκα, ἔπειτα ἀνατρέφειν μὴ βραδέως· ἢν γὰρ ἐν τῇσι πρώτῃσιν ἡμέρῃσι μὴ φλεγμήνῃ, ἐν εἴκοσιν ἡμέρῃσιν ἡ γνάθος κρατύνεται· ταχέως γὰρ ἐπιπωροῦται, ὥσπερ καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ ἀραιὰ ὀστέα, ἢν μὴ ἐπισφακελίσῃ. ἀλλὰ γὰρ περὶ σφακελισμῶν τῶν ξυμπάντων ὀστέων ἄλλος μακρὸς λόγος λείπεται. αὕτη ἡ διάτασις ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν κολλημάτων εὐμενὴς, καὶ εὐταμίευτος, καὶ ἐς πολλὰ καὶ πολλαχοῦ διορθώματα εὔχρηστος. τῶν δὲ ἰητρῶν οἱ μὴ ξὺν νόῳ εὔχειρες, καὶ ἐν ἄλλοισι τρώμασι τοιοῦτοί εἰσι καὶ ἐν γνάθων κατήξεσιν· ἐπιδέουσι γὰρ γνάθον κατεαγεῖσαν ποικίλως καὶ καλῶς καὶ κακῶς. πᾶσα γὰρ ἐπίδεσις γνάθου οὕτω καταγείσης ἐκκλίνει τὰ ὀστέα τὰ ἐς τὸ κάτηγμα ῤέποντα μᾶλλον, ἢ ἐς τὴν φύσιν ἄγει.

[¶20] 34. But if the lower jaw be disjointed at its symphysis in the chin (there is but one symphysis in the lower jaw, but there are several in the upper; but I am unwilling to digress from the subject, as these matters will have to be touched upon in other kinds of disease)-if, then, the symphysis be separated at the chin, it is the work which anybody can perform, to rectify it; for the part which protrudes is to be pushed inward by pressure with the fingers, and the part that inclines inward is to forced outward by pushing with the fingers from within. It is after having applied extension to separate the fragments that this is to be done, for they will thus be more easily restored to their natural position, than if one should bring them together by using force. This is proper to be known as applying to all such cases. When you have set the parts, you must fasten the teeth on both sides to one another, as formerly directed. The treatment is to be accomplished with cerate, a few compresses, and bandages. This part, in particular, requires a short but complex (?) bandaging, for it is nearly cylindrical, though not exactly so; but the turn of the bandage is to be made, if the right jaw was dislocated, to the right hand (that is said to be to the right hand when the right hand conducts the bandaging); but if the other jaw be the seat of the dislocation, the bandaging is to be made in the other direction. And if matters be properly adjusted, and the patient keep quiet, there will be a speedy recovery, and the teeth will be uninjured; but if not, the recovery will be more protracted, the teeth will be distorted, will give trouble, and become useless.

> Greek: 34. 34. ἢν δὲ ἡ κάτω γνάθος κατὰ τὴν ξύμφυσιν τὴν κατὰ τὸ γένειον διασπασθῇ (μούνη δὲ αὕτη ξύμφυσις ἐν τῇ κάτω γνάθῳ ἐστὶν, ἐν δὲ τῇ ἄνω πολλαί· ἀλλʼ οὐ βούλομαι ἀποπλανᾷν τὸν λόγον, ἐν ἄλλοισι γὰρ εἴδεσι νουσημάτων περὶ τούτων λεκτέον), ἢν οὖν διαστῇ ἡ κατὰ τὸ γένειον ξύμφυσις, κατορθῶσαι μὲν παντὸς ἀνδρός ἐστιν· τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἐξεστεὸς ἐσωθέειν χρὴ ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος, προσβάλλοντα τοὺς δακτύλους· τὸ δὲ εἴσω ῤέπον ἀνάγειν ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος, ἐνερείσαντα τοὺς δακτύλους. ἐς διάστασιν μέντοι διατεινάμενον, ταῦτα χρὴ ποιέειν· ῥᾷον γὰρ οὕτως ἐς τὴν φύσιν ἥξει, ἢ εἰ ἐγχρίπτων τις ἐς ἄλληλα τὰ ὀστέα, καταναγκάζειν πειρᾶται· τοῦτο παρὰ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα ὑπομνήματα χάριεν εἰδέναι. ὁκόταν δὲ κατορθώσῃς, ζεῦξαι μὲν χρὴ τοὺς ὀδόντας τοὺς ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ὥσπερ καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται. ἰῆσθαι δὲ χρὴ κηρωτῇ καὶ σπλήνεσιν ὀλίγοισι καὶ ὀθονίοισιν. ἐπίδεσιν δὲ βραχείην ποικίλην μάλιστα τοῦτο τὸ χωρίον ἐπιδέχεται, ἐγγὺς γάρ τι τοῦ ἰσοῤῥόπου ἐστὶν, ὡς δὴ μὴ ἰσόῤῥοπον ἐόν· τοῦ δὲ ὀθονίου τὴν περιβολὴν ποιέεσθαι χρὴ, ἢν μὲν ἡ δεξιὴ γνάθος ἐξεστήκῃ, ἐπὶ δεξιὰ (ἐπὶ δεξιὰ γὰρ νομίζεται εἶναι, ἢν ἡ δεξιὴ χεὶρ προηγῆται τῆς ἐπιδέσιος)· ἢν δὲ ἡ ἑτέρη γνάθος ἐξεστήκῃ, ὡς ἑτέρως χρὴ τὴν ἐπίδεσιν ἄγειν. κἢν μὲν ὀρθῶς τις κατορθώσηται καὶ ἐπατρεμήσῃ ὡς χρὴ, ταχείη μὲν ἡ ἄλθεξις, οἱ δὲ ὀδόντες ἀσινέες γίνονται· ἢν δὲ μὴ, χρονιωτέρη μὲν ἡ ἄλθεξις, διαστροφὴν δὲ ἴσχουσιν οἱ ὀδόντες, καὶ σιναροὶ καὶ ἀχρήϊοι γίνονται.

[¶21] 35. Of fractures of the nose there are more than one variety, but those who, without judgment, delight in fine bandagings, do much mischief, most especially in injuries about the nose. For this is the most complex of all the forms of bandaging, having most of the turns of the bandage called “ascia,” and rhomboidal intervals and uncovered spaces of the skin. As has been said, those who practice manipulation without judgment are fond of meeting with a case of fractured nose, that they may apply the bandage. For a day or two, then, the physician glories in his performance, and the patient who has been bandaged is well pleased, but speedily the patient complains of the incumbrance of the bandage, and the physician is satisfied, because he has had an opportunity of showing his skill in applying a complex bandage to the nose. Such a bandaging does everything the very reverse of what is proper; for, in the first place, those who have their nose flattened by the fracture, will clearly have the part rendered still more flat, if pressure above be applied to it; and further, those cases in which the nose is distorted to either side, whether at the cartilage or higher up, will evidently derive no benefit from bandaging above it, but will rather be injured; for it will not admit of having compresses properly arranged on either side of the nose, and indeed, persons applying this bandage do not seek to do this.

> Greek: 35. 35. ἢν δὲ ἡ ῤὶς καταγῇ, τρόπος μὲν οὐχ εἷς ἐστι κατήξιος ἀτὰρ πολλὰ μὲν δὴ καὶ ἄλλα λωβέονται οἱ χαίροντες τῇσι καλῇσιν ἐπιδέσεσιν ἄνευ νόου, ἐν δὲ τοῖσι περὶ τὴν ῤῖνα μάλιστα· ἐπιδεσίων γάρ ἐστιν αὕτη ποικιλωτάτη, καὶ πλείστους μὲν σκεπάρνους ἔχουσα, διαῤῥωγὰς δὲ καὶ διαλείψιας ποικιλωτάτας τοῦ χρωτὸς ῤομβοειδέας. ὡς οὖν εἴρηται, οἱ τὴν ἀνόητον εὐχειρίην ἐπιτηδεύοντες ἄσμενοι ῤινὸς κατεαγυίης ἐπιτυγχάνουσιν, ὡς ἐπιδήσωσιν. μίαν μὲν οὖν ἡμέρην, ἢ δύο, ἀγάλλεται μὲν ὁ ἰητρὸς, χαίρει δὲ ὁ ἐπιδεδεμένος· ἔπειτα ταχέως μὲν ὁ ἐπιδεδεμένος κορίσκεται, ἀσηρὸν γὰρ τὸ φόρημα· ἀρκέει δὲ τῷ ἰητρῷ, ἐπειδὴ ἐπέδειξεν, ὅτι ἐπίσταται ποικίλως ῤῖνα ἐπιδέειν. ποιέει δὲ ἡ ἐπίδεσις ἡ τοιαύτη πάντα τἀναντία τοῦ δέοντος· τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ, ὁκόσοι σιμοῦνται διὰ τὴν κάτηξιν, δηλονότι, εἰ ἄνωθέν τις μᾶλλον πιέζοι, σιμώτεροι ἂν ἔτι εἶεν· τοῦτο δὲ, ὅσοισι παραστρέφεται ἢ ἔνθα ἢ ἔνθα ἡ ῤὶς, ἢ κατὰ τὸν χόνδρον, ἢ ἀνωτέρω, δηλονότι οὐδὲν αὐτοὺς ἡ ἄνωθεν ἐπίδεσις ὠφελήσει, ἀλλὰ καὶ βλάψει μᾶλλον· οὐχ οὕτω γὰρ εὖ ξυναρμόσει σπλήνεσι τὸ ἐπὶ θάτερον τῆς ῤινὸς, καίτοι οὐδὲ τοῦτο ποιέουσιν οἱ ἐπιδέοντες.

[¶22] 36. This bandaging would appear to me to answer best when the skin surrounding the bone is contused on its ridge near the middle, or if the bone itself have sustained some injury, but not a great one, in such cases, redundant callus forms in the nose, and the part becomes a little too prominent; and yet, even in these cases, the bandaging need not require much trouble, if, indeed, any bandage be applied at all; for it is enough if one lay a waxed compress on the contusion, and then apply the double-headed bandage, thus taking one turn with it. The best application to such accidents is a small cataplasm of wheaten flour, washed, and mixed up into a viscid mass. If the flour be made from good wheat, and if it be glutinous, it should be used alone for all such cases, but if it be not very glutinous, a little of the manna of frankincense, well pulverized, is to be moistened with water, and the flour is to be mixed up with it, or a very little gum may be mixed in like manner.

> Greek: 36. 36. ἄγχιστα δὲ ἡ ἐπίδεσίς μοι δοκέῃ ἄν τι ποιέειν, εἰ κατὰ μέσην τὴν ῤῖνα, κατὰ τὸ ὀξὺ, ἀμφιφλασθείη ἡ σὰρξ κατὰ τὸ ὀστέον, ἢ εἰ κατὰ τὸ ὀστέον μικρόν τι σίνος εἴη, καὶ μὴ μέγα· τοῖσι γὰρ τοιούτοισιν ἐπιπώρωμα ἴσχει ἡ ῤὶς, καὶ ὀκριοειδεστέρη τινὶ γίνεται· ἀλλʼ ὅμως οὐδὲ τούτοισι δή που πολλοῦ ὄχλου δέεται ἡ ἐπίδεσις, εἰ δή τι καὶ δεῖ ἐπιδέειν· ἀρκέει δὲ ἐπὶ μὲν τὸ φλάσμα σπληνίον ἐπιτείναντα κεκηρωμένον, ἔπειτα ὡς ἀπὸ δύο ἀρχέων ἐπιδέεται, οὕτως ὀθονίῳ ἐς ἅπαξ περιβάλλειν. ἀρίστη μέντοι ἰητρείη, τῷ ἀλήτῳ, τῷ σιτανίῳ, τῷ πλυτῷ, γλίσχρῳ, πεφυρημένῳ, ὀλίγῳ, καταπλάσσειν τὰ τοιαῦτα· χρὴ δὲ, ἢν μὲν ἐξ ἀγαθῶν ἔῃ τῶν πυρῶν τὸ ἄλητον καὶ εὐόλκιμον, τούτῳ χρέεσθαι ἐς πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα· ἢν δὲ μὴ πάνυ ὅλκιμον ἔῃ, ὀλίγην μάννην ὕδατι ὡς λειοτάτην διέντα, τούτῳ φυρᾷν τὸ ἄλητον, ἢ κόμμι πάνυ ὀλίγον ὡσαύτως μίσγειν.

## 3. Sections 37–47

Source: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/3/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/3/#p-N

[¶0] 37. In those cases in which the fractured portions are depressed and flattened, if it is depressed in front at the cartilage, something may be introduced into the nostrils to rectify the parts. If not, all such deformities may be restored by introducing the fingers into the nostrils, if this can be managed, but if not, a thick spatula is to be introduced with the fingers, not to the fore part of the nose, but to the depressed portion, and the physician is to take hold of the nose externally on both sides, and at the same time raise it up. And if the fracture be much in the fore part one may introduce into the nostrils as already stated, either caddis scraped from a linen towel, or something such wrapped up in a piece of cloth, or rather stitched in Carthaginian leather, and moulded into a shape suitable to the place into which it is to be introduced. But if the fracture be at a greater distance, it is not possible to introduce anything within, for if it was irksome to bear anything of the kind in the fore part, how is it not to be so when introduced farther in? At first, then, by rectifying the parts from within, and sparing no pains upon them from without, they are to be brought to their natural position, and set. A fractured nose may be readily restored to shape, especially on the day of the accident, or even a little later, but the physicians act irresolutely, and touch it more delicately at first than they should; for the fingers should be applied on both sides along the natural line of the nose, and it is to be pushed downward, and thus, with pressure from within, the displacement is to be rectified. But for these purposes no physician is equal to the index-fingers of the patient himself, if he will pay attention and has resolution, for they are the most natural means. Either of the fingers is to be placed firmly along the whole nose, and thus it is to be gently held, and steadily, if possible until it become firm, but if not, he himself is to hold it for as long a time as possible, or if he cannot, a child or woman should do it, for the hands ought to be soft. Thus may a fracture of the nose, attended with depression, and not with displacement to the side, but in a straight line, be most properly treated. I have never seen a case of fractured nose which could not be rectified when attempted, before callus is formed, provided the treatment be properly applied. But although men would give a great price to escape being deformed, yet at the same time they do not know how to take care, nor have resolution, if they do not experience pain, nor fear death, although the formation of callus in the nose speedily place, for the most part is consolidated in ten days, provided sphacelus do not take place.

> Greek: 37. 37. Ὁκόσοισι μὲν οὖν ῤὶς ἐς τὸ κάτω καὶ ἐς τὸ σιμὸν ῤέπουσα κατεαγῇ, ἢν μὲν ἐκ τοῦ ἔμπροσθεν μέρεος κατὰ τὸν χόνδρον ἵζηται, οἷόν τέ ἐστι καὶ ἐντιθέναι τι διόρθωμα ἐς τοὺς μυκτῆρας· ἢν δὲ μὴ, ἀνορθοῦν μὲν χρὴ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα, τοὺς δακτύλους ἐς τοὺς μυκτῆρας ἐντιθέντα, ἢν ἐνδέχηται· ἢν δὲ μὴ, παχὺ ὑπάλειπτρον μὴ ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν τῆς ῤινὸς ἀνάγοντα τοῖσι δακτύλοισιν, ἀλλʼ ᾗ ἵδρυται· ἔξωθεν δὲ τῆς ῤινὸς ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν ἀμφιλαμβάνοντα τοῖσι δακτύλοισι, ξυναναγκάζειν τε ἅμα καὶ ἀναφέρειν ἐς τὸ ἄνω. καὶ ἢν μὲν πάνυ ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν τὸ κάτηγμα ἔῃ, οἷόν τέ τι καὶ ἔσω τῶν μυκτήρων ἐντιθέναι, ὥσπερ ἤδη εἴρηται, ἢ ἄχνην τὴν ἀφʼ ἡμιτυβίου, ἢ ἄλλο τι τοιοῦτον ἐν ὀθονίῳ εἱλίσσοντα, μᾶλλον δὲ ἐν καρχηδονίῳ δέρματι ἐῤῥάψαντα, σχηματίσαντα τὸ ἁρμόσσον σχῆμα τῷ χωρίῳ, ἵνα ἐγκείσεται. ἢν μέντοι πρωσωτέρω ἔῃ τὸ κάτηγμα, οὐδὲν οἷόν τε ἔσω ἐντιθέναι· καὶ γὰρ εἰ ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν ἀσηρὸν τὸ φόρημα, πῶς γε δὴ οὐκ ἐν τῷ ἐσωτέρω; τὸ μὲν οὖν πρῶτον, καὶ ἔσωθεν ἀναπλάσσεσθαι καὶ ἔξωθεν ἀφειδήσαντα, χρὴ ἀναγαγεῖν ἐς τὴν ἀρχαίην φύσιν, καὶ διορθώσασθαι. κάρτα γὰρ οἵη τε ῤὶς καταγεῖσα ἀναπλάσσεσθαι, μάλιστα μὲν αὐθήμερος, ἢν δὲ μὴ, ὀλίγῳ ὕστερον· ἀλλὰ καταβλακεύουσιν οἱ ἰητροὶ, καὶ ἁπαλωτέρως τὸ πρῶτον ἅπτονται, ἢ ὡς χρὴ· παραβάλλοντα γὰρ τοὺς δακτύλους χρὴ ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν κατὰ τὴν φύσιν τῆς ῤινὸς ὡς κατωτάτω, κάτωθεν ξυναναγκάζειν, καὶ οὕτω μάλιστα ἀνορθοῦται σὺν τῇ ἔσωθεν διορθώσει. ἔπειτα δὲ ἐς ταῦτα ἰητρὸς οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐστὶ τοιοῦτος, εἰ ἐθέλοι καὶ μελετᾷν καὶ τολμᾷν, ὡς οἱ δάκτυλοι αὐτοῦ οἱ λιχανοί· οὗτοι γὰρ κατὰ φύσιν μάλιστά εἰσιν. παραβάλλοντα γὰρ χρὴ τῶν δακτύλων ἑκάτερον, παρὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ῤῖνα ἐρείδοντα, ἡσύχως οὗτως ἔχειν, μάλιστα μὲν, εἰοἷόν τε εἴη, αἰεὶ, ἐστʼ ἂν κρατυνθῇ, εἰ δὲ μὴ, ὡς πλεῖστον χρόνον, αὐτὸν, ὡς εἴρηται· εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἢ παῖδα ἢ γυναῖκά τινα· μαλθακὰς γὰρ τὰς χεῖρας δεῖ εἶναι. οὕτω γὰρ ἂν κάλλιστα ἰητρευθείη, ὁτέῳ ἡ ῤὶς μὴ ἐς τὸ σκολιὸν, ἀλλʼ ἐς τὸ κάτω ἱδρυμένη, ἰσόῤῥοπος εἴη. ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν οὐδεμίην που ῤῖνα εἶδον, ἥτις οὕτω κατεαγεῖσα οὐχ οἵη τε διορθωθῆναι, αὐτίκα πρὶν πωρωθῆναι ξυναναγκαζομένη, ἐγένετο, εἴ τις ὀρθῶς ἐθέλοι ἰητρέυειν. ἀλλὰ γὰρ οἱ ἄνθρωποι αἰσχροὶ μὲν εἶναι πολλοῦ ἀποτιμῶνται, μελετᾷν δὲ ἅμα μὲν οὐκ ἐπίστανται, ἅμα δὲ οὐ τολμέουσιν, ἢν μὴ ὀδυνέωνται, ἢ θάνατον δεδοίκωσιν· καίτοι ὀλιγοχρόνιος ἡ πώρωσις τῆς ῤινός· ἐν γὰρ δέκα ἡμέρῃσι κρατύνεται, ἢν μὴ ἐπισφακελίσῃ.

[¶1] 38. When the fractured bone is displaced laterally, the treatment is the same, but it is obvious that the reduction is to be made, not by applying equal force on both sides, but by pushing the displaced portion into its natural position, and pressing on it from without, and introducing something into the nostrils, and boldly rectifying the fragments which incline inward, until the whole be properly adjusted, well knowing that if you do not restore the parts at once, it is impossible but that the nose must be distorted. But when you restore the parts to their natural position, either the patient himself, or some other person, is to apply one finger or more to the part which protrudes, and keep it in position until the fracture be consolidated; but the little finger is, from time to time, to be pushed into the nostril, to rectify the parts which incline inward. When any inflammation supervenes, dough must be used, but attention must still be equally paid to the application of the fingers, although the dough be on the part. But if the fracture be in the cartilage, with lateral displacement, the end of the nose must necessarily be distorted. In such cases some of the aforementioned means of reduction, or whatever suits, is to be introduced into the nostril; but there are many convenient things to be found which have no smell, and are appropriate in other respects; thus, on one occasion, I introduced a slice of sheep’s lung, as it happened to be at hand; for sponges, if introduced, imbibe humidities. Then the outer skin of Carthaginian leather is to be taken, and a piece of the size of the thumb, or what will answer, is to be cut off and glued to the outside of the nostril which is turned aside, and then this piece of thong is to be stretched to the proper degree, or rather a little more than what will be sufficient to make the nose straight and regular. Then (for the thong must be long) it is to be brought below the ear and round the head, and the end of the thong may either be glued to the forehead, or a still longer one may be carried all round the head, and secured. This is a natural mode of setting the nose, is of easy application, and is calculated to enable the counter-extension on the nose to be made greater or less, as you may incline. In a case where the fractured nose is turned to the side, the treatment is to be conducted otherwise, as already described; and in most of them the thong ought to be glued to the end of the nose, in order to make extension in the opposite direction.

> Greek: 38. 38. Ὁκόσοισι δὲ τὸ ὀστέον ἐς τὸ πλάγιον κατάγνυται, ἡ μὲν ἴησις ἡ αὐτή· τὴν δὲ διόρθωσιν δηλονότι χρὴ ποιέεσθαι, οὐκ ἰσόῤῥοπον ἀμφοτέρωθεν, ἀλλὰ τό τε ἐκκεκλιμένον ὠθέειν ἐς τὴν φύσιν, ἔκτοσθεν ἀναγκάζοντα, καὶ ἐσματτευόμενον ἐς τοὺς μυκτῆρας, καὶ τὰ εἴσω ῤέψαντα διορθοῦν ἀόκνως, ἔστʼ ἂν κατορθώσῃς, εὖ εἰδότα, ὅτι, ἢν μὴ αὐτίκα κατορθώσῃς, οὐχ οἷόν τε μὴ οὐχὶ διεστράφθαι τὴν ῤῖνα. ὅταν δὲ ἀγάγῃς ἐς τὴν φύσιν, προσβάλλοντα χρὴ ἐς τὸ χωρίον, ἢ τοὺς δακτύλους, ἢ τὸν ἕνα δάκτυλον, ᾗ ἐξέσχεν, ἀνακωχέειν, ἢ αὐτὸν, ἢ ἄλλον τινὰ, ἔστʼ ἂν κρατυνθῇ τὸ τρῶμα· ἀτὰρ καὶ ἐς τὸν μυκτῆρα τὸν σμικρὸν δάκτυλον ἀπωθέοντα, ἄλλοτε καὶ ἄλλοτε διορθοῦν χρὴ τὰ ἐγκλιθέντα. ὅ τι δʼ ἂν φλεγμονῆς ὑπογίνηται τουτέοισι, χρὴ τῷ σταιτὶ χρέεσθαι· τοῖσι μέντοι δακτύλοισι προσέχειν χρὴ ὁμοίως, καὶ τοῦ σταιτὸς ἐπικειμένου. ἢν δέ που κατὰ τὸν χόνδρον ἐς τὰ πλάγια καταγῇ, ἀνάγκη τὴν ῤῖνα ἄκρην παρεστράφθαι. χρὴ οὖν τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν ἐς τὸν μυκτῆρα ἄκρον διόρθωμά τι τῶν εἰρημένων, ἢ ὅ τι τούτοισιν ἔοικεν, ἐντιθέναι· πολλὰ δʼ ἄν τις εὕροι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, ὅσα μήτε ὀδμὴν ἴσχει, ἄλλως τε καὶ προσηνέα ἐστίν· ἐγὼ δέ ποτε πλεύμονος προβάτου ἀπότμημα ἐνέθηκα, τοῦτο γάρ πως παρέτυχεν· οἱ γὰρ σπόγγοι ἐντιθεμένοι ὑγράσματα δέχονται. ἔπειτα χρὴ καρχηδονίου δέρματος λοπὸν, πλάτος ὡς τοῦ μεγάλου δακτύλου τετμημένον, ἢ ὅκως ἂν ξυμφέρῃ, προσκολλῆσαι ἐς τὸ ἔκτοσθεν πρὸς τὸν μυκτῆρα τὸν ἐκκεκλιμένον· κἄπειτα κατατεῖναι τὸν ἱμάντα, ὅκως ἂν ξυμφέρῃ· μᾶλλον δὲ ὀλίγῳ τείνειν χρὴ, [ἢ] ὥστε ὀρθὴν καὶ ἀπαρτῆ τὴν ῤῖνα εἶναι. ἔπειτα (μακρὸς γὰρ ἔστω ὁ ἱμὰς), κάτωθεν τοῦ ὠτὸς ἀγαγόντα αὐτὸν, ἀναγαγεῖν περὶ τὴν κεφαλήν· καὶ ἔξεστι μὲν κατὰ τὸ μέτωπον προσκολλῆσαι τὴν τελευτὴν τοῦ ἱμάντος, ἔξεστι δὲ καὶ μακρότερον ἐπιπεριελίσσοντα περὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν καταδέειν. τοῦτο ἅμα μὲν δικαίην τὴν διόρθωσιν ἔχει, ἅμα δὲ εὐταμίευτον, καὶ μᾶλλον, ἢν ἐθέλῃ, καὶ ἧσσον τὴν ἀντιῤῥοπίην ποιῆσαι τῆς ῤινός. ἀτὰρ καὶ ὁκόσοισιν ἐς τὸ πλάγιον ἡ ῤὶς κατάγνυται, τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ἰητρεύειν χρὴ, ὡς προείρηται· προσδέεται δὲ τοῖσι πλείστοισι καὶ τοῦ ἱμάντος πρὸς ἄκρην τὴν ῤῖνα προσκολληθῆναι τῆς ἀντιῤῥοπίης εἵνεκα.

[¶2] 39. When the fracture is complicated with a wound, one need not be troubled on that account, but pitch-cerate or any of the applications for fresh wounds is to be applied to the sores; for, in general, they admit of easy cure, even when there is reason to apprehend that pieces of bone will come out. The parts, at first, are to be adjusted fearlessly, taking care that nothing is omitted, and, subsequently, they are also to be adjusted with the fingers; more softly, indeed, but still it must be done; and of all parts of the body the nose is modeled with the greatest ease. And there is nothing to prevent us from having recourse to the practice of gluing on the thongs, and drawing the nose to the opposite side, even if there be a wound or the parts be inflamed, for these thongs give no pain.

> Greek: 39. 39. Ὅσοισι δὲ σὺν τῇ κτήξει καὶ ἕλκεα προσγίνεται, οὐδὲν δεῖ ταράσσεσθαι διὰ τοῦτο· ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ μὲν τὰ ἕλκεα ἐπιτιθέναι ἢ πισσηρὴν, ἢ τῶν ἐναίμων τι· εὐαλθέα γὰρ τῶν τοιούτων τὰ πλεῖστά ἐστιν ὁμοίως, κἢν ὀστέα μέλλῃ ἀπιέναι. τὴν δὲ διόρθωσιν τὴν πρώτην ἀόκνως χρὴ ποιέεσθαι, μηδὲν ἐπιλείποντα, καὶ τὰς διορθώσιας τοῖσι δακτύλοισιν ἐν τῷ ἔπειτα χρόνῳ, χαλαρωτέροισι μὲν χρεόμενον, χρεόμενον δέ· εὐπλαστότατον γάρ τι παντὸς τοῦ σώματος ἡ ῤίς ἐστιν. τῶν δὲ ἱμάντων τῇ κολλήσει καὶ τῇ ἀντιῤῥοπίῃ παντάπασιν οὐδὲν κωλύει χρέεσθαι, οὔτʼ ἢν ἕλκος ᾖ, οὔτʼ ἢν ἐπιφλεγμήνῃ ἀλυπόταται γάρ εἰσιν.

[¶3] 40. In fractures of the ear all sorts of bandages do harm. For one would not think of applying it quite loose, and if applied more tightly, it only does the more harm, for even the sound ear, when confined with a bandage, becomes painful, throbs, and gets into a febrile state. With regard to cataplasms, the heaviest, on the whole, are the worst; but almost all kinds are bad, form abscesses, occasion an increase of humors, and afterward troublesome suppurations; and a fractured ear stands in less need of such applications than any other part; the most ready, if required, is the paste of meal, but neither should it have weight. It should touch as little as possible; for it is a good sometimes to apply nothing at all, both to the ear and to many other cases. Attention must be paid to the patient’s position during sleep. And the body must be reduced, more especially if there be danger lest the ear suppurate; it will also be better to open the bowels, and if the patient can be readily made to vomit, this may be accomplished by means of the syrmaism. If the part come to suppuration, it should not be hastily opened; for often when matter appears to be formed it is absorbed again, even when no cataplasm is applied. But if forced to open it, the part will get soonest well if transfixed with a cautery, and yet it should be well understood that the ear gets maimed, and is less than the other if burned through. If not burned through, an incision, and not a very small one, should be made on the upper side; for the pus is found to be surrounded with a thicker covering than one would have supposed; and it may be said, in general, that all parts of a mucous nature and which form mucus, as being all viscid, when touched, slip from below the fingers to either side; and on that account the physician, in such cases, finds that he has to pass his instrument through a thicker substance than he supposed; and in certain ganglionic cases, when the skin is flabby and mucous, many physicians open them, expecting to find a collection in them; here the physician forms a wrong judgment, but by such a procedure no great harm results to the patient from having had the part opened. But with regard to watery parts, and such as are filled with mucus, and which are situated in regions where every one of the parts, if opened, will occasion death or some other injury, these will be treated of in another work. When, therefore, incision is made in the ear, all sorts of cataplasms and pledges should be avoided, and it is to be treated either with applications for recent wounds, or anything else which is neither heavy nor will occasion pain, for if the cartilage be laid bare and abscesses form, the case will be troublesome; this happens from such modes of treatment. In all aggravated cases, the most effectual remedy is the transfixing of the part with a hot iron.

> Greek: 40. 40. ἢν δὲ οὖς κατεαγῇ, ἐπιδέσιες μὲν πᾶσαι πολέμιαι· οὐ γὰρ οὕτω τις καλαρὸν περιβάλλοι· ἢν δὲ μᾶλλον πιέζῃ, πλέον κακὸν ἐργάζεται· ἐπεὶ καὶ ὑγιὲς οὖς, ἐπιδέσει πιεχθὲν, ὀδυνηρὸν καὶ σφυγματῶδες καὶ πυρετῶδες γίνεται. ἀτὰρ καὶ τὰ ἐπιπλάσματα, κάκιστα μὲν τὰ βαρύτατα τὸ ἐπίπαν· ἀτὰρ καὶ τὰ πλεῖστα φλαῦρα καὶ ἀποστατικὰ, καὶ μύξαν τε ὑποποιέει πλείω, κἄπειτα ἐκπυήσιας ἀσηράς· τούτων δὲ ἥκιστα οὖς κατγὲν προσδέεται· ἄγχιστα μὴν, εἴπερ χρὴ, τὸ γλίσχρον ἄλητον· χρὴ δὲ μηδὲ τοῦτο βάρος ἔχειν. ψαύειν δὲ ὡς ἥκιστα ξυμφέρει· ἀγαθὸν γὰρ φάρμακόν ἐστιν ἐνίοτε καὶ τὸ μηδὲν προσφέρειν καὶ πρὸς οὖς καὶ πρὸς ἄλλα πολλά. χρὴ δὲ καὶ τὴν ἐπικοίμησιν φυλάσσεσθαι· τὸ δὲ σῶμα ἰσχναίνειν, καὶ μᾶλλον, ᾧ ἂν κίνδυνος ἔῃ ἔμπυον τὸ οὖς γενέσθαι· ἄμεινον δὲ καὶ μαλθάξαι τὴν κοιλίην· ἢν δὲ καὶ εὐήμετος ἔῃ, ἐμέειν ἀπὸ συρμαϊσμοῦ. ἢν δὲ ἐς ἐμπύησιν ἔλθῃ, ταχέως μὲν οὐ χρὴ στομοῦν· πολλὰ γὰρ καὶ τῶν δοκεόντων ἐκπυέεσθαι ἀναπίνεταί ποτε, κἢν μηδέν τις καταπλάσῃ. ἢν δὲ ἀναγκασθῇ στομῶσαι, τάχιστα μὲν ὑγιὲς γίνεται, ἤν τις πέρην διακαύσῃ· εἰδέναι μέντοι χρὴ σαφῶς, ὅτι κυλλὸν ἔσται τὸ οὖς καὶ μεῖον τοῦ ἑτέρου, ἢν πέρην διακαυθῇ. ἢν δὲ μὴ πέρην καίηται, τάμνειν χρὴ τὸ μετέωρον, μὴ πάνυ σμικρὴν τομήν· διὰ παχυτέρου μὴν καὶ τὸ πῦον εὑρίσκεται, ἢ ὡς ἄν τις δοκέοι· ὡς δʼ ἐν κεφαλαίῳ εἰπεῖν, καὶ πάντα τἄλλα τὰ μυξώδεα καὶ μυξοποιὰ, ἅτε γλίσχρα ἐόντα, ὑποθιγγανόμενα διολισθάνει ταχέως ὑπὸ τοὺς δακτύλους καὶ ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα· διὰ τοῦτο διὰ παχυτέρου εὑρίσκουσι τὰ τοιαῦτα οἱ ἰητροὶ, ἢ ὡς οἴονται· ἐπεὶ καὶ τῶν γαγγλιωδέων ἔνια, ὅσα ἂν πλαδαρὰ ἔῃ, καὶ μυξώδεα σάρκα ἔχῃ, πολλοὶ στομοῦσιν, οἰόμενοι ῤεῦμα ἀνευρήσειν ἐς τὰ τοιαῦτα· ἡ μὲν οὖν γνώμη τοῦ ἰητροῦ ἐξαπατᾶται· τῷ δὲ πρήγματι τῷ τοιούτῳ οὐδεμία βλάβη στομωθέντι. ὅσα δὲ ὑδατώδεα χωρία ἐστὶν, ἢ μύξης πεπληρωμένα, καὶ ἐν οἵοισι χωρίοισιν ἕκαστα θάνατον φέρει στομούμενα, ἢ καὶ ἀλλοίας βλάβας, περὶ τούτων ἐν ἄλλῳ λόγῳ γεγράψεται. ὅταν οὖν τάμῃ τις τὸ οὖς, πάντων μὲν καταπλασμάτων, πάσης τε μοτώσιος ἀπέχεσθαι χρή· ἰητρεύειν δὲ ἢ ἐναίμῳ, ἢ ἄλλῳ τῳ, ὅ τι μήτε βάρος, μήτε πόνον παρασχήσει· ἢν γὰρ ὁ χόνδρος ἄρξηται ψιλοῦσθαι, καὶ ὑποστάσιας ἴσχῃ, ὀχλῶδες· γιγνεται δὲ τοῦτο διʼ ἐκείνας τὰς ἰήσιας. πάντων δὲ τῶν παλιγκοτησάντων ἡ πέρην διάκαυσις αὐταρκέστατον.

[¶4] 41. The vertebrae of the spine when contracted into a hump behind from disease, for the most part cannot be remedied, more especially when the gibbosity is above the attachment of the diaphragm to the spine. Certain of those below the diaphragm are carried off by varices in the legs, more especially by such as occur in the vein at the ham; and in those cases where the gibbosities are removed, the varices take place also in the groin; and some have been carried off by a dysentery when it becomes chronic. And when the gibbosity occurs in youth before the body has attained its full growth, in these cases the body does not usually grow along the spine, but the legs and the arms are fully developed, whilst the parts (about the back) are arrested in their development. And in those cases where the gibbosity is above the diaphragm, the ribs do not usually expand properly in width, but forward, and the chest becomes sharp-pointed and not broad, and they become affected with difficulty of breathing and hoarseness; for the cavities which inspire and expire the breath do not attain their proper capacity. And they are under the necessity of keeping the neck bent forward at the great vertebra, in order that their head may not hang downward; this, therefore, occasions great contraction of the pharynx by its inclination inward; for, even in those who are erect in stature, dyspnoea is induced by this bone inclining inward, until it be restored to its place. From this frame of body, such persons appear to have more prominent necks than persons in good health, and they generally have hard and unconcocted tubercles in the lungs, for the gibbosity and the distension are produced mostly by such tubercles, with which the neighboring nerves communicate. When the gibbosity is below the diaphragm, in some of these cases nephritic diseases and affections of the bladder supervene, but abscesses of a chronic nature, and difficult to cure, occur in the loins and groins, and neither of these carries off the gibbosity; and in these cases the hips are more emaciated than when the gibbosity is seated higher up; but the whole spine is more elongated in them than in those who have the gibbosity seated higher up, the hair of the pubes and chin is of slower growth and less developed, and they are less capable of generation than those who have the gibbosity higher up. When the gibbosity seizes persons who have already attained their full growth, it usually occasions a crisis of the then existing disease, but in the course of time some of them attack, as in the case of younger persons, to a greater or less degree; but, not withstanding, for the most part, all these diseases are less malignant. And yet many have borne the affection well, and have enjoyed good health until old age, more especially those persons whose body is inclined to be plump and fat; and a few of them have lived to beyond sixty years of age, but the most of them are more short-lived. In some cases the curvature of the spine is lateral, that is to say, either to the one side or the other; the most of such cases are connected with tubercles (abscesses?) within the spine; and in some, the positions in which they have been accustomed to lie cooperate with the disease. But these will be treated of among the chronic affections of the lungs; for these the most suitable prognostics of what will happen in these cases are given.

> Greek: 41. 41. σπόνδυλοι δὲ οἱ κατὰ ῤάχιν, ὅσοισι μὲν ὑπὸ νοσημάτων ἕλκονται ἐς τὸ κυφὸν, τὰ μὲν πλεῖστα ἀδύνατα λύεσθαι, ποτὶ καὶ ὅσα ἀνωτέρω τῶν φρενῶν τῆς προσφύσιος κυφοῦται. τῶν δὲ κατωτέρω μετεξέτερα λύουσι κιρσοὶ γενόμενοι ἐν τοῖσι σκέλεσι, μᾶλλον δέ τι ἐγγινόμενοι κιρσοὶ ἐν τῇ κατʼ ἰγνύην φλεβί· οἷσι δʼ ἂν τὰ κυφώματα λύηται, ἐγγίνονται δὲ καὶ ἐν τῇ κατὰ βουβῶνα· ἤδη δέ τισιν ἔλυσε καὶ δυσεντερίη πολυχρόνιος γενομένη. καὶ οἷσι μὲν κυφοῦται ῤάχις παισὶν ἐοῦσι, πρὶν ἢ τὸ σῶμα τελειωθῆναι ἐς αὔξησιν, τουτέοισι μὲν οὐδὲ ξυναύξεσθαι ἐθέλει κατὰ τὴν ῤάχιν τὸ σῶμα, ἀλλὰ σκέλεα μὲν καὶ χεῖρες τελειοῦνται· ταῦτα δὲ ἐνδεέστερα γίνεται. καὶ ὅσοισιν ἂν ᾖ ἀνωτέρω τῶν φρενῶν τὸ κῦφος, τούτοισι μὲν αἵ τε πλευραὶ οὐκ ἐθέλουσιν ἐς τὸ εὐρὺ αὔξεσθαι, ἀλλʼ ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν, τό τε στῆθος ὀξὺ γίνεται, ἀλλʼ οὐ πλατὺ, αὐτοί τε δύσπνοοι γίνονται, καὶ κερχώδεες· ἧσσον γὰρ εὐρυχωρίην ἔχουσιν αἱ κοιλίαι αἱ τὸ πνεῦμα δεχόμεναι καὶ προπέμπουσαι. καὶ μέντοι καὶ ἀναγκάζονται κατὰ τὸν μέγαν σπόνδυλον λορδὸν τὸν αὐχένα ἔχειν, ὡς μὴ προπετὴς ἔῃ αὐτέοισιν ἡ κεφαλή· στενοχωρίην μὲν οὖν πολλην τῇ φάρυγγι παρέχει καὶ τοῦτο, ἐς τὸ ἔσω ῤέπον· καὶ γὰρ τοῖσιν ὀρθοῖσι φύσει δύσπνοιαν παρέχει τοῦτο τὸ ὀστέον, ἢν ἔσω ῤέψῃ, ἔστʼ ἂν ἀναπιεχθῇ. διʼ οὖν τὸ τοιοῦτον σχῆμα ἐξεχέβρογχοι οἱ τοιοῦτοι τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον φαίνονται, ἢ οἱ ὑγιέες· φυματίαι τε ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ κατὰ τὸν πλεύμονά εἰσιν οἱ τοιοῦτοι σκληρῶν φυμάτων καὶ ἀπέπτων· καὶ γὰρ ἡ πρόφασις τοῦ κυφώματος καὶ ἡ ξύντασις τοῖσι πλείστοισι διὰ τοιαύτας ξυστροφὰς γίνεται, ᾗσιν ἂν κοινωνήσωσιν οἱ τόνοι οἱ ξύνεγγυς. Ὅσοισι δὲ κατωτέρω τῶν φρενῶν τὸ κύφωμά ἐστι, τούτοισι νοσήματα μὲν ἐνίοισι προσγίνεται νεφριτικὰ, καὶ κατὰ κύστιν· ἀτὰρ καὶ ἀποστάσιες ἐμπυήματι καὶ κατὰ κενεῶνας, καὶ κατὰ βουβῶνας, χρόνιαι καὶ δυσαλθέες, καὶ τουτέων οὐδετέρη λύει τὰ κυφώματα· ἰσχία δὲ τοῖσι τοιουτέοισιν ἔτι ἀσαρκότερα γίνεται, ἢ τοῖσιν ἄνωθεν κυφοῖσιν· ἡ μέντοι ξύμπασα ῤάχις μακροτέρη τουτέοισιν, ἢ τοῖσιν ἄνωθεν κυφοῖσιν· ἥβη δὲ καὶ γένειον βραδύτερα καὶ ἀτελέστερα, καὶ ἀγονώτεροι οὗτοι τῶν ἄνωθεν κυφῶν. οἷσι δʼ ἂν ηὐξημένοισιν ἤδη τὸ σῶμα ἡ κύφωσις γένηται, τούτοισιν ἀπαντικρὺ μὲν τῆς νούσου τῆς τότε παρεούσης κρίσιν ποιέει ἡ κύφωσις· ἀνὰ χρόνον μέντοι ἐπισημαίνει τι τῶν αὐτέων, ὥσπερ καὶ τοῖσι νεωτέροισιν, ἢ πλέον, ἢ ἔλασσον· ἧσσον δὲ κακοήθως ὡς τὸ ἐπίπαν μὴν τοιαῦτα πάντα ἐστίν. πολλοὶ μέντοι ἤδη καὶ εὐφόρως ἤνεγκαν καὶ ὑγιεινῶς τὴν κύφωσιν ἄχρι γήρως, μάλιστα δὲ οὗτοι, οἷσιν ἂν ἐς τὸ εὔσαρκον καὶ πιμελῶδες προτράπηται τὸ σῶμα· ὀλίγοι μὴν ἤδη καὶ τῶν τοιούτων ὑπὲρ ἑξήκοντα ἔτη ἐβίωσαν· οἱ δὲ πλεῖστοι βραχυβιώτεροί εἰσιν. ἔστι δʼ οἷσι καὶ ἐς τὸ πλάγιον σκολιοῦνται σπόνδυλοι ἢ τῇ, ἢ τῇ· πάντα μὴν ἢ τὰ πλεῖστα τὰ τοιαῦτα γίνεται διὰ ξυστροφὰς τὰς ἔσωθεν τῆς ῤάχιος· προσξυμβάλλεται δὲ ἐνίοισι ξὺν τῇ νούσῳ καὶ τὰ σχήματα, ἐφʼ ὁκοῖα ἂν. ἐθισθέωσι κεκλίσθαι. ἀλλὰ περὶ μὲν τούτων ἐν τοῖσι χρονίοισι κατὰ πλεύμονα νοσήμασιν εἰρήσεται· ἐκεῖ γάρ εἰσιν αὐτῶν χαριέσταται προγνώσιες περὶ τῶν μελλόντων ἔσεσθαι.

[¶5] 42. When the spine protrudes backward, in consequence of a fall, it seldom happens that one succeeds in straightening it. Wherefore succussion on a ladder has never straightened anybody, as far as I know, but it is principally practiced by those physicians who seek to astonish the mob-for to such persons these things appear wonderful, for example, if they see a man suspended or thrown down, or the like; and they always extol such practices, and never give themselves any concern whatever may result from the experiment, whether bad or good. But the physicians who follow such practices, as far as I have known them, are all stupid. The device, however, is an old one, and I give great praise to him who first invented this, and any other mechanical contrivance which is according to nature. For neither would I despair, but that if succussion were properly gone about, the spine, in certain cases, might be thereby rectified. But, indeed, for my own part, I have been ashamed to treat all such cases in this way, because such modes of procedure are generally practiced by charlatans.

> Greek: 42. 42. Ὅσοισι δὲ ἐκ καταπτώσιος ῤάχις κυφοῦται, ὀλίγα δὴ τούτων ἐκρατήθη, ὥστε ἐξιθυνθῆναι. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ, αἱ ἐν τῇ κλίμακι κατασείσιες οὐδένα πω ἐξίθυναν, ὧν γε ἐγὼ οἶδα· χρέονται δὲ οἱ ἰητροὶ μάλιστα αὐτῇ οὗτοι οἱ ἐπιθυμέοντες ἐκχαυνοῦν τὸν πολὺν ὄχλον· τοῖσι γὰρ τοιούτοισι ταῦτα θαυμάσιά ἐστιν, ἢν ἢ κρεμάμενον ἴδωσιν, ἢ ῤιπτεόμενον, ἢ ὅσα τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν ἔοικε, καὶ ταῦτα κληΐζουσιν αἰεὶ, καὶ οὐκέτι αὐτοῖσι μέλει, ὁκοῖόν τι ἀπέβη ἀπὸ τοῦ χειρίσματος, εἴτε κακὸν, εἴτε ἀγαθόν. οἱ μέντοι ἰητροὶ οἱ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐπιτηδεύοντες, σκαιοί εἰσιν, οὓς ἔγωγε ἔγνων· τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἐπινόημα ἀρχαῖον, καὶ ἐπαινέω ἔγωγε σφόδρα τὸν πρῶτον ἐπινοήσαντα καὶ τοῦτο καὶ ἄλλο πᾶν, ὅ τι μηχάνημα κατὰ φύσιν ἐπενοήθη· οὐδὲν γάρ μοι ἄελπτον, εἴ τις καλῶς σκευάσας καλῶς κατασείσειε, κἂν ἐξιθυνθῆναι ἔνια. αὐτὸς μέντοι κατῃσχύνθην πάντα τὰ τοιουτότροπα ἰητρεύειν οὕτω, διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι πρὸς ἀπατεώνων μᾶλλον οἱ τοιοῦτοι τρόποι.

[¶6] 43. Those cases in which the gibbosity is near the neck, are less likely to be benefited by these succussions with the head downward, for the weight of the head, and tops of the shoulders, when allowed to hang down, is but small; and such cases are more likely to be made straight by succussion applied with the feet hanging down, since the inclination downward is greater in this way. When the hump is lower down, it is more likely in this case that succussion with the head downward should do good. If one, then, should think of trying succussion, it may be applied in the following manner:—The ladder is to be padded with leather lined cushions, laid across, and well secured to one another, to a somewhat greater extent, both in length and breadth, than the space which the man’s body will occupy; he is then to be laid on the ladder upon his back, and the feet, at the ankles, are to be fastened, at no great distance from one another, to the ladder, with some firm but soft band; and he is further to be secured, in like manner, both above and below the knee, and also at the nates; and at the groins and chest loose shawls are to be put round in such a fashion as not to interfere with the effect of the succussion; and his arms are to be fastened along his sides to his own body, and not to the ladder. When you have arranged these matters thus, you must hoist up the ladder, either to a high tower or to the gable-end of a house; but the place where you make the succussion should be firm, and those who perform the extension should be well instructed, so that they may let go their hold equally to the same extent, and suddenly, and that the ladder may neither tumble to the ground on either side, nor they themselves fall forward. But, if the ladder be let go from a tower, or the mast of a ship, fastened into the ground with its cordage, it will be better, so that the ropes run upon a pulley or axle-tree. But it is disagreeable even to enlarge upon these matters; and yet, by the contrivances now described, the proper succussion may be made.

> Greek: 43. 43. Ὅσοισι μὲν οὖν ἐγγὺς τοῦ αὐχένος ἡ κύφωσις γίνεται, ἧσσον εἰκὸς ὠφελέειν τὰς κατασείσιας ταύτας τὰς ἐπὶ κεφαλὴν· σμικρὸν γὰρ τὸ βάρος ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ τὰ ἀκρώμια καταῤῥέποντα· ἀλλὰ τούς γε τοιούτους εἰκὸς ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας κατασεισθέντας μᾶλλον ἐξιθυνθῆναι· μέζων γὰρ οὕτως ἡ καταῤῥοπίη ἡ ἐπὶ ταῦτα. Ὅσοισι δὲ κατωτέρω τὸ ὕβωμα, τουτέοισιν εἰκὸς μᾶλλον ἐπὶ κεφαλὴν κατασείεσθαι. εἰ οὖν τις ἐθέλοι κατασείειν, ὀρθῶς ἂν ὧδε σκευάζοι· τὴν μὲν κλίμακα χρὴ σκυτίνοισιν ὑποκεφαλαίοισι πλαγίοισιν, ἢ ἐρινέοισι, καταστρῶσαι εὖ προς δεδεμένοισιν, ὀλίγῳ πλέον καὶ ἐπὶ μῆκος καὶ ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, ἢ ὅσον ἂν τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου κατάσχοι· ἔπειτα τὸν ἄνθρωπον ὕπτιον κατακλῖναι ἐπὶ τὴν κλίμακα χρή· κἄπειτα προσδῆσαι μὲν τοὺς πόδας παρὰ τὰ σφυρὰ πρὸς τὴν κλίμακα μὴ διαβεβῶτας, δεσμῷ εὐόχῳ μὲν, μαλθακῷ δέ· προσδῆσαι δὲ κατωτέρω ἑκάτερον τῶν γουνάτων, καὶ ἀνωτέρω· προσδῆσαι δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὰ ἰσχία· κατὰ δὲ τοὺς κενεῶνας καὶ κατὰ τὸ στῆθος χαλαρῇσι ταινίῃσι περιβαλέειν οὕτως, ὅκως μὴ κωλύωσι τὴν κατάσεισιν· τὰς δὲ χεῖρας παρὰ τὰς πλευρὰς παρατείναντα προσκαταλαβεῖν πρὸς αὐτὸ τὸ σῶμα, καὶ μὴ πρὸς τὴν κλίμακα. ὅταν δὲ ταῦτα κατασκευάσῃς οὕτως, ἀνέλκειν τὴν κλίμακα ἢ πρὸς τύρσιν τινὰ ὓψηλὴν, ἢ πρὸς ἀέτωμα οἴκου· τὸ δὲ χωρίον, ἵνα κατασείεις, ἀντίτυπον ἔστω· τοὺς δὲ ἀνατείνοντας εὐπαιδεύτους χρὴ εἶναι, ὅκως ὁμαλῶς καὶ ἰσοῤῥόπως καὶ ἐξαπιναίως ἀφήσουσι, καὶ μήτε ἡ κλίμαξ ἑτερόῤῥοπος ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀφίξεται, μήτε αὐτοὶ προπετέες ἔσονται. ἀπὸ μέντοι τύρσιος ἀφιεὶς ἢ ἀπὸ ἱστοῦ καταπεπηγότος καρχήσιον ἔχοντος, ἔτι κάλλιον ἄν τις σκευάσαιτο, ὥστε ἀπὸ τροχιλίης τὰ χαλώμενα εἶναι ὅπλα, ἢ ἀπὸ ὄνου. ἀηδὲς μὴν καὶ μακρολογέειν περὶ τούτων· ὅμως δὲ ἐκ τουτέων ἂν τῶν κατασκευῶν κάλλιστʼ ἄν τις κατασεισθείη.

[¶7] 44. But if the hump be situated very high up, and if succussion be by all means to be used, it will be better to do it with the feet downward, as has been said, for the force downward will be the greater in this case. The patient is to be well fastened to the ladder by cords at the breast, at the neck by means of a very loose shawl so as merely to keep the part properly on the ladder, and the head is to be fastened to the ladder at the forehead, the arms are to be stretched along and attached to the patient’s body, and not to the ladder, and the rest of the body is not to be bound, except so as to keep it in place by means of a loose shawl wrapped round it and the ladder; attention, moreover, should be paid that these ligatures do not interfere with the force of the succussion, and the legs are not to be fastened to the ladder, but should be placed near one another, so as to be in line with the spine. These matters should be thus arranged, if recourse is to be had at all to succussion on a ladder; for it is disgraceful in every art, and more especially in medicine, after much trouble, much display, and much talk, to do no good after all.

> Greek: 44. 44. εἰ μέντοι κάρτα ἄνω εἴη τὸ ὕβωμα, δέοι δὲ κατασείειν πάντως, ἐπὶ πόδας κατασείειν λυσιτελέει, ὥσπερ ἤδη εἴρηται· πλείων γὰρ οὕτω γίνεται ἡ καταῤῥοπίη ἐπὶ ταῦτα. Ἑρμάσαι δὲ χρὴ, κατὰ μὲν τὸ στῆθος πρὸς τὴν κλίμακα προσδήσαντα ἰσχυρῶς, κατὰ δὲ τὸν αὐχένα ὡς χαλαρωτάτῃ ταινίῃ, ὅσον τοῦ κατορθοῦσθαι εἵνεκα· καὶ αὐτὴν τὴν κεφαλὴν κατὰ τὸ μέτωπον προσδῆσαι πρὸς τὴν κλίμακα· τὰς δὲ χεῖρας παρατανύσαντα πρὸς τὸ σῶμα προσδῆσαι, καὶ μὴ πρὸς τὴν κλίμακα· τὸ μέντοι ἄλλο σῶμα ἄδετον εἶναι χρὴ, πλὴν, ὅσον τοῦ κατορθοῦσθαι εἵνεκα, ἄλλῃ καὶ ἄλλῃ ταινίῃ χαλαρῇ περιβεβλῆσθαι· ὅκως δὲ μὴ κωλύωσιν οὗτοι οἱ δεσμοὶ τὴν κατασεισιν, σκοπέειν· τὰ δὲ σκέλεα πρὸς μὲν τὴν κλίμακα μὴ προσδεδέσθω, πρὸς ἄλληλα δὲ, ὡς κατὰ τὴν ῤάχιν ἰθύῤῥοπα ἔῃ. ταῦτα μέντοι τοιουτοτρόπως ποιητέα, εἰ πάντως δέοι ἐν κλίμακι κατασεισθῆναι· αἰσχρὸν μέντοι καὶ ἐν πάσῃ τέχνῃ καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα ἐν ἰητρικῇ πουλὺν ὄχλον, καὶ πολλὴν ὄψιν, καὶ πουλὺν λόγον παρασχόντα, ἔπειτα μηδὲν ὠφελῆσαι.

[¶8] 45. In the first place, the structure of the spine should be known, for this knowledge is requisite in many diseases. Wherefore, on the side turned to the belly (the anterior?) the vertebrae are in a regular line, and are united together by a pulpy and nervous band of connection, originating from the cartilages, and extending to the spinal marrow. There are certain other nervous cords which decussate, are attached (to the vertebrae?), and are extended from both sides of them. But we will describe in another work the connections of the veins and arteries, their numbers, their qualities, their origin, their functional offices in particular parts, in what sort of sheaths the spinal marrow is inclosed, where they arise, where they terminate, how they communicate, and what their uses. On the opposite side (behind?) the vertebrae are connected together by a ginglymoid articulation. Common cords (nerves?) are extended to all parts, both those within and without. There is an osseous process from the posterior part of all and each of the vertebra, whether greater or smaller; and upon these processes there are cartilaginous epiphyses, and from them arise nervous productions (ligaments?), akin to the external nerves (tonoi). The ribs are united to them, having their heads inclined rather to the inside than the out, and every one of them is articulated with the vertebrae; and the ribs in man are very curved, and, as it were, arched. The space between the ribs and the processes of the vertebrae is filled on both sides by muscles, which arise from the neck and extend to the loins (?). The spine, longitudinally, is a straight line slightly curved; from the os sacrum to the great vertebra which is connected with the articulation of the femur, the spine inclines backward, for the bladder, the organs of generation, and the loose portion of the rectum, are situated there. From this, to the attachment of the diaphragm, the spine inclines inward, and this portion alone, from the internal parts, gives origin to muscles, which are called psoae. From this to the great vertebra (seventh cervical?) which is above the tops of the shoulders, it is convex behind lengthways; but it is more in appearance than it really is, for the spinous processes are highest in the middle, and less so above and below. The region of the neck is convex before.

> Greek: 45. 45. χρὴ δὲ πρῶτον μὲν γινώσκειν τὴν φύσιν τῆς ῤάχιος, οἵη τίς ἐστιν· ἐς πολλὰ γὰρ νουσήματα προσδέοι ἂν αὐτῆς. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ, τὸ πρὸς τὴν κοιλίην ῤέπον, οἱ σπόνδυλοι ἐντὸ ἄρτιοί εἰσιν ἀλλήλοισι, καὶ δέδενται πρὸς ἀλλήλους δεσμῷ μυξώδεϊ καὶ νευρώδεϊ, ἀπὸ χόνδρων ἀποπεφυκότι ἄχρι πρὸς τὸν νωτιαῖον. ἄλλοι δέ τινες τόνοι νευρώδεες διανταῖοι, πρόσφυτοι, παρατέτανται ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν αὐτῶν. αἱ δὲ φλεβῶν καὶ ἀρτηριῶν κοινωνίαι ἐν ἐτέρῳ λόγῳ δεδηλώσονται, ὅσαι τε καὶ οἷαι, καὶ ὅθεν ὡρμημέναι, καὶ ἐν οἵοισιν οἷα δύνανται, αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ νωτιαῖος οἷσιν ἐλύτρωται ἐλύτροισι, καὶ ὅθεν ὡρμημένοισι, καὶ ὅπη κραίνουσιν, καὶ οἷσι κοινωνέουσι, καὶ οἷα δυναμένοισιν. ἐν δὲ τῷ ἐπέκεινα, ἐν ἄρθροισι γεγιγγλύμωνται πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ σπόνδυλοι. τόνοι δε κοινοὶ παρὰ πάντας, καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἔξω μέρεσι, καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἔσω παρατέτανται. ἀπόφυσις δέ ἐστιν ὀστέου ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν σπονδύλων, μία ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, ἀπό τε τῶν μειζόνων, ἀπό τε τῶν ἐλασσόνων· ἐπὶ δὲ τῇσιν ἀποφύσεσι ταύτῃσι χονδρίων ἐπιφύσιες, καὶ ἀπʼ ἐκείνων νεύρων ἀποβλάστησις ἠδελφισμένη τοῖσιν ἐξωτάτω τόνοισιν. πλευραὶ δὲ προσπεφύκασιν, ἐς τὸ εἴως μέρος τὰς κεφαλὰς ῤέπουσαι μᾶλλον, ἢ ἐς τὸ ἔξω· καθʼ ἕνα δὲ ἕκαστον τῶν σπονδύλων προσήρθρωνται· καμπυλώταται δὲ πλευραὶ ἀνθρώπου εἰσὶ ῤαιβοειδέα τρόπον. τὸ δὲ μεσηγὺ τῶν πλευρέων καὶ τῶν ὀστέων τῶν ἀποπεφυκότων ἀπὸ τῶν σπονδύλων, ἀποπληρέουσιν ἑκατέρωθεν οἱ μύες ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐχένος ἀρξάμενοι, ἄχρι τῆς προσφύσιος. αὐτὴ δὲ ἡ ῤάχις κατὰ μῆκος ἰθυσκόλιός ἐστιν· ἀπὸ μὲν τοῦ ἱεροῦ ὀστέου ἄχρι τοῦ μεγάλου σπονδύλου, παρʼ ὃν προσήρτηται τῶν σκελέων ἡ πρόσφυσις, ἄχρι μὲν τούτου κυφή· κύστις τε γὰρ, καὶ γοναὶ, καὶ ἀρχοῦ τὸ χαλαρὸν ἐν τουτέῳ ἔκτισται. ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου ἄχρι φρενῶν προσαρτήσιος, ἰθυλόρδη· καὶ παραφύσιας ἔχει μυῶν τοῦτο μοῦνον τὸ χωρίον ἐκ τῶν εἴσωθεν μερῶν, ἃς δὴ καλέουσι ψόας. ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου ἄχρι τοῦ μεγάλου σπονδύλου τοῦ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐπωμίδων, ἰθυκύφη· ἔτι δὲ μᾶλλον δοκέει ἢ ἐστίν· ἡ γὰρ ἄκανθα κατὰ μέσον ὑψηλοτάτας τὰς ἐκφύσιας τῶν ὀστέων ἔχει, ἔνθεν δὲ καὶ ἔνθεν ἐλάσσους. αὐτὸ δὲ τὸ ἄρθρον τοῦ αὐχένος λορδόν ἐστιν.

[¶9] 46. In cases of displacement backward along the vertebrae, it does not often happen, in fact, it is very rare, that one or more vertebrae are torn from one another and displaced. For such injuries do not readily occur, as the spine could not easily be displaced backward but by a severe injury on the fore part through the belly (which would prove fatal), or if a person falling from a height should pitch on the nates, or shoulders (and even in this case he would die, but not immediately); and it also would not readily happen that such a displacement could take place forward, unless some very heavy weight should fall upon it behind; for each of the posterior spinal processes is so constructed, that it would sooner be broken than undergo any great inclination forward from a force which would have to overcome the ligaments and the articulations mutually connecting them. And the spinal marrow would suffer, if from the displacement of a vertebra it were to be bent even to a small extent; for the displaced vertebra would compress the spinal marrow, if it did not break it; and if compressed and strangled, it would induce insensibility of many great and important parts, so that the physician need not give himself any concern about rectifying the displacement of the vertebra, accompanied, as it is, by many other ill consequences of a serious nature. It is evident, then, that such a case could not be reduced either by succussion or by any other method, unless one were to cut open the patient, and then, having introduced the hand into one of the great cavities, were to push outward from within, which one might do on the dead body, but not at all on the living. Wherefore, then, do I write all this? Because certain persons fancy that they have cured patients in whom the vertebra had undergone complete dislocation forward. Some, indeed, suppose that this is the easiest of all these dislocations to be recovered from, and that such cases do not stand in need of reduction, but get well spontaneously. Many are ignorant, and profit by their ignorance, for they obtain credit from those about them. These are deceived in this way, for they suppose the spinous processes to be the vertebrae themselves, because every one of them appears round to the touch, not knowing that these bones are processes from the vertebrae, as formerly stated; but the vertebrae are at a considerable distance before them; for of all animals, man, in proportion to his bulk, has the belly (internal cavity?) the narrowest from behind to before, especially at the breast. When, therefore, any of these processes are severely fractured, whether one or more, the part there appears lower than on either side, and for that reason they are deceived, supposing that the vertebrae are displaced inward. And the attitudes of the patient contribute also to deceive them; for if they attempt to put themselves into a bent position, they are pained, from the skin being stretched at the seat of the injury, and at the same time the fragments of the bones wound the skin still more; but if they bend forward, they feel easier, for the skin at the wound is thus relaxed, and the bones are less disposed to hurt them; and if touched, they shrink and bend forward, and the part which is touched appears empty and soft. All the circumstances now mentioned contribute to deceive the physician. Such patients speedily get well without any bad effects, for callus readily forms in all such bones as are porous.

> Greek: 46. 46. Ὁκόσοισι μὲν οὖν κυφώματα γίνεται κατὰ τοὺς σπονδύλους, ἔξωσις μὲν μεγάλη ἀποῤῥαγεῖσα ἀπὸ τῆς ξυμφύσιος ἢ ἑνὸς σπονδύλου, ἢ καὶ πλειόνων, οὐ μάλα πολλοῖσι γίνεται, ἀλλʼ ὀλίγοισιν. οὐδὲ γὰρ τὰ τρώματα τὰ τοιαῦτα ῤηΐδιον γίνεσθαι· οὔτε γὰρ ἐς τὸ ἔξω ἐξωσθῆναι ῤηΐδίον ἐστιν, εἰ μὴ ἐκ τοῦ ἔμπροσθεν ἰσχυρῷ τινι τρωθείη διὰ τῆς κοιλίης (οὕτω δʼ ἂν ἀπόλοιτο), ἢ εἴ τις ἀφʼ ὑψηλοῦ τοῦ χωρίου πεσὼν ἐρείσειε τοῖσιν ἰσχίοισιν ἢ τοῖσιν ὤμοισιν (ἀλλὰ καὶ οὕτως ἂν ἀποθάνοι, παραχρῆμα δὲ οὐκ ἂν ἀποθάνοι)· ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ὄπισθεν οὐ ῤηΐδιον τοιαύτην ἔξαλσιν γενέσθαι ἐς τὸ ἔσω, εἰ μὴ ὑπέρβαρύ τι ἄχθος ἐμπέσοι· τῶν τε γὰρ ὀστέων τῶν ἐκπεφυκότων ἔξω ἓν ἕκαστον τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν, ὥστε πρόσθεν ἂν αὐτὸ καταγῆναι, πρὶν ἢ μεγάλην ῤοπὴν εἴσω ποιῆσαι, τούς τε ξυνδέσμους βιησάμενον, καὶ τὰ ἄρθρα τὰ ἐνηλλαγμένα. ὅ τε αὖ νωτιαῖος πονοίη ἂν, εἰ ἐξ ὀλίγου χωρίου τὴν περικαμπὴν ἔχοι, τοιαύτην ἔξαλσιν ἐξαλλομένου σπονδύλου· ὅ τʼ ἐκπηδήσας σπόνδυλος πιέζοι ἂν τὸν νωτιαῖον, εἰ μὴ καὶ ἀποῤῥήξειεν· πιεχθεὶς δʼ ἂν καὶ ἀπολελαμμένος, πολλῶν ἂν καὶ μεγάλων καὶ ἐπικαίρων ἀπονάρκωσιν ποιήσειεν· ὥστε οὐκ ἂν μέλοι τῷ ἰητρῷ, ὅκως χρὴ τὸν σπόνδυλον κατορθῶσαι, πολλῶν καὶ βιαίων ἄλλων κακῶν παρεόντων. ὥστε δὴ οὐδʼ ἐμβαλεῖν οἷόν τε πρόδηλον τὸν τοιοῦτον οὔτε κατασείσει, οὔτε ἄλλῳ τρόπῳ οὐδενὶ, εἰ μή τις διαταμὼν τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἔπειτα ἐσμασάμενος ἐς τὴν κοιλίην, ἐκ τοῦ εἴσωθεν τῇ χειρὶ ἐς τὸ ἔξω ἀντωθέοι· καὶ ταῦτα νεκρῷ μὲν οἷόν τε ποιέειν, ζῶντι δὲ οὐ πάνυ. διὰ τί οὖν ταῦτα γράφω; ὅτι οἴονταί τινες ἰητρευκέναι ἀνθρώπους, οἷσιν ἔσωθεν ἔπεσον σπόνδυλοι, τελέως ὑπερβάντες τὰ ἄρθρα· καίτοι γε ῤηΐστην ἐς τὸ περιγενέσθαι τῶν διαστροφέων ταύτην ἔνιοι νομίζουσι, καὶ οὐδὲν δέεσθαι ἐμβολῆς, ἀλλʼ αὐτόματα ὑγιέα γίνεσθαι τὰ τοιαῦτα. Ἀγνοέουσι δὲ πολλοὶ, καὶ κερδαίνουσιν, ὅτι ἀγνοέουσιν· πείθουσι γὰρ τοὺς πέλας. ἐξαπατῶνται δὲ διὰ τόδε· οἴονται γὰρ τὴν ἄκανθαν τὴν ἐξέχουσαν κατὰ τὴν ῤάχιν ταύτην τοὺς σπονδύλους αὐτοὺς εἶναι, ὅτι στρογγύλον αὐτῶν ἕκαστον φαίνεται ψαυόμενον, ἀγνοεῦντες ὅτι τὰ ὀστέα ταῦτά ἐστι τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν σπονδύλων πεφυκότα, περὶ ὧν ὁ λόγος ὀλίγῳ πρόσθεν εἴρηται· οἱ δὲ σπόνδυλοι πολὺ προσωτέρω ἄπεισιν· στενοτάτην γὰρ πάντων τῶν ζώων ὥνθρωπος κοιλίην ἔχει, ὡς ἐπὶ τῷ μεγέθει, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄπισθεν ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν, ποτὶ καὶ κατὰ τὸ στῆθος. ὅταν οὖν τι τούτων τῶν ὀστέων τῶν ὑπερεχόντων ἰσχυρῶς καταγῇ, ἤν τε ἓν, ἤν τε πλείω, ταύτῃ ταπεινότερον τὸ χωρίον γίνεται, ἢ τὸ ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐξαπατῶνται, οἰόμενοι τοὺς σπονδύλους ἔσω οἴχεσθαι. Προσεξαπατᾷ δὲ ἔτι αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ σχήματα τῶν τετρωμένων· ἢν μὲν γὰρ πειρῶνται καμπύλλεσθαι, ὀδυνῶνται, περιτενέος γινομένου ταύτῃ τοῦ δέρματος, ᾗ τέτρωνται· καὶ ἅμα τὰ ὀστέα τὰ κατεηγότα ἐνθράσσει οὕτω μᾶλλον τὸν χρῶτα· ἢν δὲ λορδαίνωσι, ῤᾴους εἰσίν· χαλαρώτερον γὰρ τὸ δέρμα κατὰ τὸ τρῶμα ταύτῃ γίνεται, καὶ τὰ ὀστέα ἧσσον ἐνθράσσει· ἀτὰρ καὶ ἤν τις ψαύῃ αὐτῶν, κατὰ τοῦτο ὑπείκουσι λορδοῦντες, καὶ τὸ χωρίον κενεὸν καὶ μαλθακὸν ψαυόμενον ταύτῃ φαίνεται. ταῦτα πάντα τὰ εἰρημένα προσεξαπατᾷ τοὺς ἰητρούς· ὑγιέες δὲ ταχέως καὶ ἀσινέες αὐτόματοι οἱ τοιοῦτοι γίνονται· ταχέως γὰρ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα ὀστέα ἐπιπωροῦται, ὅσα χαῦνά ἐστιν.

[¶10] 47. There are many varieties of curvature of the spine even in persons who are in good health; for it takes place from natural conformation and from habit, and the spine is liable to be bent from old age, and from pains. Gibbosities (or projections backward) from falls generally take place when one pitches on the nates, or falls on the shoulders. In this case some one of the vertebrae must necessarily appear higher than natural, and those on either side to a less degree; but yet no one generally has started out of the line of the others, but every one has yielded a little, so that a considerable extent of them is curved. On this account the spinal marrow easily bears such distortions, because they are of a circular shape, and not angular. The apparatus for the reduction in this case must be managed in the following manner: a strong and broad board, having an oblong furrow in it, is to be fastened in the ground, or, in place of the board, we may scoop out an oblong furrow in the wall, about a cubit above the floor, or at any suitable height, and then something like an oaken bench, of a quadrangular shape, is to be laid along (the wall?) at a distance from the wall, which will admit of persons to pass round if necessary, and the bench is to be covered with robes, or anything else which is soft, but does not yield much; and the patient is to be stoved with vapor, if necessary, or bathed with much hot water, and then he is to be stretched along the board on his face, with his arms laid along and bound to his body; the middle, then, of a thong which is soft, sufficiently broad and long, and composed of two cross straps of leather, is to be twice carried along the middle of the patient’s breast, as near the armpits as possible, then what is over of the thongs at the armpits is to be carried round the shoulders, and afterward the ends of the thong are to be fastened to a piece of wood resembling a pestle; they are to be adapted to the length of the bench laid below the patient, and so that the pestle-like piece of wood resting against this bench may make extension. Another such band is to be applied above the knees and the ankles, and the ends of the thongs fastened to a similar piece of wood; and another thong, broad, soft, and strong, in the form of a swathe, having breadth and length sufficient, is to be bound tightly round the loins, as near the hips as possible; and then what remains of this swathelike thong, with the ends of the thongs, must be fastened to the piece of wood placed at the patient’s feet, and extension in this fashion is to be made upward and downward, equally and at the same time, in a straight line. For extension thus made could do no harm, if properly performed, unless one sought to do mischief purposely. But the physicians, or some person who is strong, and not uninstructed, should apply the palm of one hand to the hump, and then, having laid the other hand upon the former, he should make pressure, attending whether this force should be applied directly downward, or toward the head, or toward the hips. This method of applying force is particularly safe; and it is also safe for a person to sit upon the hump while extension is made, and raising himself up, to let himself fall again upon the patient. And there is nothing to prevent a person from placing a foot on the hump, and supporting his weight on it, and making gentle pressure; one of the men who is practiced in the palestra would be a proper person for doing this in a suitable manner. But the most powerful of the mechanical means is this: if the hole in the wall, or in the piece of wood fastened into the ground, be made as much below the man’s back as may be judged proper, and if a board, made of limetree, or any other wood, and not too narrow, be put into the hole, then a rag, folded several times or a small leather cushion, should be laid on the hump; nothing large, however, should be laid on the back, but just as much as may prevent the board from giving unnecessary pain by its hardness; but the hump should be as much as possible on a line with the hole made in the wall, so that the board introduced into it may make pressure more especially at that spot. When matters are thus adjusted, one person, or two if necessary, must press down the end of the board, whilst others at the same time make extension and counter-extension as along the body, as formerly described. Extension may also be made with axles, which may either be fastened in the ground beside the bench, or the post of the axles may be attached to the bench itself, if you will make them perpendicular and overtopping (the bench?) a little at both ends, or at either end of the bench. These powers are easily regulated, so as to be made stronger or weaker, and they are of such force, that if one were to have recourse to them for a mischievous purpose, and not as a remedy, they would operate strongly in this way also; for by making merely extension and counter-extension longitudinally, without any additional force, one might make sufficient extension; and if, without making extension at all, one were only to press down properly with the board, sufficient force might be applied in this way. Such powers, then, are excellent which admit of being so regulated, that they can be made weaker and stronger as required. And the forces are applied in the natural way; for the pressure above forces the displaced parts into their place. Natural extension restores parts which have come too near one another to their natural position. I, then, am acquainted with no powers which are better or more appropriate than these; for extension along the spine downward has no proper hold at the bone called the os sacrum; and extension upward, along the neck and head, has indeed a hold; but extension thus made is unseemly to behold, and, besides, if increased, may occasion much mischief otherwise. I once made trial of the following plan. Having placed the patient on his back, I put below the hump a bladder, not inflated, and afterward introduced air into the bladder by means of a brass pipe connected with it. But the experiment did not succeed; for, when the man was fairly extended, the bladder yielded, and the air could not be forced into it; and, besides, the hump of the patient was apt to slip off the distended bladder when they were pressed together. But when I did not extend the man strongly, the bladder was swelled up by the air, and the man became more bent forward than proper. I have written this expressly; for it is a valuable piece of knowledge to learn what things have been tried and have proved ineffectual, and wherefore they did not succeed.

> Greek: 47. 47. Σκολιαίνεται μὲν οὖν ῤάχις, καὶ ὑγιαίνουσι, κατὰ πολλοὺς τρόπους· καὶ γὰρ ἐν τῇ φύσει καὶ ἐν τῇ χρήσει οὕτως ἔχει· ἀτὰρ καὶ ὑπὸ γήραος καὶ ὑπὸ ὀδυνημάτων ξυνδοτική ἐστιν. αἱ δὲ δὴ κυφώσιες, αἱ ἐν τοῖσι πτώμασιν, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ γίνονται, ἢν ἢ τοῖσιν ἰσχίοισιν ἐρείσῃ, ἢ ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους πέσῃ. ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἔξω φαίνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κυφώματι ἕνα μέν τινα ὑψηλότερον τῶν σπονδύλων, τοὺς δὲ ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, ἐπὶ ἧσσον· οὔκουν εἷς ἐπὶ πουλὺ ἀποπεπηδηκὼς ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων ἐστὶν, ἀλλὰ μικρὸν ἕκαστος ξυνδιδοῖ, ἀθρόον δὲ πολὺ γίνεται. διὰ οὖν τοῦτο καὶ ὁ νωτιαῖος μυελὸς εὐφόρως φέρει τὰς τοιαύτας διαστροφὰς, ὅτι κυκλώδης αὐτῷ ἡ διαστροφὴ γίνεται, ἀλλʼ οὐ γωνιώδης. χρὴ δὲ τὴν κατασκευὴν τοῦ διαναγκασμοῦ τοιήνδε κατασκευάσαι· ἔξεστι μὲν ξύλον ἰσχυρὸν καὶ πλατὺ, ἐντομὴν παραμήκεα ἔχον, κατορύξαι· ἔξεστι δὲ καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ ξύλου ἐν τοίχῳ ἐντομὴν παραμήκεα ἐνταμεῖν, ἢ πήχεϊ ἀνωτέρω τοῦ ἐδάφεος, ἢ ὅκως ἂν μετρίως ἔχῃ· ἔπειτα οἷον στύλον δρύϊνον, τετράγωνον, πλάγιον παραβάλλειν, ἀπολείποντα ἀπὸ τοῦ τοίχου, ὅσον παρελθεῖν τινα, ἢν δέῃ· καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν τὸν στύλον ἐπιστορέσαι ἢ χλαίνας, ἢ ἄλλο τι, ὃ μαλθακὸν μὲν ἔσται, ὑπείξει δὲ μὴ μέγα· τὸν δὲ ἄνθρωπον πυριῆσαι, ἢν ἐνδέχηται, ἢ πολλῷ θερμῷ λοῦσαι· κἄπειτα πρηνέα κατακλῖναι κατατεταμένον, καὶ τὰς μὲν χεῖρας αὐτοῦ παρατείναντα κατὰ φύσιν προσδῆσαι πρὸς τὸ σῶμα· ἱμάντι δὲ μαλθακῷ, ἱκανῶς πλατέϊ τε καὶ μακρῷ, ἐκ δύο διανταίων ξυμβεβλημένῳ, μέσῳ, κατὰ μέσον τὸ στῆθος δὶς περιβεβλῆσθαι χρὴ ὡς ἐγγυτάτω τῶν μασχαλέων· ἔπειτα τὸ περισσεῦον τῶν ἱμάντων κατὰ τὴν μασχάλην, ἑκάτερον περὶ τοὺς ὤμους περιβεβλήσθω· ἔπειτα αἱ ἀρχαὶ πρὸς ξύλον ὑπεροειδές τι προσδεδέσθωσαν, ἁρμόζουσαι τὸ μῆκος τῷ ξύλῳ τῷ ὑποτεταμένῳ, πρὸς ὅ τι προσβάλλον τὸ ὑπεροειδὲς ἀντιστηρίζοντα κατατείνειν. τοιούτῳ δέ τινι ἑτέρῳ δεσμῷ χρὴ ἄνωθεν τῶν γουνάτων δήσαντα καὶ ἄνωθεν τῶν πτερνέων, τὰς ἀρχὰς τῶν ἱμάντων πρὸς τοιοῦτό τι ξύλον προσδῆσαι· ἄλλῳ δὲ ἱμάντι πλατέϊ, καὶ μαλθακῷ, καὶ δυνατῷ, ταινιοειδέϊ, πλάτος ἔχοντι καὶ μῆκος ἱκανὸν, ἰσχυρῶς περὶ τὰς ἰξύας κύκλῳ περιδεδέσθαι ὡς ἐγγύτατα τῶν ἰσχίων· ἔπειτα τὸ περισσεῦον τοῦ ταινιοειδέος, ἅμα ἀμφοτέρας τὰς ἀρχὰς τῶν ἱμάντων, πρὸς τὸ ξύλον προσδῆσαι τὸ πρὸς τῶν ποδῶν· κἄπειτα κατατείνειν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα, ἅμα μὲν ἰσοῤῥόπως, ἅμα δὲ ἐς ἰθύ. οὐδὲν γὰρ ἂν μέγα κακὸν ἡ τοιαύτη κατάτασις ποιήσειεν, εἰ χρηστῶς σκευασθείη, εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἐξεπίτηδές τις βούλοιτο σίνεσθαι. τὸν δὲ ἰητρὸν χρὴ ἢ ἄλλον, ὅστις ἰσχυρὸς καὶ μὴ ἀμαθὴς, ἐπιθέντα τὸ θέναρ τῆς χειρὸς ἐπὶ τὸ ὕβωμα, καὶ τὴν ἑτέρην χεῖρα προσεπιθέντα ἐπὶ τὴν ἑτέρην, καταναγκάζειν, προσξυνιέντα, ἤν τε ἐς ἰθὺ ἐς τὸ κάτω πεφύκῃ καταναγκάζεσθαι, ἤν τε πρὸς τῆς κεφαλῆς, ἤν τε πρὸς τῶν ἰσχίων. καὶ ἀσινεστάτη μὲν αὕτη ἡ ἀνάγκη· ἀσινὲς δὲ καὶ ἐπικαθίζεσθαί τινα ἐπὶ τὸ κύφωμα, αὐτοῦ ἅμα κατατεινομένου, καὶ ἐνσεῖσαι μετεωρισθέντα. ἀτὰρ καὶ ἐπιβῆναι τῷ ποδὶ, καὶ ὀχηθῆναι ἐπὶ τὸ κύφωμα, ἡσύχως τε ἐπενσεῖσαι οὐδὲν κωλύει· τὸ τοιοῦτο δὲ ποιῆσαι μετρίως ἐπιτήδειος ἄν τις εἴη τῶν ἀμφὶ παλαίστρῃ εἰθισμένων. δυνατωτάτη μέντοι τῶν ἀναγκέων ἐστὶν, εἰ ὁ μὲν τοῖχος, ᾗ ἐντέτμηται, ἢ τὸ ξύλον τὸ κα. τορωρυγμένον, ᾗ ἐντέτμηται, κατωτέρω εἴη τῆς ῤάχιος τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ὁκόσῳ ἂν δοκέῃ μετρίως ἔχειν, σανὶς δὲ φιλυρίνη, μὴ λεπτὴ, ἐνείη, ἢ καὶ ἄλλου τινὸς ξύλου· ἔπειτα ἐπὶ τὸ ὕβωμα ἐπιτεθείη ἢ τρύχιόν τι πολύπτυχον, ἢ σμικρόν τι σκύτινον ὑποκεφάλαιον· ὡς ἐλάχιστα μὴν ἐπικεῖσθαι ξυμφέρει, μόνον προμηθεόμενον, ὡς μὴ ἡ σανὶς ὑπὸ σκληρότητος ὀδύνην παρὰ καιρὸν προσπαρέχῃ· κατʼ ἴξιν δὲ ἔστω ὡς μάλιστα τῇ ἐντομῇ τῇ ἐς τὸν τοῖχον, τὸ ὕβωμα, ὡς ἂν ἡ σανὶς, ᾗ μάλιστα ἐξέστηκε, ταύτῃ μάλιστα πιέζῃ ἐπιτεθεῖσα. ὅταν δὲ ἐπιτεθῇ, τὸν μέν τινα καταναγκάζειν χρὴ τὸ ἄκρον τῆς σανίδος, ἤν τε ἕνα δέῃ, ἤν τε δύο, τοὺς δὲ κατατείνειν τὸ σῶμα κατὰ μῆκος, ὡς πρόσθεν εἴρηται, τοὺς μὲν τῇ, τοὺς δὴ τῇ. ἔξεστι δὲ καὶ ὀνίσκοισι τὴν κατάτασιν ποιέεσθαι, ἢ παρακατορύξαντα παρὰ τὸ ξύλον, ἢ ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ ξύλῳ τὰς φλιὰς τῶν ὀνίσκων ἐντεκτηνάμενον, ἤν τε ὀρθὰς ἐθέλῃς ἑκατέρωθεν σμικρὸν ὑπερεχούσας, ἤν τε κατὰ κορυφὴν τοῦ ξύλου ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν. αὗται αἱ ἀνάγκαι εὐταμίευτοί εἰσι καὶ ἐς τὸ ἰσχυρότερον καὶ ἐς τὸ ἧσσον, καὶ ἰσχὺν ἔχουσι τοιαύτην, ὥστε, καὶ εἴ τις ἐπὶ λύμῃ βούλοιτο, ἀλλὰ μὴ ἐπὶ ἰητρείῃ, ἐς τοιαύτας ἀνάγκας ἀγαγεῖν, κἂν τούτῳ ἰσχυρῶς δύνασθαι· καὶ γὰρ ἂν κατατείνων κατὰ μῆκος μοῦνον ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν οὕτω, καὶ ἄλλην ἀνάγκην οὐδεμίην προστιθεὶς, ὅμως κατατείνειεν ἄν τις ἱκανῶς· καὶ εἰ μὴ κατατείνων, αὐτῇ δὲ μοῦνον τῇ σανίδι οὕτως ἰποίη τις, καὶ οὕτως ἂν ἱκανῶς καταναγκάσειεν. καλαὶ οὖν αἱ τοιαῦται ἰσχύες εἰσὶν, ᾗσιν ἔξεστι καὶ ἀσθενεστέρῃσι καὶ ἰσχυροτέρῃσι χρέεσθαι αὐτὸν ταμιεύοντα. καὶ μὲν δὴ καὶ κατὰ φύσιν γε ἀναγκάζουσιν· τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἐξεστεῶτα ἐς τὴν χώρην ἀναγκάζει ἡ ἴπωσις ἰέναι, τὰ δὲ ξυνεληλυθότα· κατὰ φύσιν κατατείνουσιν αἱ κατὰ φύσιν κατατάσιες. οὔκουν ἐγὼ ἔχω τουτέων ἀνάγκας καλλίους, οὐδὲ δικαιοτέρας· ἡ γὰρ κατʼ αὐτὴν τὴν ἄκανθαν ἰθυωρίη τῆς κατατάσιος κάτωθέν τε καὶ κατὰ τὸ ἱερὸν ὀστέον καλεόμενον οὐκ ἔχει ἐπιλαβὴν οὐδεμίην· ἄνωθεν δὲ κατὰ τὸν αὐχένα καὶ κατὰ τὴν κεφαλὴν, ἐπιλαβὴν μὲν ἔχει, ἀλλʼ ἐσιδέειν γε ἀπρεπὴς ταύτῃ τοι γινομένη ἡ κατάτασις, καὶ ἄλλας βλάβας ἂν προσπαρέχοι πλεονασθεῖσα. Ἐπειρήθην δὲ δή ποτε, ὕπτιον τὸν ἄνθρωπον κατατείνας, ἀσκὸν ἀφύσητον ὑποθεῖναι ὑπὸ τὸ ὕβωμα, κἄπειτα αὐλῷ ἐκ χαλκείου ἐς τὸν ἀσκὸν τὸν ὑποκείμενον ἐνιέναι φῦσαν. ἀλλά μοι οὐκ. εὐπορεῖτο· ὅτε μὲν γὰρ εὖ κατατείνοιμι τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἡσσᾶτο ὁ ἀσκὸς, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἡ φῦσα ἐσαναγκάζεσθαι· καὶ ἄλλως ἕτοιμον περιολισθάνειν ἦν, ἅτε ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ ἀναγκαζόμενον, τό τε τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὕβωμα, καὶ τὸ τοῦ ἀσκοῦ πληρουμένου κύρτωμα. ὅτε δʼ αὖ μὴ κάρτα κατατείνοιμι τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ὁ μὲν ἀσκὸς ὑπὸ τῆς φύσης ἐκυρτοῦτο, ὁ δὲ ἄνθρωπος πάντη μᾶλλον ἐλορδαίνετο ἢ ᾗ ξυνέφερεν. ἔγραψα δὲ ἐπίτηδες τοῦτο· καλὰ γὰρ καὶ ταῦτα τὰ μαθήματά ἐστιν, ἃ, πειρηθέντα, ἀπορηθέντα ἐφάνη, καὶ διʼ ἅσσα ἠπορήθη.

## 4. Sections 48–56

Source: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/4/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/4/#p-N

[¶0] 48. In curvatures forward of the vertebrae from a fall, or from some heavy body falling upon them, in general no one of them is displaced far beyond the others, but if one or more be so displaced, the case proves fatal; but, not withstanding, as formerly stated, the displacement is circular, and not angular. In such cases, then, the urine and faeces are more apt to be retained than in displacement outward, the feet and the whole inferior extremities are colder, and the symptoms are more fatal than in the former case; and if they do survive, they are more subject to retention of the urine, and to loss of strength, and to torpor in their legs. But if the displacement be in the upper part, they experience loss of strength and torpor of the whole body. I know no mechanical contrivance by which such a displacement could be reduced, unless that one might be benefited by succussion on a bladder, or any other similar plan of treatment, such as extension, as formerly described. I am not aware of any mode of pressure which might be applied along with the extension, like that of the board in displacement backward; for how could one apply pressure from before through the belly? (internal cavity?) The thing is impossible. But neither coughing nor sneezing has any power so as to cooperate with the extension, nor would the injection of air into the bowels have any effect. And to apply large cupping instruments with the view of drawing back the vertebrae which have protruded forward, shows a great error of judgment; for they rather propel than attract, and those who apply them are not aware even of this fact, for the greater will be the inclination forward the greater the instrument applied, the skin being forcibly drawn into the cupping-instrument. I could tell of other modes of succussion than those formerly described, which one might fancy would be more applicable in such an affection; but I have no great confidence in them, and therefore I do not describe them. On the main, it should be known, respecting the accidents which I have briefly described, that displacements forward are of a fatal and injurious nature; but that displacements backward, for the most part, do not prove fatal, nor occasion retention of urine nor torpor of the limbs, for they do not stretch the ducts leading toward the intestines, nor occasion obstruction of the same; but displacements forward produce both these bad effects, and many others in addition. And truly they are more apt to lose the power of their legs and arms, to have torpor of the body, and retention of urine, who experience no displacement either forward or backward, but merely a violent concussion along the spine, while those who have displacement backward are least subject to these symptoms.

> Greek: 48. 48. Ὅσοισι δὲ ἐς τὸ εἴσω σκολιαίνονται οἱ σπόνδυλοι ὑπὸ πτώματος, ἢ καὶ ἐμπεσόντος τινὸς βαρέος, εἷς μὲν οὐδεὶς τῶν σπονδύλων μέγα ἐξίσταται κάρτα ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων, ἢν δὲ ἐκστῇ μέγα ἢ εἷς, ἢ πλείονες, θάνατον φέρουσιν· ὥσπερ δὲ καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται, κυκλώδης καὶ αὕτη, καὶ οὐ γωνιώδης γίνεται ἡ παραλλαγή. οὖρα μὲν οὖν τούτοισι καὶ ἀπόπατος μᾶλλον ἴσχεται, ἢ τοῖσιν ἔξω κυφοῖσι, καὶ πόδες καὶ ὅλα τὰ σκέλεα ψύχεται μᾶλλον, καὶ θανατηφόρα ταῦτα μᾶλλον ἐκείνων· καὶ ἢν περιγένωνται δὲ, ῤυώδεες τὰ οὖρα μᾶλλον οὗτοι, καὶ τῶν σκελέων ἀκρατέστεροι καὶ ναρκωδέστεροι· ἢν δὲ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἄνω μέρεϊ μᾶλλον τὸ λόρδωμα γένηται, παντὸς τοῦ σώματος ἀκρατέες καὶ κατανεναρκωμένοι γίνονται. μηχανὴν δὲ οὐκ ἔχω οὐδεμίην ἔγωγε, ὅκως χρὴ τὸν τοιοῦτον ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ καταστῆσαι, εἰ μή τινα ἡ κατὰ τῆς κλίμακος κατάσεισις ὠφελέειν οἵη τε εἴη, ἢ καὶ ἄλλη τις τοιαύτη ἴησις, ἢ κατάτασις, οἵηπερ ὀλίγῳ πρόσθεν εἴρηται. Κατανάγκασιν δὲ σὺν τῇ κατατάσει οὐδεμίην ἔχω, ἥτις ἂν γίνοιτο, ὥσπερ τῷ κυφώματι τὴν κατανάγκασιν ἡ σανὶς ἐποιέετο. πῶς γὰρ ἄν τις ἐκ τοῦ ἔμπροσθεν διὰ τῆς κοιλίης ἀναγκάσαι δύναιτο; οὐ γὰρ οἷόν τε. ἀλλὰ μὴν οὔτε βῆχες, οὔτε πταρμοὶ οὐδεμίην δύναμιν ἔχουσιν, ὥστε τῇ κατατάσει ξυντιμωρέειν· οὐ μὴν οὐδʼ ἔνεσις φύσης ἐνιεμένη ἐς τὴν κοιλίην οὐδὲν ἂν δυνασθείη. καὶ μὴν αἱ μεγάλαι σικύαι προσβαλλόμεναι ἀνασπάσιος εἵνεκα δῆθεν τῶν ἔσω ῤεπόντων, σπονδύλων, μεγάλη ἁμαρτὰς γνώμης ἐστίν· ἀπωθέουσι γὰρ μᾶλλον, ἢ ἀνασπῶσιν· καὶ οὐδʼ αὐτὸ τοῦτο γινώσκουσιν οἱ προσβάλλοντες· ὅσῳ γὰρ ἄν τις μέζω προσβάλλῃ, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον λορδοῦνται οἱ προσβληθέντες, ξυναναγκαζομένου ἄνω τοῦ δέρματος. τρόπους δὲ ἄλλους κατασεισίων, ἢ οἷοι πρόσθεν εἴρηνται, ἔχοιμι ἂν εἰπεῖν, ἁρμόσαι οὓς ἄν τις δοκέοι τῷ παθήματι μᾶλλον· ἀλλʼ οὐ κάρτα πιστεύω αὐτοῖσιν· διὰ τοῦτο οὐ γράφω. ἀθρόον δὲ ξυνιέναι χρὴ περὶ τούτων, ὧν ἐν κεφαλαίῳ εἴρηται, ὅτι τὰ μὲν ἐς τὸ λορδὸν ῤέψαντα ὀλέθριά ἐστι καὶ σινάμωρα, τὰ δὲ ἐς τὸ κυφὸν ἀσινέα θανάτου, καὶ οὔρων σχεσίων, καὶ ἀποναρκωσίων τὸ ἔπίπαν· οὐ γὰρ ἐντείνει τοὺς ὀχετοὺς τοὺς κατὰ τὴν κοιλίην, οὐδὲ κωλύει εὐρόους εἶναι ἡ ἐς τὸ ἔξω κύφωσις· ἡ δὲ λόρδωσις ταῦτά τε ἀμφότερα ποιέει, καὶ ἐς τὰ ἄλλα πολλὰ προσγίνεται. ἐπείτοι πολὺ πλείονες σκελέων τε καὶ χειρῶν ἀκρατέες γίνονται, καὶ καταναρκοῦνται τὸ σῶμα, καὶ οὖρα ἴσχεται αὐτέοισιν, οἷσιν ἂν μὴ ἐκστῇ μὲν τὸ ὕβωμα μήτε ἔξω, μήτε ἔσω, σεισθέωσι δὲ ἰσχυρῶς ἐς τὴν ἰθυωρίην τῆς ῤάχιος· οἷσι δὲ ἂν ἐκστῇ τὸ ὕβωμα, ἧσσον τοιαῦτα πάσχουσιν.

[¶1] 49. And one might observe many other instances in medicine, of considerable injuries not proving serious, but producing a crisis in some affection, while less considerable injuries prove more serious, give rise to chronic diseases, and extend their effects to the whole system. Now something similar may happen in fracture of the ribs; for in fracture of one or more ribs, in general, if the fractured bones are not driven inward, nor are laid bare, fever rarely supervenes, neither does it often happen that there is haemoptysis, empyema, and suppurating sores, which require treatment with pledgets, nor necrosis of the bones; and in these cases the ordinary regimen is sufficient. For, unless they be seized with continual fever, a strict diet does more harm than good, by inducing inanition, and increasing the pain, fever, and cough; for moderate fullness of the intestines has a tendency to replace the ribs, while evacuation leads to suspension of the ribs, and suspension induces pain. Ordinary bandaging, externally, is sufficient in such cases; the bandages should be applied moderately tight, along with cerate and compresses, or a pad of wool may be applied. The rib is consolidated in twenty days, for callus soon forms in such bones.

> Greek: 49. 49. πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα ἐν ἰητρικῇ ἄν τις θεάσοιτο, ὧν τὰ μὲν ἰσχυρὰ ἀσινέα ἐστὶ, καὶ καθʼ ἑωυτὰ τὴν κρίσιν ὅλην λαμβάνοντα τοῦ νουσήματος, τὰ δὲ ἀσθενέστερα σινάμωρα, καὶ ἀποτόκους νοσημάτων χρονίους ποιέοντα, καὶ κοινωνέοντα τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι ἐπὶ πλέον. ἐπεὶ καὶ πλευρέων κάτηξις τοιοῦτόν τι πέπονθεν· οἷσι μὲν γὰρ ἂν καταγῇ πλευρὴ, μία ἢ πλέονες, ὡς τοῖσι πλείστοισι κατάγνυται, μὴ διασχόντα τὰ ὀστέα ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος, μηδὲ ψιλωθέντα, ὀλίγοι μὲν ἤδη ἐπυρέτηναν· ἀτὰρ οὐδὲ αἷμα πολλοὶ ἤδη ἔπτυσαν, οὐδὲ ἔμπυοι πολλοὶ γίνονται, οὐδὲ ἔμμοτοι, οὐδὲ ἐπισφακελίσιες τῶν ὀστέων· δίαιτά τε φαύλη ἀρκέει· ἢν γὰρ μὴ πυρετὸς ξυνεχὴς ἐπιλαμβάνῃ αὐτοὺς, κενεαγγέειν κάκιον τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν, ἢ μὴ κενεαγγέειν, καὶ ἐπωδυνέστερον, καὶ πυρετωδέστερον, καὶ βηχωδέστερον· τὸ γὰρ πλήρωμα τὸ μέτριον τῆς κοιλίης, διόρθωμα τῶν πλευρέων γίνεται· ἡ δὲ κένωσις κρεμασμὸν τῇσι πλευρῇσι ποιέει· ὁ δὲ κρεμασμὸς, ὀδύνην. ἔξωθέν τε αὖ φαύλη ἐπίδεσις τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν ἀρκέει· κηρωτῇ καὶ σπλήνεσι καὶ ὀθονίοισιν ἡσύχως ἐρείδοντα, ὁμαλὴν τὴν ἐπίδεσιν ποιέεσθαι, ἢ καὶ ἐριῶδές τι προσεπιθέντα. κρατύνεται δὲ πλευρὴ ἐν εἴκοσιν ἡμέρῃσιν· ταχεῖαι γὰρ αἱ ἐπιπωρώσιες τῶν τοιουτέων ὀστέων.

[¶2] 50. But when there is contusion of the flesh about the ribs, either from a blow, or a fall, or a bruise, or any like cause, there is often copious vomiting of blood, for there are canals stretched along the vacuity of each rib (intercostal space?), and nerves proceeding from the most important parts of the body have their origin there. Many of these, therefore, are troubled with coughs, tubercles, empyema, external suppurations, and sphacelus of the ribs. And even when no such symptoms supervene from contusion of the skin about the ribs, still in such cases there is, generally, more combined pain than in fractures of the ribs, and relapses of pain in the seat of the injury are more apt to occur. Wherefore some physicians pay much less attention to such injuries, than where the rib is fractured, whereas, if they were wise, they would treat such cases with far greater care than the other; for it is proper that the diet should be restricted, that the patients should remain at rest as much as possible, and abstain from venery, from fat articles of food, from such as excite cough, and from everything strong; they should be bled in the arm, speak as little as possible, should have the contused part bound round with folded compresses, plenty of bandages, broader than the contusion, and which should be smeared with cerate; in applying the bandages, broad and soft shawls should be used, and they should be put on moderately firm, so that the patient will say that they are neither too tight nor loose, and the bandaging should commence at the seat of the injury, and be made more particularly tight there, and the bandaging should be conducted as is done with a double-headed roller, so that the skin about the ribs may not be ruffled, but may lie smooth, and the bandaging should be renewed every day, or every alternate day. It is better also to open the bowels with some gentle medicine, so as just to produce an evacuation of the food, and the diet is to be restricted for ten days, and then the body is to be recruited and filled up; while you are upon the reducing system, the bandaging should be tighter, but when you are making him up again, it must be looser; and, if he spit blood from the commencement, the treatment and bandaging should be continued for forty days; but if there be no haemoptysis, treatment for twenty days will generally be sufficient; but the length of time must be regulated by the magnitude of the injury. When such contusions are neglected, if no greater mischief result there from, at all events the bruised part has its flesh more pulpy than it had formerly. When, therefore, any such thing is left behind, and is not properly dissipated by the treatment, it will be worse if the mucosity be lodged near the bone, for the flesh no longer adheres to the bone as formerly, the bone becomes diseased, and chronic sloughings of the bone in many cases arise from such causes. But if the mischief be not upon the bone, but it is the flesh itself which is pulpy, relapses and pains will return from time to time, if there happen to be any disorder in the body; wherefore proper bandaging, and for a considerable time, must be had recourse to, until the extravasated blood forming in the bruise be dried up and absorbed, and the part be made up with sound flesh, and the flesh adhere to the bone. The best cure is the cautery in those cases which, from neglect, have become chronic, and the place turns painful, and the flesh is pulpy. And when the flesh itself is pulpy, the burning should be carried as far as the bone, but the bone itself should not be heated; but if it be in the intercostal space, you need not make the burning so superficial, only you must take care not to burn quite through. But if the contusion appear to be at the bone, if it be still recent, and the bone has not yet become necrosed, if it be very small, it is to be burned as has been described; but if the rising along the bone be oblong, several eschars are to be burned over it. Necrosis of the rib will be described along with the treatment of suppurating sores.

> Greek: 50. 50. ἀμφιφλασθείσης μέντοι τῆς σαρκὸς ἀμφὶ τῇσι πλευρῇσιν, ἢ ὑπὸ πληγῆς, ἢ ὑπὸ πτώματος, ἢ ὑπὸ ἀντερείσιος, ἢ ἄλλου τινὸς τοιουτοτρόπου, πολλοὶ ἤδη πουλὺ αἷμα ἔπτυσαν· οἱ γὰρ ὀχετοὶ οἱ κατὰ τὸ λαπαρὸν τῆς πλευρῆς ἑκάστης παρατεταμένοι, καὶ οἱ τόνοι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐπικαιροτάτων τῶν ἐν τῷ σώματι τὰς ἀφορμὰς ἔχουσιν· πολλοὶ οὖν ἤδη βηχώδεες, καὶ φυματίαι, καὶ ἔμπυοι ἐγένοντο, καὶ ἔμμοτοι, καὶ ἡ πλευρὴ ἐπεσφακέλισεν αὐτοῖσιν. ἀτὰρ καὶ οἷσι μηδὲν τοιοῦτον προσεγένετο, ἀμφιφλασθείσης τῆς σαρκὸς ἀμφὶ τῇσι πλευρῇσιν, ὅμως δὲ βραδύτερον ὀδυνώμενοι παύονται οὗτοι, ἢ οἷσιν ἂν πλευρὴ καταγῇ, καὶ ὑποστροφὰς μᾶλλον ἴσχει ὀδυνημάτων τὸ χωρίον ἐν τοῖσι τοιούτοισι τρώμασιν, ἢ τοϊσιν ἑτέροισιν. μάλα μὲν οὖν μετεξέτεροι καταμελέουσι τῶν τοιούτων σινέων, μᾶλλον ἢ ἢν πλευρὴ κατεαγῇ αὐτέοισιν· ἀτὰρ καὶ ἰήσιος σκεθροτέρης οἱ τοιοῦτοι δέονται, εἰ σωφρονοῖεν· τῇ τε γὰρ διαίτῃ ξυμφέρει ξυνεστάλθαι, ἀτρεμέειν τε τῷ σώματι ὡς μάλιστα, ἀφροδισίων τε ἀπέχεσθαι, βρωμάτων τε λιπαρῶν, καὶ κερχνωδέων, καὶ ἰσχυρῶν πάντων, φλέβα τε κατʼ ἀγκῶνα τέμνεσθαι, σιγᾷν τε ὡς μάλιστα, ἐπιδέεσθαί τε τὸ χωρίον τὸ φλασθὲν σπλήνεσι μὴ πολυπτύχοισι, συχνοῖσι δὲ καὶ πολὺ πλατυτέροισι πάντη τοῦ φλάσματος, κηρωτῇ τε ὑποχρίειν, ὀθονίοισί τε πλατέσι σὺν ταινίῃσι πλατείῃσι καὶ μαλθακῇσιν ἐπιδέειν, ἐρείδειν τε μετρίως, ὥστε μὴ κάρτα πεπιέχθαι φάναι τὸν ἐπιδεδεμένον, μηδʼ αὖ χαλαρόν· ἄρχεσθαι δὲ τὸν ἐπιδέοντα κατὰ τὸ φλάσμα, καὶ ἐρηρεῖσθαι ταύτῃ μάλιστα, τὴν δὲ ἐπίδεσιν ποιέεσθαι, ὡς ἀπὸ δύο ἀρχέων ἐπιδέεται, ἵνα μὴ περιῤῥεπὲς τὸ δέρμα τὸ περὶ τὰς πλευρὰς ἔῃ, ἀλλʼ ἰσόῤῥοπον, ἐπιδέειν δὲ ἢ καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέρην, ἢ παρʼ ἑτέρην. ἄμεινον δὲ καὶ τὴν κοιλίην μαλθάξαι κούφῳ τινὶ, ὅσον κενώσιος εἵνεκεν τοῦ σίτου, καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν δέκα ἡμέρας ἰσχναίνειν, ἔπειτα ἀναθρέψαι τὸ σῶμα, καὶ ἁπαλῦναι· τῇ δὲ ἐπιδέσει, ἔστʼ ἂν μὲν ἰσχναίνῃς, ἐρηρεισμένῃ μᾶλλον χρέεσθαι, ὁκόταν δὲ ἐς τὸν ἁπαλυσμὸν ἄγῃς, ἐπιχαλαρωτέρῃ· καὶ ἢν μὲν αἷμα ἀποπτύσῃ καταρχὰς, τεσσαρακονθήμερον τὴν μελέτην καὶ τὴν ἐπίδεσιν ποιέεσθαι χρή· ἢν δὲ μὴ πτύσῃ τὸ αἷμα, ἀρκέει ἐν εἴκοσιν ἡμέρῃσιν ἡ μελέτη ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ· τῇ ἰσχύϊ δὲ τοῦ τρώματος τοὺς χρόνους προτεκμαίρεσθαι χρή. ὅσοι δʼ ἂν ἀμελήσωσι τῶν τοιουτέων ἀμφιφλασμάτων, ἢν καὶ ἄλλο μηδὲν αὐτοῖσι φλαῦρον μέζον γένηται, ὅμως τό γε χωρίον ἀμφιφλασθὲν μυξωδεστέρην τὴν σάρκα ἴσχει, ἢ πρόσθεν εἶχεν. ὅκου δέ τι τοιοῦτον ἐγκαταλείπεται, καὶ μὴ εὖ ἐξιποῦται τῇ γε ἀλθέξει, φαυλότερον μὲν, ἢν παρʼ αὐτὸ τὸ ὀστέον ἐγκαταλειφθῇ τὸ μυξῶδες· οὔτε γὰρ ἔτι ἡ σὰρξ ὁμοίως ἅπτεται τοῦ ὀστέου, τό τε ὀστέον νοσηρότερον γίνεται, σφακελισμοί τε χρόνιοι ὀστέου πολλοῖσιν ἤδη ἀπὸ τοιουτέων προφασίων ἐγένοντο. ἀτὰρ καὶ ἢν μὴ παρὰ τὸ ὀστέον, ἀλλʼ αὐτὴ ἡ σὰρξ μυξώδης ἔῃ, ὅμως· ὑποστροφαὶ γίνονται καὶ ὀδύναι ἄλλοτε καὶ ἄλλοτε, ἤν τι τῷ σώματι τύχῃ πονήσας· καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τῇ ἐπιδέσει χρέεσθαι χρὴ, ἅμα μὲν ἀγαθῇ, ἅμα δὲ ἐπὶ πουλὺ προηκούσῃ, ἕως ἂν ξηρανθῇ μὲν καὶ ἀναποθῇ τὸ ἐκχύμωμα τὸ ἐν τῇ φλάσει γενόμενον, αὐξηθῇ δὲ σαρκὶ ὑγιέϊ τὸ χωρίον, ἅψηται δὲ τοῦ ὀστέου ἡ σάρξ. οἷσι δʼ ἂ ἀμεληθεῖσι χρονιωθῇ, καὶ ὀδυνῶδες τὸ χωρίον γένηται, καὶ ἡ σὰρξ ὑπόμυξος ἔῃ, τούτοισι καῦσις ἴησις ἀρίστη. καὶ ἢν μὲν αὐτὴ ἡ σὰρξ μυξώδης ἔῃ, ἄχρι τοῦ ὀστέου καίειν χρὴ, μὴ μὴν διαθερμανθῆναι τὸ ὀστέον· ἢν δὲ μεσηγὺ τῶν πλευρέων ἔῃ, ἐπιπολῆς μὲν οὐδʼ οὕτω χρὴ καίειν, φυλάσσεσθαι μέντοι, μὴ διακαύσῃς πέρην. ἢν δὲ πρὸς τῷ ὀστέῳ δοκέῃ εἶναι τὸ φλάσμα, καὶ ἔτι νεαρὸν ἔῃ, καὶ μήπω σφακελίσῃ τὸ ὀστέον, ἢν μὲν κάρτα ὀλίγον ἔῃ, οὕτω καίειν χρὴ ὥσπερ εἴρηται· ἢν μέντοι παραμήκης ἔῃ ὁ μετεωρισμὸς ὁ κατὰ τὸ ὀστέον, πλείονας ἐσχάρας ἐμβάλλειν χρή· περὶ δὲ σφακελισμοῦ πλευρῆς ἅμα τῇ τῶν ἐμμότων ἰητρείῃ εἰρήσεται.

[¶3] 51. There are four modes of dislocation at the hip-joint: of which modes, dislocation inward takes place most frequently, outward, the most frequently of all the other modes; and it sometimes takes place backward and forward, but seldom. When, therefore, dislocation takes place inward, the leg appears longer than natural, when compared with the other leg, for two reasons truly; for the bone which articulates with the hip-joint is carried from above down to the ischium where it rises up to the pubes, upon it, then, the head of the femur rests, and the neck of the femur is lodged in the cotyloid foramen (foramen thyroideum?). The buttock appears hollow externally, from the head of the thighbone having shifted inward, and the extremity of the femur at the knee is turned outward, and the leg and foot in like manner. The foot then being turned outward, physicians, from ignorance, bring the sound leg to it and not it to the sound leg; on this account, the injured limb appears to be much longer than the sound one, and in many other cases similar circumstances lead to error in judgment. Neither does the limb at the groin admit of flexion as in the sound limb, and the head of the bone is felt at the perineum too prominent. These, then, are the symptoms attending dislocation of the thigh inward.

> Greek: 51. 51. ἢν δὲ μηροῦ ἄρθρον ἐξ ἰσχίου ἐκπέσῃ, ἐκπίπτει δὲ κατὰ τέσσαρας τρόπους, ἐς μὲν τὸ ἔσω πλειστάκις, ἐς δὲ τὸ ἔξω τῶν ἄλλων πλειστάκις· ἐς δὲ τὸ ὄπισθεν καὶ τὸ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκπίπτει μὲν, ὀλιγάκις δέ· οἷσι μὲν οὖν ἂν ἐκβῇ ἐς τὸ ἔσω, μακρότερον τὸ σκέλος φαίνεται, παραβαλλόμενον πρὸς τὸ ἕτερον, διὰ δισσὰς προφάσιας εἰκότως· ἐπί τε γὰρ τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἰσχίου πεφυκὸς ὀστέον, τὸ ἄνω φερόμενον πρὸς τὸν κτένα, ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἡ ἐπίβασις τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ γίνεται, καὶ ὁ αὐχὴν τοῦ ἄρθρου ἐπὶ τῆς κοτύλης ὀχέεται. ἔξωθέν τε αὖ ὁ γλουτὸς κοῖλος φαίνεται, ἅτε ἔσω ῤεψάσης τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ, τό τε αὖ κατὰ τὸ γόνυ τοῦ μηροῦ ἄκρον ἀναγκάζεται ἔξω ῤέπειν, καὶ ἡ κνήμη καὶ ὁ ποὺς ὡσαύτως. ἅτε οὖν ἔξω ῤέποντος τοῦ ποδὸς, οἱ ἰητροὶ διʼ ἀπειρίην τὸν ὑγιέα πόδα πρὸς τοῦτον προσίσχουσιν, ἀλλʼ οὐ τοῦτον πρὸς τὸν ὑγιέα· διὰ τοῦτο πουλὺ μακρότερον φαίνεται τὸ σιναρὸν τοῦ ὑγιέος· πολλαχῆ δὲ καὶ ἄλλῃ τὰ τοιαῦτα παραξύνεσιν ἔχει. οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ ξυγκάμπτειν δύνανται κατὰ τὸν βουβῶνα ὁμοίως τῷ ὑγιέϊ· ἀτὰρ καὶ ψαυομένη ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ κατὰ τὸν περίνεον ὑπερογκέουσα εὔδηλός ἐστιν. τὰ μὲν οὖν σημήϊα ταῦτά ἐστιν, οἷσιν ἂν ἔσω ἐκπεπτώκῃ ὁ μηρός.

[¶4] 52. When, then, a dislocation has not been reduced, but has been misunderstood or neglected, the leg, in walking, is rolled about as is the case with oxen, and the weight of the body is mostly supported on the sound leg, and the limb at the flank, and the joint where the dislocation has occurred is necessarily hollow and bent, while on the sound side the buttock is necessarily rounded. For if one should walk with the foot of the sound leg turned outward, the weight of the body would be thrown upon the injured limb, but the injured limb could not carry it, for how could it? One, then, is forced in walking to turn the leg inward, and not outward, for thus the sound leg best supports its own half of the body, and also that of the injured side. But being hollow at the flank and the hip-joint, they appear small in stature, and are forced to rest on a staff at the side of the sound leg. For they require the support of a staff there, since the nates inclines to this side, and the weight of the body is carried to it. They are forced also to stoop, for they are obliged to rest the hand on the side of the thigh against the affected limb; for the limb which is injured cannot support the body in changing the legs, unless it be held when it is applied to the ground. They who have got an unreduced dislocation inward are forced to put themselves into these attitudes, and this from no premeditation on their part how they should assume the easiest position, but the impediment itself teaches them to choose that which is most conformable to their present circumstances. For persons who have a sore on the foot, or leg, and cannot rest upon the limb, all, even children, walk in this way; for they turn the injured limb outward in walking, and they derive two advantages therefrom, to supply two wants; the weight of the body is not equally thrown upon the limb turned outward, as upon the one turned inward, for neither is the weight in a line with it, but is much more thrown upon the one under the body; for the weight is in a straight line with it, both in walking and in the shifting of the legs. In this position one can most quickly turn the sound limb under the body, by walking with the unsound limb outward, and the sound inward. In the case we are now treating of, it is well that the body finds out the attitudes which are the easiest for itself. Those persons, then, who have not attained their growth at the time when they met with a dislocation which is not reduced, become maimed in the thigh, the leg, and the foot, for neither do the bones grow properly, but become shortened, and especially the bone of the thigh; and the whole limb is emaciated, loses its muscularity, and becomes enervated and thinner, both from the impediment at the joint, and because the patient cannot use the limb, as it does not lie in its natural position, for a certain amount of exercise will relieve excessive enervation, and it will remedy in so far the deficiency of growth in length. Those persons, then, are most maimed who have experienced the dislocation in utero, next those who have met with it in infancy, and least of all, those who are full grown. The mode of walking adopted by adults has been already described; but those who are children when this accident befalls them, generally lose the erect position of the body, and crawl about miserably on the sound leg, supporting themselves with the hand of the sound side resting on the ground. Some, also, who had attained manhood before they met with this accident, have also lost the faculty of walking erect. Those who were children when they met with the accident, and have been properly instructed, stand erect upon the sound leg, but carry about a staff, which they apply under the armpit of the sound side, and some use a staff in both arms; the unsound limb they bear up, and the smaller the unsound limb, the greater facility have they in walking, and their sound leg is no less strong than when both are sound. The fleshy parts of the limb are enervated in all such cases, but those who have dislocation inward are more subject to this loss of strength than, for the most part, those who have it outward.

> Greek: 52. 52. οἷσι μὲν ἂν οὖν ἐκπεσὼν μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, ἀλλὰ καταπορηθῇ καὶ ἀμεληθῇ, ἥ τε ὁδοιπορίη περιφοράδην τοῦ σκέλεος ὥσπερ τοῖσι βουσὶ γίνεται, καὶ ἡ ὄχησις πλείστη αὐτέοισιν ἐπὶ τοῦ ὑγιέος σκέλεός ἐστιν. καὶ ἀναγκάζονται κατὰ τὸν κενεῶνα καὶ κατὰ τὸ ἄρθρον τὸ ἐκπεπτωκὸς κοῖλοι καὶ σκολιοὶ εἶναι· κατὰ δὲ τὸ ὑγιὲς ἐς τὸ ἔξω ὁ γλουτὸς ἀναγκάζεται περιφερὴς εἶναι· εἰ γάρ τις ἔξω τῷ ποδὶ τοῦ ὑγιέος σκέλεος βαίνοι, ἀπωθοίη ἂν τὸ σῶμα τὸ ἄλλο ἐς τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος τὴν ὄχησιν ποιέεσθαι· τὸ δὲ σιναρὸν· οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο ὀχέειν· πῶς γάρ; ἀναγκάζεται οὖν οὕτω κατὰ τοῦ ὑγιέος σκέλεος τῷ ποδὶ ἔσω βαίνειν, ἀλλὰ μὴ ἔξω· οὕτω γὰρ ὀχέει μάλιστα τὸ σκέλος τὸ ὑγιὲς, καὶ τὸ ἑωυτοῦ μέρος τοῦ σώματος, καὶ τὸ τοῦ σιναροῦ σκέλεος μέρος. Κοιλαινόμενοι δὲ κατὰ τὸν κενεῶνα καὶ κατὰ τὰ ἄρθρα, μικροὶ φαίνονται, καὶ τῷ ξύλῳ ἀναγκάζονται ἀντερείδεσθαι πλάγιοι κατὰ τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος· δέονται γὰρ ἀντικοντώσιος ταύτῃ· ἐπὶ τοῦτο γὰρ οἱ γλουτοὶ ῤέπουσι, καὶ τὸ ἄχθος τοῦ σώματος ὀχεεται ἐπὶ τοῦτο. ἀναγκάζονται δὲ καὶ ἐπικύπτειν· τὴν γὰρ χεῖρα τὴν κατὰ τὸ σκέλος τὸ σιναρὸν ἀναγκάζονται κατὰ πλάγιον τὸν μηρὸν ἐρείδειν· οὐ γὰρ δύναται τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος ὀχέειν τὸ σῶμα ἐν τῇ μεταλλαγῇ τῶν σκελέων, ἢν μὴ κατέχηται πρὸς τὴν γῆν πιεζόμενον. ἐν τούτοισιν οὖν τοῖσι σχήμασιν ἀναγκάζονται ἐσχηματίσθαι, οἷσιν ἂν ἔσω ἐκβὰν τὸ ἄρθρον μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, οὐ προβουλεύσαντος τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ὅκως ἂν ῤήϊστα ἐσχηματισμένον ἔῃ, ἀλλʼ αὐτὴ ἡ ξυμφορὴ διδάσκει ἐκ τῶν παρεόντων τὰ ῤήϊστα αἱρέεσθαι. ἐπεὶ καὶ ὁκόσοι ἕλκος ἔχοντες ἐν ποδὶ ἢ κνήμῃ οὐ κάρτα δύνανται ἐπιβαίνειν τῷ σκέλεϊ, πάντες, καὶ οἱ νήπιοι, οὕτως ὁδοιπορέουσιν· ἔξω γὰρ βαίνουσι τῷ σιναρῷ σκέλεϊ· καὶ δισσὰ κερδαίνουσι, δισσῶν γὰρ δέονται· τό τε γὰρ σῶμα οὐκ ὀχέεται ὁμοίως ἐπὶ τοῦ ἔξω ἀποβαινομένου, ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τοῦ εἴσω· οὐδὲ γὰρ κατʼ ἰθυωρίην αὐτῷ γίνεται τὸ ἄχθος, ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐπὶ τοῦ ὑποβαινομένου· κατʼ ἰθυωρίην γὰρ αὐτῷ γίνεται τὸ ἄχθος ἔν τε αὐτῇ τῇ ὁδοιπορίῃ καὶ τῇ μεταλλαγῇ τῶν σκελέων. ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι τάχιστα ἂν δύναιτο ὑποτιθέναι τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος, εἰ τῷ μὲν σιναρῷ ἐξωτέρω βαίνοι, τῷ δὲ ὑγιέϊ ἐσωτέρω. περὶ οὗ οὖν ὁ λόγος, ἀγαθὸν εὑρίσκεσθαι αὐτὸ ἑωυτῷ τὸ σῶμα [ἐς] τὰ ῤήϊστα τῶν σχημάτων. Ὅσοισι μὲν οὖν μήπω τετελειωμένοισιν ἐς αὔξησιν ἐκπεσὼν μὴ ἐμπέσοι, γυιοῦται ὁ μηρὸς καὶ ἡ κνήμη καὶ ὁ πούς· οὔτε γὰρ τὰ ὀστέα ἐς τὸ μῆκος ὁμοίως αὔξεται, ἀλλὰ βραχύτερα γίνεται, μάλιστα δὲ τὸ τοῦ μηροῦ, ἄσαρκόν τε ἅπαν τὸ σκέλος καὶ ἄμυον καὶ ἐκτεθηλυσμένον καὶ λεπτότερον γίνεται, ἅμα μὲν, διὰ τὴν στέρησιν τῆς χώρης τοῦ ἄρθρου, ἅμα δὲ, ὅτι ἀδύνατον χρέεσθαί ἐστιν, ὅτι οὐ κατὰ φύσιν κέεται· χρῆσις γὰρ μετεξετέρη ῤύεται τῆς ἄγαν ἐκθηλύνσιος· ῥύεται δέ τι καὶ τῆς ἐπὶ μῆκος ἀναυξήσιος. κακοῦται μὲν οὖν μάλιστα, οἷσιν ἂν ἐν γαστρὶ ἐοῦσιν ἐξαρθρήσῃ τοῦτο τὸ ἄρθρον, δεύτερον δὲ, οἷσιν ἂν ὡς νηπιωτάτοισιν ἐοῦσιν, ἥκιστα δὲ τοῖσι τετελειωμένοισιν. τοῖσι μὲν οὖν τετελειωμένοισιν εἴρηται, οἵη τις ἡ ὁδοιπορίη γίνεται· οἷσι δʼ ἂν νηπίοισιν ἐοῦσιν ἡ ξυμφορὴ αὕτη γένηται, οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι καταβλακεύουσι τὴν διόρθωσιν τοῦ σώματος, ἀλλὰ κακῶς εἰλέονται ἐπὶ τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος, τῇ χειρὶ πρὸς τὴν γῆν ἀπερειδόμενοι τῇ κατὰ τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος· καταβλακεύουσι δὲ ἔνιοι τὴν ἐς τὸ ὀρθὸν ὁδοιπορίην, καὶ οἷσιν ἂν τετελειωμένοισιν αὕτη ἡ ξυμφορὴ γένηται. ὁκόσοι δʼ ἂν νήπιοι ἐόντες, ταύτῃ τῇ ξυμφορῇ χρησάμενοι, ὀρθῶς παιδαγωγηθῶσι, τῷ μὲν ὑγιέϊ σκέλεϊ χρέονται ἐς ὀρθὸν, ὑπὸ δὲ τὴν μασχάλην τὴν κατὰ τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος σκίπωνα περιφέρουσι, μετεξέτεροι δὲ, καὶ ὑπʼ ἀμφοτέρας τὰς χεῖρας· τὸ δὲ σιναρὸν σκέλος μετέωρον ἔχουσι, καὶ τοσούτῳ ῤηΐους εἰσὶν, ὅσῳ ἂν αὐτοῖσιν ἔλασσον τὸ σκέλος τὸ σιναρὸν ἔῃ· τὸ δὲ ὑγιὲς ἰσχύει αὐτέοισιν οὐδὲν ἧσσον, ἢ εἰ καὶ ἀμφότερα ὑγιέα ἦν. Θηλύνονται δὲ πᾶσι τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν αἱ σάρκες τοῦ σκέλεος, μᾶλλον δέ τι θηλύνονται αἱ ἐκ τοῦ ἔξω μέρεος, ἢ αἱ ἐκ τοῦ ἔσω ὡς ἐπὶ πολύ.

[¶5] 53. Some tell a story how the Amazonian women dislocate the joints of their male children while mere infants, some at the knee, and others at the hip-joint, that they may be maimed, and that the male sex may not conspire against the female, and that they use them as artisans to perform any sedentary work, such as that of a shoemaker or brazier. Whether these things be true or not I do not know, but this I know, that matters would be such as is represented, provided their children, while infants, were to have their joints dislocated. The consequences of dislocation inward at the hip-joint are much greater than of dislocation outward at the hip-joint, but at the knee, although there be some difference, it is less; but the mode of either impediment is peculiar, their legs are more bandied when the dislocation is outward, but those who have dislocation inward stand erect on their feet with less freedom. In like manner, when the dislocation is at the anklejoint, if outward they become vari (their toes are turned inward?), but they can stand; but if the dislocation be inward they become valgi (their toes are turned outward?), but they have less freedom of standing. The proportional growth of their bones is as follows: in those cases in which the bone of the leg is dislocated, the bones of the feet grow very little, as being very near the injury, but the bones of the leg increase in size, and with very little defect, but the fleshy parts (muscles?) are wasted. But when the ankle-joint is in its natural state, but the knee is dislocated, in these cases the bones of the leg do not grow in like manner, but become shortened, as being nearest the seat of the injury, and the bones of the feet also are atrophied, but not in the same proportion; because, as was said a little while ago, the ankle-joint is safe, and if they could use it, as in the case of club-foot, the bones of the foot would be still less atrophied. When the dislocation takes place at the hip-joint, the bone of the thigh, in this case, does not generally grow in like manner, as being the one nearest the seat of the injury, but becomes shorter than the sound one; but the growth of the bones of the leg is not arrested in like manner; nor of those of the feet, for this reason, that there is no displacement between the bones of the thigh and leg, nor between those of the leg and foot; in those cases, however, the fleshy parts of the whole limb are atrophied; but if they could make use of the limb, the growth of the bones would be still more developed, as formerly stated, only the thigh, although its flesh would be much less wasted, would still be by no means so fleshy as the sound limb. The following observations are a proof of this: those persons who are weasel-armed (galiancones) from birth, owing to dislocation of the humerus, or when the accident has happened to them before they have attained their full growth, such persons have the bone of the arm shortened, but those of the fore-arm and hand are little inferior in size to the sound, for the reasons which have been stated, because the humerus is the bone nearest to the joint affected, and, on that account, it is shorter than natural; but the fore-arm is not equally affected by the accident, because the joint at which the bones of the arm and forearm are articulated remains in its natural condition, and the hand is still further distant than the fore-arm from the seat of the injury. Such are the reasons why certain of the bones in this case increase in growth, and certain do not. The laborious office of the hand contributes much to the development of the flesh in the fore-arm and hand, for whatever work is done by the hand, these weasel-armed persons strive to do no less effectually with the other hand than with the sound; for the arms do not support the weight of the body like the legs, and the work performed by them is light. From exercise, then, the fleshy parts on the hand and fore-arm are not atrophied in weasel-armed persons, and by these means the arm, too, gains flesh. But in dislocation inward at the hip-joint, whether from birth or from childhood, the fleshy parts, on that account, are much more atrophied than those of the hand, because the patients cannot exercise the leg. Another proof will be given in the observations which will be presently stated, that these things are such as I things are such as I have represented.

> Greek: 53. 53. μυθολογοῦσι δέ τινες, ὅτι αἱ Ἀμαζονίδες τὸ ἄρσεν γένος τὸ ἑωυτῶν αὐτίκα νήπιον ἐὸν ἐξαρθρέουσιν, αἱ μὲν, κατὰ [τὰ] γούνατα, αἱ δὲ, κατὰ τὰ ἰσχία, ὡς δῆθεν χωλὰ γίνοιτο, καὶ μὴ ἐπιβουλεύοι τὸ ἄρσεν γένος τῷ θήλεϊ· χειρώναξιν ἄρα τουτέοισι χρέονται, ὁκόσα ἢ σκυτείης ἔργα, ἢ χαλκείης, ἢ ἄλλο ὅ τι ἑδραῖον ἔργον. εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀληθέα ταῦτά ἐστιν, ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα· ὅτι δὲ γίνοιτο ἂν τοιαῦτα, οἶδα, εἴ τις ἐξαρθρέοι αὐτίκα νήπια ἐόντα. κατὰ μὲν οὖν τὰ ἰσχία μέζον τὸ διάφορόν ἐστιν ἐς τὸ ἔσω, ἢ ἐς τὸ ἔξω ἐξαρθρῆσαι· κατὰ δὲ τὰ γούνατα διαφέρει μέν τι, ἔλασσον δέ τι διαφέρει· τρόπος δὲ ἑκατέρου τοῦ χωλώματος ἴδιός ἐστιν· κυλλοῦται γὰρ μᾶλλον, οἷσιν ἂν ἐς τὸ ἔξω ἐξαρθρήσῃ· ὀρθοὶ δὲ ἧσσον ἵστανται, οἷσιν ἂν ἐς τὸ ἔσω ἐξαρθρήσῃ. ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ ἢν παρὰ τὸ σφυρὸν ἐξαρθρήσῃ, ἢν μὲν ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος, κυλλοὶ μὲν γίνονται, ἑστάναι δὲ δύνανται· ἢν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος, βλαισοὶ μὲν γίνονται, ἧσσον δὲ ἑστάναι δύνανται. ἥ γε μὴν ξυναύξησις τῶν ὀστέων τοιήδε γίνεται· οἷσι μὲν ἂν τὸ κατὰ τὸ σφυρὸν ὀστέον τὸ τῆς κνήμης ἐκστῇ, τούτοισι μὲν τὰ τοῦ ποδὸς ὀστέα ἥκιστα ξυναύξεται, ταῦτα γὰρ ἐγγυτάτω τοῦ τρώματός ἐστι, τὰ δὲ τῆς κνήμης ὀστέα αὔξεται μὲν, οὐ πολὺ δὲ ἐνδεεστέρως, αἱ μέντοι σάρκες μινύθουσιν. οἷσι δʼ ἂν κατὰ μὲν τὸ σφυρὸν μένῃ τὸ ἄρθρον κατὰ φύσιν, κατὰ δὲ τὸ γόνυ ἐξεστήκῃ, τούτοισι τὸ τῆς κνήμης ὀστέον οὐκ ἐθέλει ξυναύξεσθαι ὁμοίως, ἀλλὰ βραχύτατον γίνεται, τοῦτο γὰρ ἐγγυτάτω τοῦ τρώματός ἐστιν· τοῦ μέντοι ποδὸς τὰ ὀστέα μινύθει μὲν, ἀτὰρ οὐχ ὁμοίως, ὥσπερ ὀλίγον τι πρόσθεν εἴρηται, ὅτι τὸ ἄρθρον τὸ παρὰ τὸν πόδα σῶόν ἐστιν· εἰ δέ οἱ χρέεσθαι ἠδύναντο, ὥσπερ καὶ τῷ κυλλῷ, ἔτι ἂν ἧσσον ἐμινύθει τὰ τοῦ ποδὸς ὀστέα τούτοισιν. οἷσι δʼ ἂν κατὰ τὸ ἰσχίον ἡ ἐξάρθρησις γένηται, τούτοισι τοῦ μηροῦ τὸ ὀστέον οὐκ ἐθέλει ξυναύξεσθαι ὁμοίως, τοῦτο γὰρ ἐγγυτάτω τοῦ τρώματός ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ βραχύτερον τοῦ ὑγιέος γίνεται· τὰ μέντοι τῆς κνήμης ὀστέα οὐχ ὁμοίως τούτοισιν ἀναυξέα γίνεται, οὐδὲ τὰ τοῦ ποδὸς, διὰ τοῦτο δὲ, ὅτι τὸ τοῦ μηροῦ ἄρθρον τὸ παρὰ τὴν κνήμην ἐν τῇ ἑωυτοῦ φύσει μένει, καὶ τὸ τῆς κνήμης τὸ παρὰ τὸν πόδα· σάρκες μέντοι μινύθουσι παντὸς τοῦ σκέλεος τούτοισιν· εἰ μέντοι χρέεσθαι τῷ σκέλεϊ ἠδύναντο, ἔτι ἂν μᾶλλον τὰ ὀστέα ξυνηυξάνετο, ὡς καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται, πλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ, κἂν ἧσσον ἄσαρκα εἴη, ἀσαρκότερα δὲ πολλῷ ἢ εἰ ὑγιέα ἦν. σημήϊον δὲ, ὅτι ταῦτα τοιαῦτά ἐστιν· ὁκόσοι γὰρ, τοῦ βραχίονος ἐκπεσόντος, γαλιάγκωνες ἐγένοντο ἐκ γενεῆς, ἢ καὶ ἐν αὐξήσει πρὶν τελειωθῆναι, οὗτοι τὸ μὲν ὀστέον τοῦ βραχίονος βραχὺ ἴσχουσι, τὸν δὲ πῆχυν καὶ ἄκρην τὴν χεῖρα ὀλίγῳ ἐνδεεστέρην τοῦ ὑγιέος, διὰ ταύτας τὰς προφάσιας τὰς εἰρημένας, ὅτι ὁ μὲν βραχίων ἐγγυτάτω τοῦ ἄρθρου τοῦ τρώματός ἐστιν, ὥστε διὰ τοῦτο βραχύτερος γέγονεν· ὁ δʼ αὖ πῆχυς διὰ τοῦτο οὐχ ὁμοίως ἐνακούει τῆς ξυμφορῆς, ὅτι τὸ τοῦ βραχίονος ἄρθρον τὸ πρὸς τοῦ πήχεος ἐν τῇ ἀρχαίῃ φύσει μένει, ἥ τε αὖ χεὶρ ἄκρη ἔτι τηλοτέρω ἄπεστιν, ἢ ὁ πῆχυς, ἀπὸ τῆς ξυμφορῆς. διὰ ταύτας οὖν τὰς εἰρημένας προφάσιας, τῶν ὀστέων τά τε μὴ ξυναυξανόμενα οὐ ξυναυξάνεται, τά τε ξυναυξανόμενα ξυναυξάνεται. ἐς δὲ τὸ εὔσαρκον τῇ χειρὶ καὶ τῷ βραχίονι ἡ ταλαιπωρίη τῆς χειρὸς μέγα προσωφελέει· ὅσα γὰρ χειρῶν ἔργα ἐστὶ, τὰ πλεῖστα προθυμέονται οἱ γαλιάγκωνες ἐργάζεσθαι τῇ χειρὶ ταύτῃ, ὅσα περ καὶ τῇ ἑτέρῃ δύνανται, οὐδὲν ἐνδεεστέρως τῆς ἀσινέος· οὐ γὰρ δεῖ ὀχέεσθαι τὸ σῶμα ἐπὶ τῶν χειρῶν, ὡς ἐπὶ τῶν σκελέων, ἀλλὰ κοῦφα αὐτέῃσι τὰ ἔργα ἐστίν. διὰ δὲ τὴν χρῆσιν οὐ μινύθουσιν αἱ σάρκες αἱ κατὰ τὴν χεῖρα καὶ τὸν πῆχυν τοῖσι γαλιάγκωσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὁ βραχίων τι προσωφελέεται ἐς εὐσαρκίην διὰ ταῦτα· ὅταν δὲ ἰσχίον ἐκπαλὲς γένηται ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος ἐκ γενεῆς, ἢ καὶ ἔτι νηπίῳ ἐόντι, μινύθουσιν αἱ σάρκες διὰ τοῦτο μᾶλλον ἢ τῆς χειρὸς, ὅτι οὐ δύνανται χρέεσθαι τῷ σκέλεϊ. μαρτύριον δέ τι ἓν ἔσται καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ὀλίγον ὕστερον εἰρησομένοισιν, ὅτι ταῦτα τοιαῦτά ἐστιν.

[¶6] 54. When the head of the femur is dislocated outward, the limb in these cases, when compared with the other, appears shortened, and this is natural, for the head of the femur no longer rests on a bone as in dislocation inward, but along the side of a bone which naturally inclines to the side, and it is lodged in flesh of a pulpy and yielding nature, and on that account it appears more shortened. Inwardly, the thigh about the perineum appears more hollow and flabby, but externally the buttock is more rounded, from the head of the thigh having slipped outward, but the nates appear to be raised up, owing to the flesh there having yielded to the head of the thigh-bone; but the extremity of the thigh-bone, at the knee, appears to be turned inward, and the leg and foot in like manner, neither does it admit of flexion like the sound limb. These, then, are the symptoms of dislocation outward.

> Greek: 54. 54. Ὁκόσοισι δʼἂν ἐς τὸ ἔξω ἡ τοῦ μηροῦ κεφαλὴ ἐκβῇ, τούτοισι βραχύτερον μὲν τὸ σκέλος φαίνεται παρατεινόμενον παρὰ τὸ ἕτερον· εἰκότως· οὐ γὰρ ἐπʼ ὀστέον ἡ ἐπίβασις τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ ἐστιν, ὡς ὅτε ἔσω ἐκπέπτωκεν, ἀλλὰ παρʼ ὀστέον παρεγκεκλιμένην τὴν φύσιν ἔχον, ἐν σαρκὶ δὲ στηρίζεται ὑγρῇ καὶ ὑπεικούσῃ· διὰ τοῦτο μὲν βραχύτερον φαίνεται. ἔσωθεν δὲ ὁ μηρὸς παρὰ τὴν πλιχάδα καλεομένην κοιλότερος καὶ ἀσαρκότερος φαίνεται· ἔξωθεν δὲ ὁ γλουτὸς ὑποκυρτότερος, ἅτε ἐς τὸ ἔξω τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ ὠλισθηκυίης· ἀτὰρ καὶ ἀνωτέρω φαίνεται ὁ γλουτὸς, ἅτε ὑπειξάσης τῆς σαρκὸς τῆς ἐνταῦθα τῇ τοῦ μηροῦ κεφαλῇ· τὸ δὲ παρὰ τὸ γόνυ τοῦ μηροῦ ἄκρον ἔσω ῤέπον φαίνεται, καὶ ἡ κνήμη, καὶ ὁ πούς· ἀτὰρ οὐδὲ ξυγκάμπτειν ὥσπερ τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος δύνανται. τὰ μὲν οὖν σημήϊα ταῦτα τοῦ ἔξω ἐκπεπτωκότος μηροῦ εἰσιν.

[¶7] 55. When such a dislocation is not reduced in adults, the whole limb appears to be shortened, and in walking they cannot reach the ground with the heel, but they walk with the ball of the foot on the ground, and the points of their toes incline a little inward. But the injured limb, in this case, can support the body much better than in dislocation inward, both because the head of the femur and the neck of its articular extremity, being naturally oblique, have formed a bed under a considerable portion of the hip, and because the extremity of the foot is not forcibly turned outward, but is nearly in a line with the body, and is even inclined more inwardly. When, then, the articular extremity of the femur has worn out a socket for itself in the flesh where it was lodged, and the flesh is lubricated, it ceases to be painful in the course of time, and when it becomes free from pain, they can walk without a staff, if so inclined, and they can support the body on the injured limb. From usage then, in such cases, the fleshy parts are less enervated than in those which have been mentioned a little before, still, however, they lose their strength more or less; but in general there is more enervation when the dislocation is inward than when it is outward. Some of them, then, cannot wear their shoes, owing to the unbending state of their leg, and some of them can. But when this dislocation takes place in utero, and when the dislocation having occurred at any time before manhood, from violence, has not been replaced, or when from disease the articular extremity has started from its socket, and is displaced (for many such cases occur, and from some of them, if the femur become necrosed, obstinate suppurations requiring the use of tents are formed, and in certain of them the bone is laid bare), whether the bone become necrosed or not, the bone of the thigh is much shortened, and does not usually grow like the sound one, the bones, too, of the leg, become shorter than those of the other, but in a small degree, for the same reasons that were formerly stated; such persons can walk, some of them in the same fashion as adults having an unreduced dislocation, and some of them walk with the whole foot on the ground, but limp in walking, being obliged to do so by the shortness of the limb. Such is the result, even though they be carefully and properly trained in the attitudes before they have strength for walking, and in like manner also, after they have acquired the necessary strength; but those persons require the most care who were very young when they met with the accident, for, if neglected while children, the limb becomes entirely useless and atrophied. The fleshy parts of the entire limb are more wasted than those of the sound limb, but this is much less apt to happen in their case than in dislocation inward, owing to usage and exercise, as they are speedily able to make use of the limb, as was stated a little before with regard to the weasel-armed (galiancones).

> Greek: 55. 55. οἷσι μὲν οὖν ἂν τετελειωμένοισιν ἤδη ἐκπεσὸν τὸ ἄρθρον μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, τούτοισι βραχύτερον μὲν φαίνεται τὸ ξύμπαν σκέλος, ἐν δὲ τῇ ὁδοιπορίῃ τῇ μὲν πτέρνῃ οὐ δύνανται καθικνέεσθαι ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, τῷ δὲ στήθεϊ τοῦ ποδὸς βαίνουσιν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν· ὀλίγον δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος ῤέπουσι τοῖσι δακτύλοισιν ἄκροισιν. ὀχέειν δὲ δύναται τὸ σῶμα τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος τούτοισι πολλῷ μᾶλλον, ἢ οἷσιν ἂν ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος ἐκπεπτώκῃ, ἅμα μὲν, ὅτι ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ, καὶ ὁ αὐχὴν τοῦ ἄρθρου πλάγιος φύσει πεφυκὼς, ὑπὸ συχνῷ μέρεϊ τοῦ ἰσχίου τὴν ὑπόστασιν πεποίηται, ἅμα δὲ, ὅτι ἄκρος ὁ ποὺς οὐκ ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος ἀναγκάζεται ἐκκεκλίσθαι, ἀλλʼ ἐγγύς ἐστι τῆς ἰθυωρίης τῆς κατὰ τὸ σῶμα, καὶ τείνει καὶ ἐσωτέρω. ὅταν οὖν τρίβον μὲν λάβῃ τὸ ἄρθρον ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ, εἰς ἣν ἐξεκλίθη, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ γλισχρανθῇ, ἀνώδυνον τῷ χρόνῳ γίνεται· ὅταν δὲ ἀνώδυνον γένηται, δύνανται μὲν ὁδοιπορέειν ἄνευ ξύλου, ἢν ἄλλως βούλωνται· δύνανται δὲ ὀχέειν τὸ σῶμα ἐπὶ τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος. διʼ οὖν τὴν χρῆσιν ἧσσον τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν ἐκθηλύνονται αἱ σάρκες, ἢ οἷσιν ὀλίγον πρόσθεν εἴρηται· ἐκθηλύνονται δὲ ἢ πλεῖον, ἢ ἔλασσον· μᾶλλον δέ τι ἐκθηλύνονται κατὰ τὸ ἔσω μέρος, ἢ κατὰ τὸ ἔξω, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ. τὸ μέντοι ὑπόδημα μετεξέτεροι τούτων ὑποδέεσθαι οὐ δύνανται διὰ τὴν ἀκαμπίην τοῦ σκέλεος, οἱ δέ τινες καὶ δύνανται. οἷσι δὲ ἂν ἐν γαστρὶ ἐοῦσιν ἐξαρθρήσῃ τοῦτο τὸ ἄρθρον, ἢ ἔτι ἐν αὐξήσει ἐοῦσι βίῃ ἐκπεσὸν ἤδη μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, ἢ καὶ ὑπὸ νούσου ἐξαρθρήσῃ τοῦτο τὸ ἄρθρον καὶ ἐκπαλήσῃ (πολλὰ γὰρ τοιαῦτα γίνεται, καὶ ἐνίων μὲν τῶν τοιούτων ἢν ἐπισφακελίσῃ ὁ μηρὸς, ἐμπυήματα χρόνια καὶ ἔμμοτα γίνεται, καὶ ὀστέων ψιλώσιες ἐνίοισιν), ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ οἷσιν ἐπισφακελίζει, καὶ οἷσι μὴ ἐπισφακελίζει, τοῦ μηροῦ τὸ ὀστέον πολλῷ βραχύτερον γίνεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐθέλει ξυναύξεσθαι, ὥσπερ τοῦ ὑγιέος· τὰ μέντοι τῆς κνήμης βραχύτερα μὲν γίνεται, ἢ τὰ τῆς ἑτέρης, ὀλίγῳ δὲ, διὰ τὰς αὐτὰς προφάσιας, αἳ καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηνται· ὁδοιπορέειν τε δύνανται οἱ τοιοῦτοι, οἱ μέν τινες αὐτῶν τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, ὥσπερ οἷσι τετελειωμένοισιν ἐξέπεσε καὶ μὴ ἐνέπεσεν, οἱ δὲ καὶ βαίνουσι μὲν παντὶ τῷ ποδὶ, διαῤῥέπουσι δὲ ἐν τῇσιν ὁδοιπορίῃσιν, ἀναγκαζόμενοι διὰ τὴν βραχύτητα τοῦ σκέλεος. ταῦτα δὲ τοιαῦτα γίνεται, ἢν ἐπιμελέως μὲν παιδαγωγηθῶσιν ἐν τοῖσι σχήμασι καὶ ὀρθῶς, ἐν οἷσι δεῖ, πρὶν κρατυνθῆναι ἐς τὴν ὁδοιπορίην, ἐπιμελέως δὲ καὶ ὀρθῶς, ἐπὴν κρατυνθῶσιν· πλείστης δὲ ἐπιμελείης δέονται, οἷσιν ἂν νηπιωτάτοισιν ἐοῦσιν αὕτη ἡ ξυμφορὴ γένηται· ἢν γὰρ ἀμεληθῶσι νήπιοι ἐόντες, ἀχρήϊον παντάπασι καὶ ἀναυξὲς ὅλον τὸ σκέλος γίνεται. αἱ δὲ σάρκες τοῦ ξύμπαντος σκέλεος μινύθουσι μᾶλλον, ἢ τοῦ ὑγιέος· πάνυ μὴν πολλῷ ἧσσον τούτοισι μινύθουσιν, ἢ οἷσιν ἂν ἔσω ἐκπεπτώκῃ, διὰ τὴν χρῆσιν καὶ τὴν ταλαιπωρίην, οἷον εὐθέως δύνασθαι χρέεσθαι τῷ σκέλεϊ, ὡς καὶ πρόσθεν ὀλίγῳ περὶ τῶν γαλιαγκώνων εἴρηται.

[¶8] 56. There are persons who, from birth or from disease, have dislocations outward of both the thighs; in them, then, the bones are affected in like manner, but the fleshy parts in their case lose their strength less; the legs, too, are plump and fleshy, except that there is some little deficiency at the inside, and they are plump because they have the equal use of both their legs, for in walking they totter equally to this side that. Their nates appear very prominent, from the displacement of the bones of the joint. But if in their case the bones do not sphacelate (become carious?) and if they do not become bent above the hip-joint, if nothing of this kind happen to them, they become otherwise sufficiently healthy, but the growth of all the rest of the body, with the exception of the head, is arrested.

> Greek: 56. 56. εἰσὶ δέ τινες, ὧν τοῖσι μὲν ἐκ γενεῆς αὐτίκα, τοῖσι δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ νούσου ἀμφοτέρων τῶν σκελέων ἐξέστη τὰ ἄρθρα ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος· τούτοισιν οὖν τὰ μὲν ὀστέα ταὐτὰ παθήματα πάσχει· αἱ μέντοι σάρκες ἥκιστα ἐκθηλύνονται τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν· εὔσαρκα δὲ καὶ τὰ σκέλεα γίνεται, πλὴν εἴ τι ἄρα κατὰ τὸ εἴσω μέρος ἐλλείποι ὀλίγον· διὰ τοῦτο δὲ εὔσαρκά ἐστιν, ὅτι ἀμφοτέροισι τοῖσι σκέλεσιν ὁμοίως ἡ χρῆσις γίνεται· ὁμοίως γὰρ σαλεύουσιν ἐν τῇ ὁδοιπορίῃ ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα· ἐξεχέγλουτοι δὲ οὗτοι ἰσχυρῶς φαίνονται διὰ τὴν ἔκστασιν τῶν ἄρθρων. ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐπισφακελίσῃ αὐτοῖσι τὰ ὀστέα, μηδὲ κυφοὶ ἀνωτέρω τῶν ἰσχίων γένωνται (ἐνίους γὰρ καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα καταλαμβάνει), ἢν οὖν μὴ τοιοῦτόν τι γένηται, ἱκανῶς ὑγιηροὶ τἄλλα διαφέρονται· ἀναυξέστεροι μέντοι τὸ πᾶν σῶμα οὗτοι γίνονται, πλὴν τῆς κεφαλῆς.

## 5. Sections 57–69

Source: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/5/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/5/#p-N

[¶0] 57. In dislocations of the head of the femur backward, which rarely occur, the patient cannot extend the leg, either at the dislocated joint, or at the ham, to any extent, and of all the dislocations, this is the variety in which the patients have the least power of making extension at the groin and the ham. But, moreover, this also should be known (for it is a valuable piece of knowledge, and of much importance, and yet most yet most people are ignorant of it), that persons in health cannot extend the joint at the ham, if they do not extend the joint at the groin at the same time, unless they raise the foot very high, for in this way they could do it; neither also could they bend the joint at the ham, but with much greater difficulty, if they do not bend the joint at the groin at the same time. There are many other things in the body which have similar connections, both with regard to the contractions of nerves (ligaments?), and the positions of muscles, and many of them more worthy of being known than is generally supposed, and with regard to the nature of the intestine and that of the whole internal cavity, and with regard to the displacements and contractions of the uterus; but all these things will be treated of elsewhere, in a work akin to the present one. But with regard to the matter on hand, they cannot make extension, as has been already stated; and the limb appears shortened, for two reasons-first, because it cannot be extended, and also because the bone has slipped into the flesh of the nates; for the head and neck of the femur, in this dislocation, are carried downward from their natural situation, to the outside of the nates. But yet they can bend the limb, unless prevented by pain, and the leg and foot appear pretty straight, and not much inclined toward either side, but at the groin the flesh, when felt, appears looser, from the bone of the joint having slipped to the other side, but at the nates the head of the femur may be felt to be more prominent than natural. Such are the symptoms accompanying dislocation of the thigh backward.

> Greek: 57. 57. Ὅσοισι δʼ ἂν ἐς τοὔπισθεν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ ἐκπέσῃ, ὀλίγοισι δὲ ἐκπίπτει, οὗτοι ἐκτανύειν οὐ δύνανται τὸ σκέλος, οὔτε κατὰ τὸ ἄρθρον τὸ ἐκπεσὸν, οὔτε τι κάρτα κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην· ἀλλʼ ἥκιστα τῶν ἐκπαλέων οὗτοι ἐκτανύουσι καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὸν βουβῶνα, καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἄρθρον. Προσξυνιέναι μὲν οὖν καὶ τόδε χρὴ (εὔχρηστον γὰρ καὶ πολλοῦ ἄξιόν ἐστι, καὶ τοὺς πλείστους λήθει), ὅτι οὐδʼ ὑγιαίνοντες δύνανται κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἐκτανύειν τὸ ἄρθρον, ἢν μὴ ξυνεκτανύωσι καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὸν βουβῶνα ἄρθρον, πλὴν ἢν μὴ πάνυ ἄνω ἀείρωσι τὸν πόδα, οὕτω δʼ ἂν δύναιντο· οὐ τοίνυν οὐδὲ ξυγκάμπτειν δύνανται τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἄρθρον ὁμοίως, ἀλλὰ πολὺ χαλεπώτερον, ἢν μὴ ξυγκάμψωσι καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὸν βουβῶνα ἄρθρον. πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα κατὰ τὸ σῶμα τοιαύτας ἀδελφίξιας ἔχει, καὶ κατὰ νεύρων ξυντάσιας, καὶ κατὰ μυῶν σχήματα, καὶ πλεῖστά τε καὶ πλείστου ἄξια γινώσκεσθαι, ἢ ὥς τις οἴεται, καὶ κατὰ τὴν τοῦ ἐντέρου φύσιν, καὶ τὴν τῆς ξυμπάσης κοιλίης, καὶ κατὰ τὰς τῶν ὑστερέων πλάνας καὶ ξυντάσιας· ἀλλὰ περὶ μὲν τούτων ἑτέρωθι λόγος ἔσται, ἠδελφισμένος τοῖσι νῦν λεγομένοισιν. περὶ οὗ δὲ ὁ λόγος ἐστὶν, οὔτε ἐκτανύειν δύνανται, ὥσπερ ἤδη εἴρηται· βραχύτερόν τε τὸ σκέλος φαίνεται διὰ δισσὰς προφάσιας, ὅτι τε οὐκ ἐκτανύεται, ὅτι τε πρὸς τὴν σάρκα ὠλίσθηκε τὴν τοῦ πυγαίου· ἡ γὰρ φύσις τοῦ ἰσχίου τοῦ ὀστέου ταύτῃ, ᾗ καὶ ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ ὁ αὐχὴν τοῦ μηροῦ γίνεται, ὅταν δὲ ἐξαρθρήσῃ, καταφερὴς πέφυκεν ἐπὶ τοῦ πυγαίου τὸ ἔξω μέρος. ξυγκάμπτειν μέντοι δύνανται, ὅταν μὴ ἡ ὀδύνη κωλύῃ· καὶ ἡ κνήμη τε καὶ ὁ ποὺς ὀρθὰ ἐπιεικέως φαίνεται, καὶ οὔτε τῇ, οὔτε τῇ πολὺ ἐκκεκλιμένα· κατὰ δὲ τὸν βουβῶνα δοκέει τι ἡ σὰρξ λαπαρωτέρη εἶναι, ποτὶ καὶ ψαυομένη, ἅτε τοῦ ἄρθρου ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα μέρη ὠλισθηκότος· κατὰ δὲ αὐτὸ τὸ πυγαῖον διαψαυομένη ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ δοκέει ἐξογκέειν μᾶλλον. τὰ μὲν οὖν σημήϊα ταῦτα, ᾧ ἂν ἐς τὸ ὄπισθεν ἐκπεπτώκῃ ὁ μηρός.

[¶1] 58. When this dislocation occurs in an adult, and is not reduced, he can walk, indeed, after a time, and when the pain has abated, and when he has been accustomed to rotate the articular bone in the flesh; he finds it necessary, however, to make strong flexion at the groin in walking, for two reasons, both because the limb, for the causes already stated, becomes much shorter, and he is far from touching the ground with his heel, and he can barely reach it with the ball of his foot, and not even thus, unless he bend himself at the groins, and also bend with the other leg at the ham. And in this case, he is under the necessity of supporting the upper part of the thigh with his hand at each step: this also contributes, in a certain degree, to make him bend the body at the groins; for, during the shifting of the feet in walking, the body cannot be supported on the unsound be supported on the unsound limb, unless it be pressed to the ground by the hand,-the end of the femur not being placed properly under the body, but having slipped backward to the nates; and if he should try to rest the weight of his body for a little, upon the foot, without any other support, he would fall backward, for there would be a great inclination in this direction, from the hips having protruded backward far beyond the line of the foot, and the spine inclining toward the hips. Such persons can walk, indeed, without a staff, if so accustomed, for because the sole of the foot is in its old line, and is not inclined outward, they do not require anything to balance them. Such, however, as, instead of grasping the thigh, prefer resting their weight upon a staff introduced into the armpit of the affected side, these, if they use a longer staff, will walk, indeed, more erect, but will not be able to reach the ground with the foot, or if they wish to rest upon the foot, they must take a shorter staff, and will require to bend the body at the groins. The wasting of the fleshy parts is analogous to what happens in the cases formerly described, for the wasting is greatest in those cases in which the patients keep the limb up, and do not exercise it, whilst those who practice walking, have the least atrophy. The sound leg, however, is not benefited, but is rather rendered more deformed, if the injured limb be applied to the ground, for it is forced to cooperate with the other, being protruded at the hip, and bent at the ham. But if the patient does not use the injured limb by applying it to the ground, but carries it up, and rests upon a staff, the sound leg thereby gains strength, for it is employed in its natural position, and further, the exercise gives it strength. But it may be said, these things are foreign to medicine; for what is the use of enlarging upon cases which are already past remedy? This is far from being the case, for it belongs to the knowledge of medicine to be acquainted also with these, and they cannot possibly be separated from one another; for to such as are curable, means are to be used to prevent them from becoming incurable, studying how they may best be prevented from getting into an incurable state. And incurable cases should be known, that they may not be aggravated by useless applications, and splendid and creditable prognostics are made by knowing where, how, and when every case will terminate, and whether it will be converted into a curable or an incurable disease. When then, from birth, or during one’s youth, this dislocation backward occurs, and is not reduced, whether it be connected with violence or disease (for many such dislocations occur in diseases, but the nature of the diseases in which dislocations take place, will be described afterward); if, then, the dislocated limb be not reduced, the bone of the thigh becomes shortened, the whole limb is impaired, is arrested in its growth, and loses its flesh from want of use; the articulation at the ham is also impaired, for the nerves (ligaments?) become stretched, from cases formerly stated, wherefore those who have this dislocation, cannot make extension at the knee-joint. In a word, all parts of the body which were made for active use, if moderately used and exercised at the labor to which they are habituated, become healthy, increase in bulk, and bear their age well, but when not used, and when left without exercise, they become diseased, their growth is arrested, and they soon become old. Among these parts the joints and nerves (ligaments?), if not used, are not the least liable to be so affected; they are impaired, then, for the reasons we have stated, more in this variety of dislocation than in the others, for the whole limb is wasted, both in its bones and in its fleshy parts. Such persons, then, when they attain their full growth, keep the limb raised and flexed, rest the weight of the body on the other leg, and support themselves with a staff, some with one, and others with two.

> Greek: 58. 58. ὅτεῳ μὲν οὖν ἂν τετελειωμένῳ ἤδη ἐκπεσὼν μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, ὁδοιπορέειν μὲν δύναται, ὅταν ὁ χρόνος ἐγγένηται, καὶ ἡ ὀδύνη παύσηται, καὶ ἐθισθῇ τὸ ἄρθρον ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ ἐνστροφᾶσθαι· ἀναγκάζεται μέντοι ἰσχυρῶς ξυγκάμπτειν κατὰ τοὺς βουβῶνας ὁδοιπορέων, διὰ δισσὰς προφάσιας, ἅμα μὲν ὅτι πολλῷ βραχύτερον τὸ σκέλος γίνεται διὰ τὰ προειρημένα, καὶ τῇ μὲν πτέρνῃ καὶ πάνυ πολλοῦ δέεται ψαύειν τῆς γῆς· μόλις δὲ τῷ στήθεϊ τοῦ ποδὸς καθικνέεται, καὶ οὐδὲ οὕτως, ἢν μὴ κάμψῃ αὐτὸς ἑωυτὸν κατὰ τοὺς βουβῶνας, καὶ τῷ ἑτέρῳ σκέλεϊ κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἐπιξυγκάμψῃ. ἐπὶ δὲ τούτοισιν ἀναγκάζεται, ὥστε τῇ χειρὶ τῇ κατὰ τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος ἐρείδεσθαι ἐς τὸ ἄνω τοῦ μηροῦ ἐφʼ ἑκάστῃ ξυμβάσει· ἀναγκάζει οὖν τι καὶ τοῦτο αὐτὸ, ὥστε κάμπτεσθαι κατὰ τοὺς βουβῶνας· ἐν γὰρ τῇ μεταλλαγῇ τῶν σκελέων ἐν τῇ ὁδοιπορίῃ οὐ δύναται τὸ σῶμα ὀχέεσθαι ἐπὶ τοῦ σιναροῦ σκέλεος, εἰ μὴ προσκατερείδεται τὸ σιναρὸν πρὸς τὴν γῆν ὑπὸ τῆς χειρὸς, ἅτε οὐχ ὑφεστεῶτος τοῦ ἄρθρου ὑπὸ τῷ σῶματι, ἀλλʼ ἐς τὸ ὄπισθεν ἐξεστεῶτος κατὰ τὸ ἰσχίον· εἰ γὰρ πειρήσαιτο καὶ ἐπʼ ὀλίγον τοῦ ποδὸς ὀχηθῆναι μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ ἀντιστηριζόμενος, ἐς τὸ ὀπίσω ἂν πέσοι· ἡ γὰρ ῤοπὴ πολλὴ ἂν εἴη, τῶν ἰσχίων ἐπὶ πουλὺ ἐς τοὐπίσω ὑπερεχόντων ὑπὲρ τοῦ ποδὸς τῆς βάσιος, καὶ τῆς ῤάχιος ἐς τὰ ἰσχία ῤεπούσης. ἄνευ μὲν οὖν ξύλου δύνανται ὁδοιπορέειν οἱ τοιοῦτοι, ἢν ἄλλως ἐθισθέωσιν· διὰ τοῦτο, ὅτι ἡ βάσις τοῦ ποδὸς κατὰ τὴν ἀρχαίην ἰθυωρίην ἐστὶν, ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἐς τὸ ἔξω ἐκκεκλιμένη, διὰ τοῦτο οὐδὲ δέονται τῆς ἀντικοντώσιος. ὅσοι μέντοι βούλονται ἀντὶ τῆς τοῦ μηροῦ ἐπιλαβῆς ὑπὸ τὴν μασχάλην τὴν κατὰ τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος ὑποτιθέμενοι σκίπωνα ἀντερείδειν, κεῖνοι, ἢν μὲν μακρότερον τὸν σκίπωνα ὑποτιθέοιντο, ὀρθότεροι μὲν ὁδοιπορήσουσι, τῷ δὲ ποδὶ πρὸς τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐρείδονται· εἰ δʼ αὖ βούλονται ἐρείδεσθαι τῷ ποδὶ, βραχύτερον μὲν τὸ ξύλον φορητέον, κατὰ δὲ τοὺς βουβῶνας ἐπιξυγκάμπτεσθαι ἂν δέοι αὐτούς. τῶν δὲ σαρκῶν αἱ μινυθήσιες κατὰ λόγον. γίνονται καὶ τούτοισιν, ὥσπερ πρόσθεν εἴρηται· τοῖσι μὲν γὰρ μετέωρον ἔχουσι τὸ σκέλος καὶ μηδὲν ταλαιπωρέουσιν, τούτοισι καὶ μάλιστα μινύθουσιν· οἳ δʼ ἂν πλεῖστα χρέωνται τῇ ἐπιβάσει, τούτοισιν ἥκιστα μινύθουσιν. τὸ μέντοι ὑγιὲς σκέλος οὐκ ὠφελέεται, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον αὶ ἀσχημονέστερον γίνεται, ἢν χρέωνται τῷ σιναρῷ σκέλεϊ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν· ξυνυπουργέον γὰρ ἐκείνῳ ἐξίσχιόν τε ἀπαναγκάζεται εἶναι, καὶ κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ξυγκάμπτειν· ἢν δὲ μὴ προσχρέηται τῷ σιναρῷ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, ἀλλὰ, μετέωρον ἔχων, σκίπωνι ἀντερείδηται, οὕτω δὲ καρτερὸν γίνεται τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος· ἔν τε γὰρ τῇ φύσει διαιτᾶται, καὶ τὰ γυμνάσια προσκρατύνει αὐτό. φαίη μὲν οὖν ἄν τις, ἔξω ἰητρικῆς τὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι· τί γὰρ δῆθεν δεῖ περὶ τῶν ἤδη ἀνηκέστων γεγονότων ἔτι προσξυνιέναι; πολλοῦ δὲ δεῖ οὕτως ἔχειν· τῆς γὰρ αὐτῆς γνώμης καὶ ταῦτα ξυνιέναι· οὐ γὰρ οἷόν τε ἀπαλλοτριωθῆναι ἀπʼ ἀλλήλων. δεῖ μὲν γὰρ ἐς τὰ ἀκεστὰ μηχανάασθαι, ὅκως μὴ ἀνήκεστα ἔσται, ξυνιέντα ὅκη ἂν μάλιστα κωλυτέα ἐς τὸ ἀνήκεστον ἐλθεῖν· δεῖ δὲ τὰ ἀνήκεστα ξυνιέναι, ὡς μὴ μάτην λυμαίνηται· τὰ δὲ προῤῥήματα λαμπρὰ καὶ ἀγωνιστικὰ, ἀπὸ τοῦ διαγινώσκειν, ὅπη ἕκαστον, καὶ οἵως, καὶ ὁκότε τελευτήσει, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἀκεστὸν τράπηται, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἀνήκεστον. Ὁκόσοισι δʼ ἂν ἐκ γενεῆς, ἢ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐν αὐξήσει ἐοῦσιν, οὕτως ὀλίσθῃ τὸ ἄρθρον ὀπίσω, καὶ μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, ἤν τε βίῃ ὀλίσθῃ, ἤν τε καὶ ὑπὸ νούσου (πολλὰ γὰρ τοιαῦτα ἐξαρθρήματα γίνετα ἐν νούσοισιν· οἷαι δέ τινές εἰσιν αἱ νοῦσοι, ἐν ᾗσιν ἐξθρέεται τὰ τοιαῦτα, ὕστερον γεγράψεται), ἢν οὖν ἐκστὰν μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, τοῦ μὲν μηροῦ τὸ ὀστέον βραχὺ γίνεται, κακοῦται δὲ καὶ πᾶν τὸ σκέλος, καὶ ἀναυξέστερον γίνεται καὶ ἀσαρκότερον πολλῷ διὰ τὸ μηδὲν προσχρέεσθαι αὐτῷ· κακοῦται γὰρ τούτοισι καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἄρθρον· τὰ γὰρ νεῦρα ἐντεταμένα γίνεται διὰ τὰ πρόσθεν εἰρημένα· διὸ οὐ δύνανται τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἄρθρον ἐκτανύειν, οἷσιν ἂν οὕτως ἰσχίον ἐκπέσῃ. ὡς γὰρ ἐν κεφαλαίῳ εἰπεῖν, πάντα τὰ ἐν τῷ σώματι ὁκόσα ἐπὶ χρήσει γέγονε, χρεομένοισι μὲν μέτρια καὶ γυμναζομένοισιν ἐν τῇσι ταλαιπωρίῃσιν, ἐν ᾗσιν ἕκαστα εἴθισται, οὕτω μὲν ὑγιεινὰ καὶ αὔξιμα καὶ εὔγηρα γίνεται· μὴ χρεομένοισι δὲ, ἀλλʼ ἐλινύουσι νοσηρότερα γίνεται καὶ ἀναυξέα καὶ ταχύγηρα. ἐν δὲ τούτοισιν οὐχ ἥκιστα τὰ ἄρθρα τοῦτο πέπονθε καὶ τὰ νεῦρα, ἢν μή τις αὐτοῖσι χρέηται· κακοῦνται μὲν οὖν διὰ ταύτας τὰς προφάσιας μᾶλλόν τι ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ τοῦ ὀλισθήματος, ἢ ἐν τοῖσιν ἄλλοισιν· ὅλον γὰρ τὸ σκέλος ἀναυξὲς γίνεται, καὶ τῇ ἀπὸ τῶν ὀστέων φύσει, καὶ τῇ ἀπὸ τῶν σαρκῶν· οἱ οὖν τοιοῦτοι ὁκόταν ἀνδρωθῶσι, μετέωρον καὶ ξυγκεκαμμένον τὸ σκέλος ἴσχουσιν, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ ἑτέρου ὀχέονται, καὶ τῷ ξύλῳ ἀντιστηριζόμενοι, οἱ μὲν, ἑνὶ, οἱ δὲ, δυσίν.

[¶2] 59. In dislocations of the head of the thigh-bone forward (they are of rare occurrence), the patients cannot extend the leg completely, but least of all can they bend it at the groin; they are pained, also, if forced to bend the limb at the ham. The length of the leg, if compared at the heel, is the same as that of the other; but the extremity of the foot inclines less to project forward. But the whole limb has its natural direction, and inclines neither to this side nor to that. These cases are particularly attended with severe pain, and they are more apt to be accompanied with retention of urine at first than any of the other dislocations; for the head of the thigh-bone is lodged very near to important nerves. And the region of the groin appears swelled out and stretched, while that of the nates is more wrinkled and flabby. The symptoms now stated are those which attend this dislocation of the thigh-bone.

> Greek: 59. 59. οἷσι δʼ ἂν ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ ἐκπέσῃ, ὀλίγοισι δὲ τοῦτο γίνεται, οὗτοι ἐκτανύειν μὲν τὸ σκέλος δύνανται τελείως, ξυγκάμπτειν δὲ ἥκιστα οὗτοι δύνανται τὰ κατὰ τὸν βουβῶνα· πονέουσι δὲ, καὶ ἢν κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην ἀναγκάζωνται ξυγκάμπτειν. μῆκος δὲ τοῦ σκέλεος παραπλήσιον φαίνεται, κατὰ μὲν τὴν πτέρνην καὶ πάνυ· ἄκρος δὲ ὁ ποὺς ἧσσόν τι προκύπτειν ἐθέλει ἐς τοὔμπροσθεν· ὅλον δὲ τὸ σκέλος ἔχει τὴν ἰθυωρίην τὴν κατὰ φύσιν, καὶ οὔτε τῇ, οὔτε τῇ ῤέπει. ὀδυνῶνται δὲ αὐτίκα οὗτοι μάλιστα, καὶ οὖρον ἴσχεται τὸ πρῶτον τούτοισι μᾶλλόν τι, ἢ τοῖσιν ἄλλοισιν ἐξαρθρήμασιν· ἐγκέεται γὰρ ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ ἐγγυτάτω τούτοισι τῶν τόνων τῶν ἐπικαίρων. καὶ κατὰ μὲν τὸν βουβῶνα ἐξογκέον τε καὶ κατατεταμένον τὸ χωρίον φαίνεται, κατὰ δὲ τὸ πυγαῖον, στολιδωδέστερον καὶ ἀσαρκότερον. ταῦτα μὲν οὖν σημήϊά ἐστι τὰ εἰρημένα, ὧν ἂν οὕτως ἐκπεπτώκῃ ὁ μηρός.

[¶3] 60. When persons have attained their full growth before meeting with this dislocation, and when it has not been reduced, upon the subsidence of the pain, and when the bone of the joint has been accustomed to be rotated in the place where it is lodged, these persons can walk almost erect without a staff, and with the injured leg almost quite straight, as it does not admit of easy flexion at the groin and the ham; owing, then, to this want of flexion at the groin, they keep the limb more straight in walking than they do the sound one. And sometimes they drag the foot along the ground, as not being able to bend the upper part of the limb, and they walk with the whole foot on the ground; for in walking they rest no less on the heel than on the fore part of the foot; and if they could take great steps, they would rest entirely on the heel in walking; for persons whose limbs are sound, the greater the steps they take in walking, rest so much the more on the heel, while they are putting down the one foot and raising the opposite. In this form of dislocation, persons rest their weight more on the heel than on the anterior part of the foot, for the fore part of the foot cannot be bent forward equally well when the rest of the limb is extended as when it is in a state of flexion; neither, again, can the foot be arched to the same degree the limb is bent as when it is extended. The natural state of matters is such as has been now described; and in an unreduced dislocation, persons walk in the manner described, for the reasons which have been stated. The limb, moreover, is less fleshy than the other, at the nates, the calf of the leg, and the whole of its posterior part. When this dislocation occurs in infancy, and is not reduced, or when it is congenital, in these cases the bone of the thigh is more atrophied than those of the leg and foot; but the atrophy of the thigh-bone is least of all in this form of dislocation. The fleshy parts, however, are everywhere attenuated, more especially behind, as has been stated above. If properly trained, such persons, when they grow up, can use the limb, which is only a little shorter than the other, and yet they support themselves on a staff at the affected side. For, not being able to use properly the ball of the foot without the heel, nor to put it down as some can in the other varieties of dislocation (the cause of which has been just now stated), on this account they require a staff. But those who are neglected, and are not in the practice of putting their foot to the ground, but keep the limb up, have the bones more atrophied than those who use the limb; and, at the articulations, the limb is more maimed in the direct line than in the other forms of dislocation.

> Greek: 60. 60. Ὁκόσοισι μὲν οὖν ἂν ἤδη ἠνδρωμένοισι τοῦτο τὸ ἄρθρον ἐκπεσὸν μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, οὗτοι, ὁκόταν αὐτοῖσιν ἡ ὀδύνη παύσηται καὶ τὸ ἄρθρον ἐθισθῇ ἐν τῷ χωρίῳ τούτῳ στροφᾶσθαι, ἵνα ἐξέπεσεν, οὗτοι δύνανται σχεδὸν εὐθὺς ὀρθοὶ ὁδοιπορέειν ἄνευ ξύλου, καὶ πάνυ μέντοι εὐθέες, ἐπὶ δὲ τὸ σιναρὸν, ἅτε οὔτε κατὰ τὸν βουβῶνα εὔκαμπτοι ἐόντες, οὔτε κατὰ τὴν ἰγνύην· διὰ οὖν τοῦ βουβῶνος τὴν ἀκαμπίην εὐθυτέρῳ ὅλῳ τῷ σκέλεϊ ἐν τῇ ὁδοιπορίῃ χρέονται, ᾒ ὅτε ὑγίαινον. καὶ σύρουσι δὲ ἐνίοτε πρὸς τὴν γῆν τὸν πόδα, ἅτε οὐ ῤηϊδίως ξυγκάμπτοντες τὰ ἄνω ἄρθρα, καὶ ἅτε παντὶ βαίνοντες τῷ ποδί οὐδὲν γὰρ ἧσσον τῇ πτέρνῃ οὗτοι βαίνουσιν, ἢ τῷ ἔμπροσθεν· εἰ δέ γε ἠδύναντο μέγα προβαίνειν, κἂν πάνυ πτερνοβάται ἦσαν· καὶ γὰρ οἱ ὑγιαίνοντες ὅσῳ ἂν μέζον προβαίνοντες ὁδοιπορέωσι, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον πτερνοβάται εἰσὶ, τιθέντες τὸν πόδα, αἴροντες δὲ τὸν ἐναντίον. Ὁκόσοισι δὲ δὴ οὕτως ἐκπέπτωκε, καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον τῇ πτέρνῃ προσεγχρίπτουσιν, ἢ τῷ ἔμπροσθεν· τὸ γὰρ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ ποδὸς, ὅταν ἐκτεταμένον ἔῃ τὸ ἄλλο σκέλος, οὐχ ὁμοίως δύναται ἐς τὸ πρόσω καμπύλλεσθαι, ὥσπερ ὅταν ξυγκεκαμμένον ἔῃ τὸ σκέλος· οὔτʼ αὖ σιμοῦσθαι δύναται ὁ ποὺς, ξυγκεκαμμένου τοῦ σκέλεος, ὡς ὅταν ἐκτεταμένον ἔῃ τὸ σκέλος. ὑγιαίνουσά τε οὖν ἡ φύσις οὕτω πέφυκεν, ὥσπερ εἴρηται· ὅταν δὲ ἐκπεσὸν μὴ ἐμπέσῃ τὸ ἄρθρον, οὕτως ὁδοιπορέουσιν, ὡς εἴρηται, διὰ τὰς προφάσιας ταύτας τὰς εἰρημένας· ἀσαρκότερον μέντοι τὸ σκέλος τοῦ ἑτέρου γίνεται, κατά τε τὸ πυγαῖον, κατά τε τὴν γαστροκνημίην, καὶ κατὰ τὴν ὄπισθεν ἴξιν. οἷσι δʼ ἂν νηπίοισιν ἔτι ἐοῦσι τὸ ἄρθρον οὕτως ὀλισθάνον μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, ἢ καὶ ἐκ γενεῆς οὕτω γένηται, καὶ τούτοισι τὸ τοῦ μηροῦ ὀστέον μᾶλλόν τι μινύθει, ἢ τὰ τῆς κνήμης καὶ τὰ τοῦ ποδός· ἥκιστα μὴν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ τοῦ ὀλισθήματος ὁ μηρὸς μειοῦται. μινύθουσι μέντοι αἱ σάρκες πάντη, μάλιστα δὲ κατὰ τὴν ὄπισθεν ἴξιν, ὥσπερ ἤδη καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται. ὅσοι μὲν οὖν ἂν τιθηνηθῶσιν ὀρθῶς, οὗτοι μὲν δύνανται προσχρέεσθαι τῷ σκέλεϊ αὐξανόμενοι, βραχυτέρῳ μέν τινι τοῦ ἑτέρου ἐόντι, ὅμως δὲ ἐρειδόμενοι ξύλῳ ἐπὶ ταῦτα, ᾗ τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος· οὐ γὰρ κάρτα δύνανται ἄνευ τῆς πτέρνης τῷ στήθεϊ τοῦ ποδὸς χρέεσθαι, ἐπικαθιέντες ὥσπερ ἐν ἑτέροισι χωλεύμασιν ἔνιοι δύνανται· αἴτιον δὲ τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὸ ὀλίγῳ πρόσθεν εἰρημένον· διὰ οὖν τοῦτο προσδέονται ξύλου. ὅσοι δʼ ἂν καταμεληθέωσι καὶ μηδὲν χρέωνται ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τῷ σκέλεϊ, ἀλλὰ μετέωρον ἔχωσι, τούτοισι μινύθει μὲν τὰ ὀστέα ἐς αὔξησιν μᾶλλον, ἢ τοῖσι χρεομένοισιν· μινύθουσι δὲ καὶ αἱ σάρκες πολὺ μᾶλλον, ἢ τοῖσι χρεομένοισιν· κατὰ δὲ τὰ ἄρθρα ἐς τὸ εὐθὺ πηροῦται τούτοισι τὸ σκέλος μᾶλλόν τι, ἢ οἷσιν ἂν ἄλλως ἐκπεπτώκῃ.

[¶4] 61. In a word, luxations and subluxations take place in different degrees, being sometimes greater and sometimes less; and those cases in which the bone has slipped or been displaced to a much greater extent, are in general more difficult to rectify than otherwise; and if not reduced, such cases have greater and more striking impairment and lesion of the bones, fleshy parts, and attitudes; but when the bone has slipped, or been displaced to a less extent, it is easier to reduce such cases than the other; and if the attempts at reduction have failed, or have been neglected, the impairment in such cases is less, and proves less injurious than in the cases just mentioned. The other joints present great differences as to the extent of the displacements which they are subject to. But the heads of the femur and humerus are very similar to one another as to their dislocations. For the heads of the bones are rounded and smooth, and the sockets which receive the heads are also circular, and adapted to the heads; they do not admit then of being dislocated in any intermediate degree, but, not withstanding, from their rounded shape, the bones slip either outward or inward. In the case we are now treating of, then, there is either a complete dislocation or none at all, and yet these bones admit of being displaced to a greater or less extent; and the thigh is more subject to these differences than the arm.

> Greek: 61. 61. ὡς μὲν οὖν ἐν κεφαλαίῳ εἰρῆσθαι, τὰ ἄρθρα τὰ ἐκπίπτοντα καὶ τὰ ὀλισθάνοντα ἀνίσως αὐτὰ ἑωυτοῖσιν ἐκπίπτει καὶ ὀλισθάνει, ἄλλοτε μὲν πουλὺ πλεῖον, ἄλλοτε δὲ πολὺ ἔλασσον· καὶ οἷσι μὲν ἂν πολὺ πλεῖον ὀλίσθῃ ἢ ἐκπέσῃ, χαλεπώτερα ἐμβάλλειν τὸ ἐπίπαν ἐστὶ, καὶ ἢν μὴ ἐμβιβασθῇ, μέζους καὶ ἐπιδηλοτέρας τὰς πηρώσιας καὶ κακώσιας ἴσχει τὰ τοιαῦτα, καὶ ὀστέων, καὶ σαρκῶν, καὶ σχημάτων· ὅταν δὲ μεῖον ἐκπέσῃ καὶ ὀλίσθῃ, ῤηΐδιον μὲν ἐμβάλλειν τὰ τοιαῦτα τῶν ἑτέρων γίνεται, ἢν δὲ καταπορηθῇ ἢ ἀμεληθῇ ἐμπεσεῖν, μείους καὶ ἀσινέστεραι αἱ πηρώσιες γίνονται τούτοισιν, ἢ οἷσιν ὀλίγῳ πρόσθεν εἴρηται. τὰ μὲν οὖν ἄλλα ἄρθρα καὶ πάνυ πολὺ διαφέρει ἐς τὸ ὁτὲ μὲν μεῖον, ὁτὲ δὲ μεῖζον τὸ ὀλίσθημα ποιέεσθαι· μηροῦ δὲ καὶ βραχίονος κεφαλαὶ παραπλησιώτατα ὀλισθάνουσιν αὐτὴ ἑωυτῇ ἑκατέρη· ἅτε γὰρ στρογγύλαι μὲν αἱ κεφαλαὶ ἐοῦσαι, ἁπλῆν τῆν στρογγύλωσιν καὶ φαλακρὴν ἔχουσι, κυκλοτερέες δὲ αἱ κοιλίαι ἐοῦσαι, αἱ δεχόμεναι τὰς κεφαλὰς, ἁρμόζουσι δὲ τῇσι κεφαλῇσιν· διὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτῇσι τὸ ἥμισυ ἐκστῆναι τοῦ ἄρθρου· ὀλισθάνοι γὰρ ἂν διὰ τὴν περιφερείην, ἢ ἐς τὸ ἔξω, ἢ ἐς τὸ ἔσω. περὶ οὗ οὖν ὁ λόγος, ἐκπίπτουσι τελέως ἤδη, ἐπεὶ ἄλλως γε οὐκ ἐκπίπτουσιν· ὅμως δὲ καὶ ταῦτα ὁτὲ μὲν πλεῖον ἀποπηδᾷ ἀπὸ τῆς φύσιος, ὁτὲ δὲ ἔλασσον· μᾶλλον δέ τι μηρὸς τοῦτο βραχίονος πέπονθεν.

[¶5] 62. Wherefore, then, some of these congenital displacements, if to a small extent, may be reduced to their natural condition, and especially those at the ankle-joint. Most cases of congenital club-foot are remediable, unless the declination be very great, or when the affection occurs at an advanced period of youth. The best plan, then, is to treat such cases at as early a period as possible, before the deficiency of the bones of the foot is very great, and before there is any great wasting of the flesh of the leg. There is more than one variety of club-foot, the most of them being not complete dislocations, but impairments connected with the habitual maintenance of the limb in a certain position. In conducting the treatment, attention must be paid to the following points: to push back and rectify the bone of the leg at the ankle from without inward, and to make counter-pressure on the bone of the heel in an outward direction, so as to bring it bring it into line, in order that the displaced bones may meet at the middle and side of the foot; and the mass of the toes, with the great toe, are to be inclined inward, and retained so; and the parts are to be secured, with cerate containing a full proportion of resin, with compresses, and soft bandages insufficient quantity, but not applied too tight; and the turns of the bandages should be in the same direction as the rectifying of the foot with the hand, so that the foot may appear to incline a little outward. And a sole made of leather not very hard, or of lead, is to be bound on, and it is not to be applied to the skin but when you are about to make the last turns of the bandages. And when it is all bandaged, you must attach the end of one of the bandages that are used to the bandages applied to the inferior part of the foot on the line of the little toe; and then this bandage is to be rolled upward in what is considered to be a sufficient degree, to above the calf of the leg, so that it may remain firm when thus arranged. In a word, as if moulding a wax model, you must bring to their natural position the parts which were abnormally displaced and contracted together, so rectifying them with your hands, and with the bandaging in like manner, as to bring them into their position, not by force, but gently; and the bandages are to be stitched so as to suit the position in which the limb is to be placed, for different modes of the deformity require different positions. And a small shoe made of lead is to be bound on externally to the bandaging, having the same shape as the Chian slippers had. But there is no necessity for it if the parts be properly adjusted with the hands, properly secured with the bandages, and properly disposed of afterward. This, then, is the mode of cure, and it neither requires cutting, burning, nor any other complex means, for such cases yield sooner to treatment than one would believe. However, they are to be fairly mastered only by time, and not until the body has grown up in the natural shape; when recourse is had to a shoe, the most suitable are the buskins, which derive their name from being used in traveling through mud; for this sort of shoe does not yield to the foot, but the foot yields to it. A shoe shaped like the Cretan is also suitable.

> Greek: 62. 62. ἐπεὶ ἔνια καὶ τῶν ἐκ γενεῆς γενομένων ὀλισθημάτων, ἢν μικρὸν ὀλίσθῃ, οἷά τε ἐς τὴν φύσιν ἄγεσθαι, καὶ μάλιστα τὰ παρὰ τοῦ ποδὸς ἄρθρα. ὁκόσοι ἐκ γενεῆς κυλλοὶ γίνονται, τὰ πλεῖστα τούτων ἰήσιμά ἐστιν, ἢν μὴ πάνυ μεγάλη ἡ ἔκκλισις ἔῃ, ἢ καὶ προαυξέων γεγονότων ἤδη τῶν παιδίων ξυμβῇ. ἄριστον μὲν οὖν ὡς τάχιστα ἰητρεύειν τὰ τοιαῦτα, πρὶν πάνυ μεγάλην τὴν ἔνδειαν τῶν ὀστέων τῶν ἐν τῷ ποδὶ γενέσθαι, πρίν τε πάνυ μεγάλην τὴν ἔνδειαν τῶν σαρκῶν τῶν κατὰ τὴν κνήμην εἶναι. τρόπος μὲν οὖν κυλλώσιος οὐχ εἷς, ἀλλὰ πλείονες, τὰ πλεῖστα μὴν οὐκ ἐξηρθρηκότα παντάπασιν, ἀλλὰ διʼ ἔθος σχήματος ἔν τινι ἀπολήψει τοῦ ποδὸς κεκυλλωμένα. προσέχειν δὲ καὶ ἐν τῇ ἰητρείῃ τοισίδε χρή· ἀπωθέειν μὲν καὶ κατορθοῦν τῆς κνήμης τὸ κατὰ τὸ σφυρὸν ὀστέον, τὸ ἔξωθεν, ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος, ἀντωθέειν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος τὸ τῆς πτέρνης τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἴξιν, ὅκως ἀλλήλοις ἀπαντήσῃ τὰ ὀστέα τὰ ἐξίσχοντα κατὰ μέσον τε καὶ πλάγιον τὸν πόδα· τοὺς δʼ αὖ δακτύλους ἀθρόους ξὺν τῷ μεγάλῳ δακτύλῳ ἐς τὸ εἴσω μέρος ἐγκλίνειν καὶ περιαναγκάζειν οὕτως· ἐπιδεῖν δὲ κηρωτῇ ἐῤῥητινωμένῃ εὖ, καὶ σπλήνεσι, καὶ ὀθονίοισι μαλθακοῖσι, μὴ ὀλίγοισι, μηδὲ ἄγαν πιέζοντα· οὕτω δὲ τὰς περιαγωγὰς ποιέεσθαι τῆς ἐπιδέσιος, ὥσπερ καὶ τῇσι χερσὶν ἡ κατόρθωσις ἦν τοῦ ποδὸς, ὅκως ὁ ποὺς ὀλίγῳ μᾶλλον ἐς τὸ βλαισὸν ῤέπων φαίνηται. ἴχνος δέ τι χρὴ ποιέεσθαι, ἢ δέρματος μὴ ἄγαν σκληροῦ, ἢ μολύβδινον, προσεπιδεῖν δὲ, μὴ πρὸς τὸν χρῶτα τιθέντα, ἀλλʼ ὅταν ἤδη τοῖσιν ὑστάτοισιν ὀθονίοισι μέλλῃς ἐπιδέειν· ὅταν δὲ ἤδη ἐπιδεδεμένος ἔῃ, ἑνός τινος τῶν ὀθονίων χρὴ, οἷσιν ἐπιδέεται, τὴν ἀρχὴν προσράψαι πρὸς τὰ κάτω τοῦ ποδὸς ἐπιδέσματα κατὰ τὴν ἴξιν τοῦ μικροῦ δακτύλου· ἔπειτα ἐς τὸ ἄνω τείνοντα, ὅκως ἂν δοκέῃ μετρίως ἔχειν, περιβάλλειν ἄνωθεν τῆς γαστροκνημίης, ὡς μόνιμον ἔῃ, κατατεταγμένον οὕτως. ἁπλῷ δὲ λόγῳ, ὥσπερ κηροπλαστέοντα, χρὴ ἐς τὴν φύσιν τὴν δικαίην ἄγειν καὶ τὰ ἐκκεκλιμένα καὶ τὰ συντεταμένα παρὰ τὴν φύσιν, καὶ τῇσι χερσὶν οὕτω διορθοῦντα, καὶ τῇ ἐπιδέσει ὡσαύτως, προσάγειν δὲ οὐ βιαίως, ἀλλὰ παρηγορικῶς· προσράπτειν δὲ τὰ ὀθόνια, ὅκως ἂν ξυμφέρῃ τὰς ἀναλήψιας ποιέεσθαι, ἄλλα γὰρ ἄλλης τῶν χωλωμάτων δέεται ἀναλήψιος. Ὑποδημάτιον δὲ ποιέεσθαι μολύβδινον, ἔξωθεν τῆς ἐπιδέσιος ἐπιδεδεμένον, οἷον αἱ χῖαι κρηπῖδες ῤυθμὸν εἶχον· ἀλλʼ οὐδὲν αὐτοῦ δεῖ, ἤν τις ὀρθῶς μὲν τῇσι χερσὶ διορθώσῃ, ὀρθῶς δὲ τοῖσιν ὀθονίοισιν ἐπιδέῃ, ὀρθῶς δὲ καὶ τὰς ἀναλήψιας ποιοῖτο. ἡ μὲν οὖν ἴησις αὕτη, καὶ οὔτε τομῆς, οὔτε καύσιος οὐδὲν δεῖ, οὔτʼ ἄλλης ποικιλίης· θᾶσσον γὰρ ἐνακούει τὰ τοιαῦτα τῆς ἰητρείης, ἢ ὡς ἄν τις οἴοιτο. Προσνικᾷν μέντοι χρὴ τῷ χρόνῳ, ἕως ἂν αὐξηθῇ τὸ σῶμα ἐν τοῖσι δικαίοισι σχήμασιν. ὅταν δὲ ἐς ὑποδήματος λόγον ἴῃ, ἀρβύλαι ἐπιτηδειόταται αἱ πηλοπάτιδες καλεόμεναι· τοῦτο γὰρ ὑποδημάτων ἥκιστα κρατέεται ὑπὸ τοῦ ποδὸς, ἀλλὰ κρατέει μᾶλλον· ἐπιτήδειος δὲ καὶ ὁ κρητικὸς τρόπος τῶν ὑποδημάτων.

[¶6] 63. In cases of complete dislocation at the ankle-joint, complicated with an external wound, whether the displacement be inward or outward, you are not to reduce the parts, but let any other physician reduce them if he choose. For this you should know for certain, that the patient will die if the parts are allowed to remain reduced, and that he will not survive more than a few days, for few of them pass the seventh day, being cut off by convulsions, and sometimes the leg and foot are seized with gangrene. It should be well known that such will be the results; and it does not appear to me that hellebore will do any good, though administered the same day, and the draught repeated, and yet it is the most likely means, if any such there be; but I am of opinion that not even it will be of service. But if not reduced, nor any attempts at first made to reduce them, most of such cases recover. The leg and foot are to be arranged as the patient wishes, only they must not be put in a dependent position, nor moved about; and they are to be treated with pitched cerate, a few compresses dipped in wine, and not very cold, for cold in such cases induces convulsions; the leaves also of beet, or of colt’s foot, of any such, when boiled in dark-colored austere wine, form a suitable application to the wound and the surrounding parts; and the wound may further be anointed with cerate in a tepid state. But if it be the winter season, the part is to be covered with unscoured wool, which is to be sprinkled from above with tepid wine and oil, but on no account is either bandage or compress to be applied; for this should be known most especially, that whatever compresses, or is heavy, does mischief in such cases. And certain of the dressings used to recent wounds are suitable in such cases; and wool may be laid upon the sore, and sprinkled with wine, and allowed to remain for a considerable time; but those dressings for recent wounds which only last for a few days, and into which resin enters as an ingredient, do not agree with them; for the cleansing of the sores is a slow process, and the sore has a copious discharge for a long time. Certain of these cases it may be advantageous to bandage. It ought also to be well understood, that the patient must necessarily be much maimed and deformed, for the foot is retracted outward, and the bones which have been displaced outward protrude: these bones, in fact, not being generally laid bare, unless to a small extent; neither do they exfoliate, but they heal by thin and feeble cicatrices, provided the patient keeps quiet for a length of time; but otherwise there is danger that a small ulcer may remain incurable. And yet in the case we are treating of, those who are thus treated are saved; whereas, when the parts are reduced and allowed to remain in place, the patients die.

> Greek: 63. 63. Ὅσοισι δʼ ἂν κνήμης ὀστέα ἐξαρθρήσαντα καὶ ἕλκος ποιήσαντα τελείως ἐξίσχῃ κατὰ τὰ παρὰ τὸν πόδα ἄρθρα, εἴτε ἔσω ῤέψαντα, εἴτε μέντοι καὶ ἔξω, τὰ τοιαῦτα μὴ ἐμβάλλειν, ἀλλʼ ἐᾷν τὸν βουλόμενον τῶν ἰητρῶν ἐμβάλλειν. σαφέως γὰρ εἰδέναι χρὴ, ὅτι ἀποθανεῖται, ᾧ ἂν ἐμβληθέντα ἐμμείνῃ, καὶ ἡ ζωὴ δὲ ὀλιγήμερος τουτέοισι γενήσεται· ὀλίγοι γὰρ ἂν αὐτέων τὰς ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας ὑπερβάλλοιεν· σπασμὸς γὰρ ὁ κτείνων ἐστίν· ἀτὰρ καὶ γαγγραινοῦσθαι ἱκνέεται τὴν κνήμην καὶ τὸν πόδα. ταῦτα βεβαίως εἰδέναι χρὴ οὕτως ἐσόμενα· καὶ οὐκ ἄν μοι δοκέει οὐδὲ ἐλλέβορος ὠφελήσειν, αὐθημερόν τε δοθεὶς, καὶ αὖθις πινόμενος, ἄγχιστα δὲ, εἴπερ τι τοιοῦτον· οὐ μέντοι γε οὐδὲ τοῦτο δοκέω. ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐμβληθῇ, μηδʼ ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς μηδεὶς πειρηθῇ ἐμβάλλειν, περιγίνονται οἱ πλεῖστοι αὐτέων. χρὴ δὲ ἡρμόσθαι μὲν τὴν κνήμην καὶ τὸν πόδα οὕτως, ὡς αὐτὸς ἐθέλει, μοῦνον δὲ, μὴ ἀπῃωρημένα, μηδὲ κινεύμενα ἔστω· ἰητρεύειν δὲ πισσηρῇ καὶ σπλήνεσιν οἰνηροῖσιν, ὀλίγοισι, μὴ ἄγαν ψυχροῖσι, ψῦχος γὰρ ἐν τοῖσι τοιούτοισι σπασμὸν ἐπικαλέεται· ἐπιτήδεια δὲ καὶ φύλλα σεύτλων, ἢ βηχίου, ἢ ἄλλου τινὸς τῶν τοιουτέων, ἐν οἴνῳ μέλανι αὐστηρῷ ἡμίεφθα ἐπιτιθέντα ἰητρεύειν ἐπί τε τὸ ἕλκος, ἐπί τε τὰ περιέχοντα, κηρωτῇ δὲ χλιερῇ ἐπιχρίειν αὐτὸ τὸ ἕλκος· ἢν δὲ ἡ ὥρη χειμερινὴ ἔῃ, καὶ ἔρια ῤυπαρὰ οἴνῳ καὶ ἐλαίῳ καταῤῥαίνοντα χλιεροῖσιν ἄνωθεν ἐπιτέγγειν· καταδεῖν δὲ μηδὲν μηδενὶ, μηδε περιπλάσσειν· εὖ γὰρ εἰδέναι χρὴ, ὅτι πίεξις καὶ ἀχθοφορίη πᾶν κακὸν τοῖσι τοιούτοισίν ἐστιν. ἐπιτήδεια δὲ πρὸς τὰ τοιαῦτα καὶ τῶν ἐναίμων μετεξέτερα, ὅσοισιν αὐτῶν ξυμφέρει· ἔρια δὲ ἐπιτιθέντα, οἴνῳ ἐπιτέγγοντα, πουλὺν χρόνον ἐᾷν· τὰ δὲ ὀλιγημερώτατα τῶν ἐναίμων, καὶ ὅσα ῤητίνῃ προσκαταλαμβάνεται, οὐχ ὁμοίως ἐπιτήδεια ἐκείνοισίν ἐστιν· χρονίη γὰρ ἡ κάθαρσις τῶν ἑλκέων γίνεται τούτων· πουλὺν γὰρ χρόνον πλαδαρὴ γίνεται· τινὰς δὲ τούτων ἀγαθὸν ἐπιδέειν. εἰδέναι μὲν δή που σάφα χρὴ, ὅτι ἀνάγκη τὸν ἄνθρωπον χωλὸν αἰσχρῶς γενέσθαι· καὶ γὰρ ὁ ποὺς ἐς τὸ ἄνω ἀνέσπασται τῶν τοιούτων, καὶ τὰ ὀστέα τὰ διολισθήσαντα ἔξω ἐξέχοντα φαίνεται· οὔτε γὰρ ψιλοῦται τῶν τοιούτων ὀστέων οὐδὲν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πουλὺ, εἰ μὴ κατὰ βραχύ τι, οὔτε ἀφίσταται, ἀλλὰ περιωτειλοῦται λεπτῇσιν ὠτειλῇσι καὶ ἀσθενέσι, καὶ ταῦτα, ἢν ἀτρεμίζωσι πουλὺν χρόνον· ἢν δὲ μὴ, ἑλκύδριον ἐγκαταλειφθῆναι κίνδυνος ἀναλθές. ὅμως δὲ, περὶ οὗ ὁ λόγος, οὕτω μὲν ἰητρευόμενοι σώζονται, ἐμβληθέντος δὲ τοῦ ἄρθρου καὶ ἐμμείναντος, ἀποθνήσκουσιν.

[¶7] 64. The same rule applies to dislocations at the wrist, attended with a wound and projection of the bone, whether the bones of the arm be displaced inward or outward. For this should be well understood, that the patient will die in the course of a few days, by the same mode of death as formerly described, if the bone be reduced, and allowed to remain so. But in those cases in which they are not reduced, nor any attempt made to reduce them, the patients, for the most part, recover; and the same mode of treatment as has been described will be applicable; but the deformity and impediment of the limb must necessarily be great, and the fingers of the hand will be weak and useless; for if the bones have slipped inward, they cannot bend the fingers, or if outward, they cannot extend them.

> Greek: 64. 64. ωὑτὸς δὲ λόγος οὗτος, ἢν καὶ τὰ τοῦ πήχεος ὀστέα τὰ παρὰ τὸν καρπὸν τῆς χειρὸς ἕλκος ποιήσαντα ἐξίσχῃ, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος τῆς χειρὸς, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἔξω. σάφα γὰρ ἐπίστασθαι χρὴ, ὅτι ἀποθανεῖται ἐν ὀλίγῃσιν ἡμέρῃσι τοιούτῳ θανάτῳ, οἵῳπερ καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται, ὅτῳ ἂν ἐμβληθέντα τὰ ὀστέα ἐμμείνῃ. οἷσι δʼ ἂν μὴ ἐμβληθῇ, μηδὲ πειρηθῇ ἐμβάλλεσθαι, οὗτοι πολὺ πλείονες περιγίνονται· ἰητρείη δὲ τοιαύτη τοῖσι τοιουτέοισιν ἐπιτηδείη, οἵηπερ εἴρηται· τὸ δὲ σχῆμα αἰσχρὸν τοῦ χωλώματος ἀνάγκη εἶναι, καὶ τοὺς δακτύλους τῆς χειρὸς ἀσθενέας καὶ ἀχρηΐους· ἢν μὲν γὰρ ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος ὀλίσθῃ τὰ ὀστέα, ξυγκάμπτειν οὐ δύνανται τοὺς δακτύλους· ἢν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος, ἐκτανύειν οὐ δύνανται.

[¶8] 65. When the os tibiae, having made a wound at the knee, has protruded through the skin, whether the dislocation be outward or inward, in such a case, if the bone be reduced, death will be even more speedy than in the other cases, although speedy also in them. But the only hope of recovery is if you treat them without reduction. These cases are more dangerous than the others, as being so much higher up, as being so much stronger joints, and displaced from bones which are so much stronger. But if the os femoris form a wound at the knee, and slip through it, provided it be reduced and left so, it will occasion a still more violent and speedy death than in the cases formerly described; but if not reduced, it will be much more dangerous than those cases mentioned before, and yet this is the only hope of recovery.

> Greek: 65. 65. Ὅσοισι δʼ ἂν κνήμης ὀστέον, ἕλκος ποιησάμενον παρὰ τὸ γόνυ, ἔξω ἐξίσχῃ, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἔσω, τούτοισιν ἢν μέν τις ἐμβάλῃ, ἔτι ἑτοιμότερος ὁ θάνατός ἐστιν, ἤπερ τοῖσιν ἑτέροισι, καίπερ κἀκείνοισιν ἕτοιμος ἐών. ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐμβαλὼν ἰητρεύῃς, ἐλπίδες μὲν σωτηρίης οὕτω μόνως εἰσίν. κινδυνωδέστερα δὲ ταῦτα τῶν ἑτέρων γίνεται, ὅσῳ ἂν ἀνωτέρω, καὶ ὅσῳ ἂν ἰσχυρότερα ἔῃ, καὶ ἀπὸ ἰσχυροτέρων ὠλισθήκῃ. ἢν δὲ τὸ ὀστέον τὸ τοῦ μηροῦ τὸ πρὸς τοῦ γόνατος ἕλκος ποιησάμενον ἐξολίσθῃ, ἐμβληθὲν μὲν καὶ ἐμμεῖναν, ἔτι βιαιότερον καὶ θᾶσσον τὸν θάνατον ποιήσει τῶν πρόσθεν εἰρημένων· μὴ ἐμβληθὲν δὲ, πουλὺ κινδυνωδέστερον, ἢ τὰ πρόσθεν· ὅμως δὲ μούνη ἐλπὶς αὕτη σωτηρίης.

[¶9] 66. The same rule applies to the elbow-joint, and with regard to the bones of the fore-arm and arm. For when these bones protrude through a wound which they have made in the skin, all cases in which they are reduced prove fatal; but if not reduced, there is a chance of recovery; but to those that survive there is certain impediment. And if in any instance the bones of the upper articulations (shoulder-joint?), should be dislocated, and project through a wound which they have made in the skin, these, if reduced, are followed by more speedy death; and if not reduced, they are more dangerous than the others. But the mode of treatment which appears to me most suitable has been already described.

> Greek: 66. 66. ωὑτὸς δὲ λόγος καὶ περὶ τῶν κατὰ τὸν ἀγκῶνα ἄρθρων, καὶ περὶ τῶν τοῦ πήχεος καὶ βραχίονος· ἃ γὰρ ἂν τούτων ἐξαρθρήσαντα ἐξίσχῃ ἕλκος ποιησάμενα, πάντα, ἢν ἐμβληθῇ, θάνατον φέρει, μὴ ἐμβληθέντα δὲ, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίης· χώλωσις δὲ ἑτοίμη· τοῖσι περιγενομένοισιν. Θανατωδέστερα δὲ τοῖσιν ἐμβαλλομένοισίν. ἐστι τὰ ἀνωτέρω τῶν ἄρθρων, ἀτὰρ καὶ τοῖσι μὴ ἐμβαλλομένοισι κινδυνωδέστερα αὐτὰ ταῦτα. εἰ δέ τινι τὰ ἀνώτατα ἄρθρα ἐξαρθρήσαντα, ἕλκος ποιήσαντα, ἐξίσχοι, ταῦτα ἂν ἔτι καὶ ἐμβαλλόμενα ταχυθανατώτατα εἴη, καὶ μὴ ἐμβαλλόμενα κινδυνωδέστατα· ἰητρείη δὲ ἤδη εἴρηται, οἵη τις ἐμοὶ δοκέει ἐπιτηδειοτάτη εἶναι τῶν τοιουτέων.

[¶10] 67. When the joints of the toes or hands are dislocated, and the bones protrude through a wound which they have made, and when there is no fracture of the bone, but merely displacement of the joint, in these cases, if the reduction be made and allowed to remain, there is some danger of spasms (tetanus?) if not properly treated, and yet it may be worth while to reduce them, having warned the patient beforehand that much caution and care will be required. The easiest, the most efficient method, and the one most conformable to art, is that by the lever, as formerly described when treating of bones which have been fractured and protruded; then the patient must be as quiet as possible, lie in a recumbent position, and observe a restricted regimen. And it will be better also that he should get some gentle emetics. The sore is to be treated with dressings for fresh wounds, which permit of allusions, or with the leaves of camomile, or with the applications for fractured bones of the head, but nothing very cold must be applied. The first (most distant?) joints are least dangerous, but those still higher, are more so. Reduction should be made the same day, or the next, but by no means on the third or fourth, for it is on the fourth day that exacerbations especially attack. In those cases, then, where immediate reduction cannot be accomplished, we must wait until after the aforesaid days; for whatever you reduce within ten days, may be expected to induce spasm. But if the spasm supervene on its being reduced, the joint should be quickly displaced, and bathed frequently with warm water, and the whole body should be kept in a warm, soft, and easy condition, and more especially about the joints, for the whole body should rather be in a bent than in an extended state. Moreover, it is to be expected, that the articular extremities of the bones of the fingers will for this generally happens, if even the least degree of inflammation take place, so that if it were not that the physician would be exposed to censure, owing to the ignorance of the common people, no reduction should be made at all. The reduction of the bones of joints which have protruded through the skin, is attended with the dangers which have been described.

> Greek: 67. 67. Ὅσοισι δὲ ἄρθρα δακτύλων, ἢ ποδὸς ἢ χειρὸς, ἐξαρθρήσαντα, ἕλκος ποιήσαντα, ἐξέσχε, μὴ κατεηγότος τοῦ ὀστέου, ἀλλὰ κατʼ αὐτὴν τὴν ξύμφυσιν ἀποσπασθέντος, τούτοισιν ἢν ἐμβληθέντα ἐμμείνῃ, ἔνι μέν τις κίνδυνος σπασμοῦ, ἢν μὴ χρηστῶς ἰητρεύωνται· ὅμως δέ τι ἄξιον ἐμβάλλειν, προειπόντα ὅτι φυλακῆς πολλῆς καὶ μελέτης δέεται. ἐμβάλλειν μέντοι ῤήιστον καὶ δυνατώτατον καὶ τεχνικώτατόν ἐστι τῷ μοχλίσκῳ, ὥσπερ καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται ἐν τοῖσι καταγνυμένοισι καὶ ἐξίσχουσιν ὀστέοισιν· ἔπειτα ἀτρεμέειν ὡς μάλιστα χρὴ, καὶ κατακεῖσθαι, καὶ ὀλιγοσιτέειν· ἄμεινον δὲ καὶ φαρμακεῦσαι ἄνω κούφῳ τινὶ φαρμάκῳ· τὸ δὲ ἕλκος, ἰητρεύειν μὲν ἢ ἐναίμοισι τοῖσιν ἐπιτέγκτοισιν, ἢ πολυοφθάλμοισιν, ἢ οἷσι κεφαλῆς ὀστέα κατεηγότα ἰητρεύεται, κατάψυχρον δὲ κάρτα μηδὲν προσφέρειν. ἥκιστα μὲν οὖν τὰ πρῶτα ἄρθρα κινδυνώδεά ἐστι, τὰ δὲ ἔτι ἀνωτέρω κινδυνωδέστερα. ἐμβάλλειν δὲ χρὴ αὐθημερὸν, ἢ τῇ ὑστεραίῃ, τριταίῳ δὲ ἢ τεταρταίῳ ἥκιστα· τεταρταῖα γὰρ ἐόντα, ἐπισημαίνει τῇσι παλιγκοτίῃσι μάλιστα. οἷσιν ἂν οὖν μὴ αὐτίκα ἐγγένηται ἐμβάλλειν, ὑπερβαίνειν χρὴ ταύτας τὰς εἰρημένας ἡμέρας· ὅ τι γὰρ ἂν ἔσω δέκα ἡμερέων ἐμβάλλῃς, σπᾷν καταληπτέον. ἢν δὲ ἄρα ἐμβεβλημένῳ σπασμὸς ἐπιγένηται, ἐκβάλλειν τὸ ἄρθρον δεῖ ταχὺ, καὶ θερμῷ τέγγειν ὡς πλειστάκις, καὶ τὸ ὅλον σῶμα θερμῶς καὶ λιπαρῶς καὶ μαλθακῶς ἔχειν, καὶ μάλιστα κατὰ τὰ ἄρθρα· κεκάμφθαι δὲ μᾶλλον ἢ ἐκτετάσθαι πᾶν τὸ σῶμα χρή. προσδέχεσθαι μέντοι χρὴ κατὰ τοὺς δακτύλους τὰ ἄρθρα τὰ ἐμβαλλόμενα ἀποστατικὰ ἔσεσθαι· τὰ γὰρ πλεῖστα οὕτω γίνεται, ἢν καὶ ὁτιοῦν φλεγμονῆς ὑπογένηται, ὡς, εἰ μὴ διʼ ἀμαθίην τῶν δημοτέων ἐν αἰτίῃ ἔμελλεν ὁ ἰητρὸς ἔσεσθαι, οὐδὲν ἂν πάντως οὐδʼ ἐμβάλλειν ἔδει. τὰ μὲν οὖν κατὰ τὰ ἄρθρα ὀστέα ἐξίσχοντα ἐμβαλλόμενα οὕτω κινδυνώδεά ἐστιν, ὡς εἴρηται.

[¶11] 68. When the articular bones of the fingers are fairly chopped off, these cases are mostly unattended with danger, unless deliquium come on in consequence of the injury, and ordinary treatment will be sufficient to such sores. But when resection is made, not at the articulations, but at some other point in the bones, these cases also are free from danger, and are still more easily cured than the others; and the fractured bones of the fingers which protrude otherwise than at the joint admit of reduction without danger. Complete resections of bones at the joints, whether the foot, the hand, the leg, the ankle, the forearm, the wrist, for the most part, are not unattended with danger, unless one be cut off at once by deliquium animi, or if continual fever supervene on the fourth day.

> Greek: 68. 68. ὅσα δὲ κατὰ τὰ ἄρθρα τὰ κατὰ τοὺς δακτύλους ἀποκόπτεται τελείως, ταῦτα ἀσινέα τὰ πλεῖστά ἐστιν, εἰ μή τις ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ τρώσει λειποθυμήσας βλαβείη· καὶ ἰητρείη φαύλη ἀρκέσει τῶν τοιούτων ἑλκέων. ἀτὰρ καὶ ὅσα μὴ κατὰ τὰ ἄρθρα, ἀλλὰ κατʼ ἄλλην τινὰ ἴξιν τῶν ὀστέων ἀποκόπτεται, καὶ ταῦτα ἀσινέα ἐστὶ, καὶ ἔτι εὐαλθέστερα τῶν ἑτέρων· καὶ ὅσα κατὰ τοὺς δακτύλους ὀστέα κατεηγότα ἐξίσχει μὴ κατὰ τὸ ἄρθρον, καὶ ταῦτα ἀσινέα ἐστὶν ἐμβαλλόμενα. Ἀποκόψιες δὲ τέλειαι ὀστέων καὶ κατὰ τὰ ἄρθρα καὶ ἐν ποδὶ, καὶ ἐν χειρὶ, καὶ ἐν κνήμῃ, τοῖσι παρὰ τὰ σφυρὰ, καὶ ἐν πήχεϊ, τοῖσι παρὰ τοὺς καρποὺς, τοῖσι πλείστοισιν ἀποκοπτομένοισιν ἀσινέα γίνεται, ὅσα ἂν μὴ αὐτίκα λειποθυμίη ἀνατρέψῃ, ἢ τεταρταίοισιν ἐοῦσι πυρετὸς ξυνεχὴς ἐπιγένηται.

[¶12] 69. With regard to the sphacelus of fleshy parts, it takes place in wounds where there are large blood-vessels, which have been strongly compressed, and in fractures of bones which have been bound too tight, and in other cases of immoderate constriction, when the parts which have been strangulated generally drop off; and the most of such patients recover, even when a portion of the thigh comes away, or of the arm, both bones and flesh, but less so in this case; and when the fore-arm and leg drop off, the patients readily recover. In cases then, of fracture of the bones, when strangulation and blackening of the parts take place at first, the separation of the dead and living parts quickly occurs, and the parts speedily drop off, as the bones have already given way; but when the blackening (mortification) takes place while the bones are entire, the fleshy parts, in this case, also quickly die, but the bones are slow in separating at the boundary of the blackening, and where the bones are laid bare. Those parts of the body which are below the boundaries of the blackening are to be removed at the joint, as soon as they are fairly dead and have lost their sensibility; care being taken not to wound any living part; for if the part which is cut off give pain, and if it prove not to be quite dead, there is great danger lest the patient may swoon away from the pain, and such swoonings often are immediately fatal. I have known the thigh-bones, when denuded in this manner, drop off on the eightieth day; but in the case of this patient, the parts below were separated at the knee on the twentieth day, and, as I thought, too early, for it appeared to me that this should be done more guardedly. In a case which I had of such blackening in the leg, the bones of the leg, as far as they were denuded, separated at its middle on the sixtieth day. But the separation of denuded bones is quicker or slower, according to the mode of treatment; something, too, depends upon whether the compression be stronger or weaker, and whether the nerves, flesh, arteries, and veins are quicker or slower in becoming blackened and in dying; since, when the parts are not strongly compressed, the separation is more superficial, and does not go the length of laying the bones bare, and in some cases it is still more superficial, so as not even to expose the nerves. For the reasons now stated, it is impossible to define accurately the time at which each of these cases will terminate. The treatment of such cases, however, is to be readily undertaken, for they are more formidable to look at than to treat; and a mild treatment is sufficient in all such cases, for they come to a crisis of themselves; only the diet must be attended to, so that it may be as little calculated to create fever as possible, and the body is to be placed in the proper positions: these are, neither raised very high up, nor inclined much downward, but rather upward, until the separation be completed; for at that time there is most danger of hemorrhage; on this account, wounds should not be laid in a declining position, but the contrary. But after a while, and when the sores have become clean, the same positions will no longer be appropriate; but a straight position, and one inclining downward, may be proper; and in the course of time, in some of these cases, abscesses form, and require bandages. One may also expect that such patients will be attacked with dysentery; for dysentery usually supervenes in cases of mortification and of hemorrhage from wounds; it comes on generally when the blackening and hemorrhage have arrived at a crisis, and is profuse and intense, but does not last many days; neither is it of a fatal nature, for such patients do not usually lose their appetite, nor is it proper to put them on a restricted diet.

> Greek: 69. 69. Ἀποσφακελίσιες μέντοι σαρκῶν, καὶ ἐν τρώμασιν αἱμοῤῥόοισι γενομένοισιν ἀποσφιγχθεῖσιν ἰσχυρῶς, καὶ ἐν ὀστέων κατήγμασι πιεχθεῖσι μᾶλλον τοῦ καιροῦ, καὶ ἐν ἄλλοισι δεσμοῖσι βιαίοισιν ἀποληφθέντα ἀποπίπτει πολλοῖσι, καὶ οἱ πολλοὶ περιγίνονται τῶν τοιούτων, καὶ οἷσι μηροῦ μέρος τι ἀποπίπτει, καὶ τῶν σαρκῶν καὶ τοῦ ὀστέου, καὶ οἷσι βραχίονος, ἧσσον δέ· πήχεός τε καὶ κνήμης ἀποπεσούσης, καὶ ἔτι εὐφόρως περιγίνονται. οἷσι μὲν οὖν, κατεαγέντων τῶν ὀστέων, ἀποσφίγξιες αὐτίκα ἐγένοντο καὶ μελασμοὶ, τούτοισι μὲν ταχεῖαι αἱ περιῤῥήξιες γίνονται τοῦ σώματος, καὶ τὰ ἀποπίπτοντα ταχέως ἀποπίπτει, ἥδη τῶν ὀστέων προενδεδωκότων· οἷσι δὲ, ὑγιέων ἐόντων τῶν ὀστέων, οἱ μελασμοὶ γίνονται, αἱ μὲν σάρκες ταχέως θνήσκουσι καὶ τούτοισι, τὰ δὲ ὀστέα βραδέως ἀφίσταται, ᾗ ἂν τὰ ὅρια τοῦ μελασμοῦ γένηται καὶ ἡ ψίλωσις τοῦ ὀστέου. χρὴ δὲ, ὅσα ἂν κατωτέρω τοῦ σώματος τῶν ὁρίων τοῦ μελασμοῦ ἔῃ, ταῦτα, ὅταν ἤδη πάμπαν τεθνήκῃ καὶ ἀναλγέα ἔῃ, ἀφαιρέειν κατὰ τὸ ἄρθρον, προμηθεόμενον ὅκως μὴ τιτρώσκῃ· ἢν γὰρ ὀδυνηθῇ ἀποταμνόμενος, καὶ μήπω κυρήσῃ τὸ σῶμα τεθνεὸς ταύτῃ, ἧ ἀποτέμνεται, κάρτα κίνδυνος ὑπὸ τῆς ὀδύνης λειποθυμῆσαι· αἱ δὲ τοιαῦται λειποθυμίαι πολλοὺς παραχρῆμα ἤδη ἀπώλεσαν. μηροῦ μὲν οὖν ὀστέον, ψιλωθὲν ἐκ τοιούτου τρόπου, ὀγδοηκοσταῖον εἶδον ἐγὼ ἀποστάν· ἡ μέντοι κνήμη τούτῳ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ κατὰ τὸ γόνυ ἀφῃρέθη εἰκοσταίη, ἐδόκεε δέ μοι καὶ ἐγγυτέρω· οὐ γὰρ ἅμα, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸ προμηθέστερον ἔδοξέ μοί τι ποιέειν. κνήμης δὲ ὀστέα ἐκ τοιούτου μελασμοῦ, μάλα κατὰ μέσην τὴν κνήμην ἐόντα, ἑξηκοσταῖά μοι ἀπέπεσεν, ὅσα ἐψιλώθη αὐτέων. διενέγκοι μὲν γὰρ ἄν τι καὶ ἰητρείη ἰητρείης ἐς τὸ θᾶσσόν τε καὶ βραδύτερον τὰ ὀστέα ψιλούμενα ἀποπίπτειν· διενέγκοι δʼ ἄν τι καὶ πίεξις πιέξιος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ ἰσχυρότερόν τε καὶ ἀσθενέστερον, καὶ ἐς τὸ θᾶσσόν τε καὶ βραδύτερον ἀπομελανθέντα ἀποθανεῖν τὰ νεῦρα καὶ τὰς σάρκας καὶ τὰς ἀρτηρίας καὶ τὰς φλέβας· ἐπεὶ ὅσα μὴ ἰσχυρῶς ἀποληφθέντων θνήσκει, ἔνια τῶν τοιουτέων οὐκ ἀφικνέεται ἐς ὀστέων ψιλώματα, ἀλλʼ ἐπιπολαιότερα ἐκπίπτει· ἔνια δὲ οὐδὲ ἐς νεύρων ψιλώματα ἀφικνεῖται, ἀλλὰ ἐπιπολαιότερα ἐκπίπτει. διὰ οὖν ταύτας τὰς εἰρημένας προφάσιας οὐκ ἐστὶν ἓν οὔνομα ἀριθμοῦ τῷ χρόνῳ θέσθαι, ἐν ὁκόσῳ ἕκαστα τούτων κρίνεται. προσδέχεσθαι δὲ μάλα χρὴ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἰήματα· ἐσιδέειν γὰρ φοβερώτερά ἐστιν, ἢ ἰητρεύειν· καὶ ἰητρείη πραείη ἀρκέει πᾶσι τοιούτοισιν· αὐτὰ γὰρ ἑωυτὰ κρίνει μοῦνον· τῆς δὲ διαίτης ἐπιμελέεσθαι χρὴ, ὡς κατὰ δύναμιν ἀπύρετος ἔῃ, καὶ ἐν σχήμασι δικαίοισιν εὐθετίζειν τὸ σῶμα· δίκαια δὲ ταῦτα, μηδὲ μετέωρον ποιέειν, μηδὲ ἐς τὸ κάτω ῤέπον, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ἐς τὸ ἄνω, ποτὶ καὶ ἔστʼ ἂν τελείως περιῤῥαγῇ· αἱμοῤῥαγιέων γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ κίνδυνος· διὰ τοῦτο οὖν οὐ χρὴ κατάῤῥοπα τὰ τρώματα ποιέειν, ἀλλὰ τἀναντία. ἐπεὶ ὅταν γε χρόνος ἐγγένηται πλείων, καὶ καθαρὰ τὰ ἕλκεα γένηται, οὐκ ἔτι τὰ αὐτὰ σχήματα ἐπιτήδειά ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ ἡ εὐθεῖα θέσις, καὶ ἐνίοτε ἐπὶ τὸ κατάῤῥοπον ῤέποντα· ἀνὰ χρόνον γὰρ ἐνίοισι τουτέων ἀποστάσιες πύου γίνονται, καὶ ὑποδεσμίδων δέονται. προσδέχεσθαι δὲ χρὴ τοὺς τοιούτους ἀνὰ χρόνον ὑπὸ δυσεντερίης πιέζεσθαι· καὶ γὰρ ἐπὶ τοῖσι μελαινομένοισι τοῖσι πλείστοισιν ἐπιγίνεται δυσεντερίη, καὶ ἐπὶ τῇσιν αἱμοῤῥαγίῃσιν ἐξ ἑλκέων· ἐπιγίνεται δὲ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ, κεκριμένων ἤδη τῶν μελασμῶν καὶ τῆς αἱμοῤῥαγίης, καὶ ὁρμᾶται μὲν λαύρως καὶ ἰσχυρῶς· ἀτὰρ οὔτε πολυήμερος γίνεται, οὔτε θανατώδης· οὔτε γὰρ μάλα ἀπόσιτοι γίνονται οἱ τοιοῦτοι, οὔτε ἄλλως ξυμφέρει κενεαγγέειν.

## 6. Sections 70–87

Source: https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/6/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/hippocrates-on-the-articulations/6/#p-N

[¶0] 70. Dislocation inward at the hip-joint is to be reduced in the following manner: (it is a good, proper, and natural mode of reduction, and has something of display in it, if any one takes delight in such ostentatious modes of procedure). The patient is to be suspended by the feet from a cross-beam with a strong, soft, and broad cord; the feet are to be about four inches or less from one another; and a broad and soft leather collar connected with the cross-beam is to be put on above the knees; and the affected leg should be so extended as to moved be two inches longer than the other; the head should be about two cubits from the ground, or a little more or less; and the arms should be stretched along the sides, and bound with something soft; all these preparations should be made while he is lying on his back, so that he may be suspended for as short a time as possible. But when the patient is suspended, a person properly instructed and not weak, having introduced his arm between his thighs, is to place his fore-arm between the perineum and the dislocated head of the os femoris; and then, having joined the other hand to the one thus passed through the thighs, he is to stand by the side of the suspended patient, and suddenly suspend and swing himself in the air as perpendicularly as possible. This method comprises all the conditions which are natural; for the body being suspended by its weight, produces extension, and the person suspended from him, along with the extension, forces the head of the thigh-bone to rise up above the acetabulum; and at the same time he uses the bone of the fore-arm as a lever, and forces the os femoris to slip into its old seat. The cords should be properly prepared, and care should be taken that the person suspended along with the patient have a sufficiently strong hold.

> Greek: 70. 70. μηροῦ δὲ ὀλίσθημα κατʼ ἰσχίον ὧδε χρὴ ἐμβάλλειν, ἢν ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος ὠλισθήκῃ· ἀγαθὴ μὲν ἥδε καὶ δικαίη καὶ κατὰ φύσιν ἡ ἐμβολὴ, καὶ δή τι καὶ ἀγωνιστικὸν ἔχουσα, ὅστις γε τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν ἥδεται κομψευόμενος. κρεμάσαι χρὴ τὸν ἄνθρωπον τῶν ποδῶν πρὸς μεσόδμην δεσμῷ δυνατῷ μὲν, μαλθακῷ δὲ καὶ πλάτος ἔχοντι· τοὺς δὲ πόδας διέχειν χρὴ, ὅσον τέσσαρας δακτύλους ἀπʼ ἀλλήλων, ἢ καὶ ἔλασσον· χρὴ δὲ καὶ ἐπάνωθεν τῶν ἐπιγουνίδων προσπεριβεβλῆσθαι πλαῖ ἱμάντι καὶ μαλθακῷ, ἀνατείνοντι ἐς τὴν μεσόδμην· τὸ δὲ σκέλος τὸ σιναρὸν ἐντετάσθαι χρὴ ὡς δύο δακτύλους μᾶλλον τοῦ ἑτέρου· ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς γῆς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀπεχέτω ὡς δύο πήχεας, ἢ ὀλίγῳ πλέον, ἢ ἔλασσον· τὰς δὲ χεῖρας παρατεταμένας παρὰ τὰς πλευρὰς προσδεδεμένος ἔστω μαλθακῷ τινι· πάντα δὲ ταῦτα ὑπτίῳ κατακειμένῳ κατασκευασθήτω, ὡς ὅτι ἐλάχιστον χρόνον κρέμηται. ὅταν δὲ κρεμασθῇ, ἄνδρα χρὴ εὐπαίδευτον καὶ μὴ ἀσθενέα, ἐνείραντα τὸν πῆχυν μεσηγὺ τῶν μηρῶν, εἶτα θέσθαι τὸν πῆχυν μεσηγὺ τοῦ περινέου καὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ τῆς ἐξεστηκυίης, ἔπειτα ξυνάψαντα τὴν ἑτέρην χεῖρα πρὸς τὴν διῃρμένην, παραστάντα ὀρθὸν παρὰ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ κρεμαμένου, ἐξαπίνης ἐκκρεμασθέντα, μετέωρον αἰωρηθῆναι ὡς ἰσοῤῥοπώτατον. αὕτη δὲ ἡ ἐμβολὴ παρέχεται πάντα, ὅσα χρὴ κατὰ φύσιν· αὐτό τε γὰρ τὸ σῶμα, κρεμάμενον, τῷ ἑωυτοῦ βάρεϊ κατάτασιν ποιέεται, ὅ τε ἐκκρεμασθεὶς ἅμα μὲν τῇ κατατάσει ἀναγκάζει ὑπεραιωρέεσθαι τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ ὑπὲρ τῆς κοτύλης, ἅμα δὲ τῷ ὀστέῳ τοῦ πήχεος ἀπομοχλεύει καὶ ἀναγκάζει ἐς τὴν ἀρχαίην φύσιν ὀλισθάνειν. χρὴ δὲ παγκάλως μὲν τοῖσι δεσμοῖσιν ἐσκευάσθαι, φρονέοντα δὲ καὶ ὡς ἐχυρώτατον τὸν ἐξαιωρούμενον εἶναι.

[¶1] 71. Wherefore, as formerly stated, men’s constitutions differ much from one another as to the facility or difficulty with which dislocations are reduced; and the cause of this was also stated formerly in treating of the shoulder. In some the thigh is reduced with no preparation, with slight extension, directed by the hands, and with slight movement; and in some the reduction is effected by bending the limb at the joint, and making rotation. But much more frequently it does not yield to any ordinary apparatus, and therefore one should be acquainted with the most powerful means which can be applied in each case, and use whatever maybe judged most proper under all circumstances. The modes of extension have been described in the former parts of the work, so that one may make use of whatever may happen to be at hand. For, extension and counter-extension are to be made in the direction of the limb and the body; and if this be properly effected, the head of the thigh-bone will be raised above its ancient seat; and if thus raised, it will not be easy to prevent it from settling in its place, so that any ordinary impulse with the lever and adjustment will be quite sufficient; but some apply insufficient extension, and hence the reduction gives much trouble. The bands then should be fastened, not only at the foot, but also above the knee, so that the force of the extension may not be expended on the knee-joint more than upon the hip-joint. The extension in the direction of the foot is to be thus contrived. But the counter-extension is not only to be managed by means of something carried round the chest and armpits, but also by a long, double, strong, and supple thong applied to the perineum, and carried behind along the spine, and in front along the collar-bone and fixed to the point from which counter-extension is made; and then force is to be so applied, by means of this extension and counter-extension, that the thong at the perineum may not pass over the head of the thigh-bone, but between it and the perineum; and during the extension one should strike the head of the femur with the fist, so as to drive it outward. And when the patient is raised up by the stretching, you should pass a hand through (between the legs?) and grasp it with the other hand, so as at the same time to make extension, and force the dislocated limb outward; while some other person sitting by the knee quietly directs it inward.

> Greek: 71. 71. ὡς μὲν οὖν καὶ πρόσθεν εἴρηται, μέγα τὸ διαφέρον ἐστὶ τῶν φυσίων τοῖσιν ἀνθρώποισιν ἐς τὸ εὐέμβλητα εἶναι, καὶ δυσέμβλητα· καὶ διότι μέγα διαφέρει, εἴρηται πρόσθεν ἐν τοῖσι περὶ ὤμου. ἐνίοισι γὰρ ὁ μηρὸς ἐμπίπτει ἀπʼ οὐδεμιῆς παρασκευῆς, ἀλλʼ ὀλίγης μὲν κατατάσιος, ὅσον τῇσι χερσὶ κατιθῦναι, βραχείης δὲ κιγκλίσιος· πολλοῖσι δὲ ξυγκάμψασι τὸ σκέλος κατὰ τὸ ἄρθρον, ἐνέπεσεν, ἤδη ἀμφίσφαλσιν ποιησάμενον. ἀλλὰ γὰρ τὰ πουλὺ πλείω οὐκ ἐνακούει τῆς τυχούσης παρασκευῆς· διὰ τοῦτο ἐπίστασθαι μὲν χρὴ τὰ κράτιστα περὶ ἑκάστου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ τέχνῃ· χρέεσθαι δὲ, οἷσιν ἂν δόξῃ ἑκάστοτε. εἴρηνται μὲν οὖν τρόποι κατατασίων καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἔμπροσθεν γεγραμμένοισιν, ὥστε χρέεσθαι τούτων, ὅστις ἂν παρατύχῃ. δεῖ γὰρ ἀντικατατετάσθαι ἰσχυρῶς, ἐπὶ θάτερα μὲν τοῦ σκέλεος, ἐπὶ θάτερα δὲ τοῦ σώματος· ἢν γὰρ εὖ καταταθῇ, ὑπεραιωρηθήσεται ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ ὑπὲρ τῆς ἀρχαίης ἕδρης· καὶ ἢν μὲν ὑπεραιωρηθῇ οὕτως, οὐδὲ κωλύσαι ἔτι ῤηΐδιον ἵζεσθαι αὐτὴν ἐς τὴν ἑωυτῆς ἕδρην, ὥστε ἤδη πᾶσα ἀρκέει μόχλευσίς τε καὶ κατόρθωσις· ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐλλείπουσιν ἐν τῇ κατατάσει· διὰ τοῦτο ὄχλον πλείω παρέχει ἡ ἐμβολή. χρὴ οὖν οὐ μόνον παρὰ τὸν πόδα τὰ δεσμὰ ἐξηρτῆσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄνωθεν τοῦ γούνατος, ὅκως μὴ κατὰ τὸ τοῦ γούνατος ἄρθρον ἐν τῇ τανύσει ἡ ἐπίδεσις ἔῃ μᾶλλον, ἢ κατὰ τὸ τοῦ ἰσχίου ἄρθρον. οὕτω μὲν οὖν χρὴ τὴν κατάτασιν, τὴν πρὸς τὸ τοῦ ποδὸς μέρος, ἐσκευάσθαι· ἀτὰρ καὶ τὴν ἐπὶ θάτερα κατάτασιν, μὴ μοῦνον ἐκ τῆς περὶ τὸ στῆθος καὶ τὰς μασχάλας περιβολῆς ἀντιτείνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἱμάντι μακρῷ, διπτύχῳ, ἰσχυρῷ, προσηνεῖ, παρὰ τὸν περίνεον βεβλημένῳ, παρατεταμένῳ ἐπὶ μὲν τὰ ὄπισθεν παρὰ τὴν ῤάχιν, ἐπὶ δὲ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν παρὰ τὴν κληῗδα, προσηρτημένῳ πρὸς τὴν ἀρχὴν τὴν ἀκτικατατείνουσαν, οὕτω διαναγκάζεσθαι, τοῖσι μὲν ἔνθα διατεινομένοισι, τοῖσι δὲ ἔνθα, ὅκως δὲ ὁ ἱμὰς ὁ παρὰ τὸν περίνεον μὴ περὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ παρατεταμένος ἔσται, ἀλλὰ μεσηγὺ τῆς κεφαλῆς καὶ τοῦ περινέου· ἐν δὲ τῇ κατάτασει, κατὰ μὲν τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ ἐρείσας τὴν πυγμὴν, ἐς τὸ ἔξω ὠθεέτω· ἢν δὲ μετεωρίζηται ἑλκόμενος, διέρσας τὴν χεῖρα καὶ ἐπιξυνάψας τῇ ἑτέρῃ χειρὶ, ἅμα μὲν συγκατατεινέτω, ἅμα δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔξω ξυναναγκαζέτω· ἄλλος δέ τις τὸ παρὰ τὸ γόνυ τοῦ μηροῦ ἡσύχως ἐς τὸ ἔσω μέρος κατορθούτω.

[¶2] 72. It has been formerly stated by us that it will be of importance for any person who practices medicine in a populous city to get prepared a quadrangular board, about six cubits or a little more in length, and about two cubits in breadth; a fathom will be sufficient thickness for it; and then along it from the one end to the other, an excavation must be made, so that the working of the levers may not be higher than is proper; then at both sides we are to raise short, strong, and strongly-fixed posts, having axles; and in the middle of the bench five or six long grooves are to be scooped out about four inches distant from one another, three inches will be a sufficient breadth for them, and the depth in like manner; and although the number of grooves I have mentioned will be sufficient, there is nothing to prevent their being made all over the bench. And the bench should have in its middle a pretty deep hole, of a square shape, and of about three inches in size; and into this hole, when judged necessary, is to be adjusted a corresponding piece of wood, rounded above, which, at the proper time, is to be adjusted between the perineum and the head of the thigh-bone. This upright piece of wood prevents the body from yielding to the force dragging downward by the feet; for sometimes this piece of wood serves the purpose of counter-extension upward; and sometimes, too, when extension and counter-extension are made, this piece of wood, if susceptible of some motion to this side or that, will serve the purpose of a lever for pushing the head of the thigh-bone outward. It is on this account that several grooves are scooped out on the bench, so that this piece of wood, being erected at the one which answers, may act as a lever, either on the sides of the articular heads of bones, or may make pressure direct on the heads along with the extension, according as it may suit to push inward or outward with the lever; and the lever may be either of a round or broad form, as may be judged proper; for sometimes the one form and sometimes the other suits with the articulation. This mode of applying the lever along with extension is applicable in the reduction of all dislocations of the thigh. In the case now on hand, a round lever is proper; but in dislocations outward a flat lever will be the suitable one. By means of such machines and of such powers, it appears to me that we need never fail in reducing any dislocation at a joint.

> Greek: 72. 72. εἴρηται δὲ καὶ πρόσθεν ἤδη, ὅτι ἐπάξιον, ὅστις ἐν πόλει πολυανθρώπῳ ἰητρεύει, ξύλον κεκτῆσθαι τετράγωνον, ὡς ἑξάπηχυ ἢ ὀλίγῳ μέζον, εὖρος δὲ, ὡς δίπηχυ, πάχος δὲ, ἀρκέει σπιθαμιαῖον· ἔπειτα κατὰ μῆκος μὲν, ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν ἐντομὴν ἔχειν χρὴ, ὡς μὴ ὑψηλοτέρη τοῦ καιροῦ ἡ μηχάνησις ἔῃ· ἔπειτα φλιὰς βραχείας, ἰσχυρὰς, καὶ ἰσχυρῶς ἐνηρμοσμένας, ὀνίσκον ἔχειν ἑκατέρωθεν· ἔπειτα ἀρκέει μὲν ἐν τῷ ἡμίσεϊ τοῦ ξύλου (οὐδὲν δὲ κωλύει καὶ διὰ παντὸς) ἐντετμῆσθαι ὡς καπέτους μακρὰς πέντε ἢ ἓξ, διαλείπουσας ἀπʼ ἀλλήλων ὡς τέσσαρας δακτύλους, αὐτὰς δὲ ἀρκέει εὖρος τριδακτύλους εἶναι, καὶ βάθος οὕτως. ἔχειν δὲ κατὰ μέσον τὸ ξύλον καὶ καταγλυφὴν χρὴ βαθυτέρην, ἐπὶ τετράγωνον, ὡς τριῶν δακτύλων, καὶ ἐς μὲν τὴν καταγλυφὴν ταύτην, ὅταν δοκέῃ προσδεῖν, ξύλον ἐμπηγνύναι ἐναρμόζον τῇ καταγλυφῇ, τὸ δὲ ἄνω στρογγύλον, ἐμπηγνύναι δὲ, ἐπήν ποτε δοκέῃ ξυμφέρειν, μεσηγὺ τοῦ περινέου καὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ. τοῦτο τὸ ξύλον ἑστεὸς κωλύει τὴν ἐπίδοσιν ἐπιδιδόναι τὸ σῶμα τοῖσι πρὸς ποδῶν ἕλκουσιν· ἐνίοτε γὰρ ἀρκέει αὐτὸ τὸ ξύλον τοῦτο ἀντὶ τῆς ἄνωθεν ἀντικατατάσιος· ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ, κατατεινομένου τοῦ σκέλεος ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, αὐτὸ τὸ ξύλον τοῦτο, χαλαρὸν ἐγκείμενον ἢ τῇ ἢ τῇ, ἐκμοχλεύειν ἐπιτήδειον ἂν εἴη τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος. διὰ τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ αἱ κάπετοι ἐντετμέαται, ὡς, καθʼ ὁκοίην ἂν αὐτέων ἁρμόσῃ, ἐμβαλλόμενος ξύλινος μοχλὸς μοχλεύοι, ἢ παρὰ τὰς κεφαλὰς τῶν ἄρθρων, ἢ κατὰ τὰς κεφαλὰς τελέως ἐρειδόμενος ἅμα τῇ κατατάσει, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἔξω μέρος ξυμφέρῃ ἐκμοχλεύεσθαι, ἤν τε ἐς τὸ ἔσω, καὶ ἤν τε στρογγύλον τὸν μοχλὸν ξυμφέρῃ εἶναι, ἤν τε πλάτος ἔχοντα· ἄλλος γὰρ ἄλλῳ τῶν ἄρθρων ἁρμόζει. εὔχρηστος δέ ἐστιν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν ἄρθρων ἐμβολῆς, τῶν κατὰ τὰ σκέλεα, αὕτη ἡ μόχλευσις ξὺν τῇ κατατάσει. περὶ οὖ οὖν ὁ λόγος ἐστὶ, στρογγύλος ἁρμόζει ὁ μοχλὸς εἶναι· τῷ μέντοι ἔξω ἐκπεπτωκότι ἄρθρῳ πλατὺς ἁρμόσει εἶναι. ἀπὸ τουτέων τῶν μηχανέων καὶ ἀναγκέων οὐδὲν ἄρθρον μοι δοκέει οἷόν τε εἶναι ἀπορηθῆναι ἐμπεσεῖν.

[¶3] 73. And one might find out other modes of reduction for this joint. If the large bench were to have raised on it two posts about a foot (in diameter?), and of a suitable height, on each side near its middle, and if a transverse piece of wood like the step of a ladder, were inserted in the posts, then if the sound leg were carried through between the posts, and the injured limb were brought over the transverse piece of wood, which should be exactly adapted in height to the joint which is dislocated (and it is an easy matter so to adjust it, for the step of the ladder should be made a little higher than required, and a convenient robe, folded several times, is to be laid below the patient’s body), then a piece of wood, of suitable breadth and length, is to be laid below the limb, and it should reach from the ankle to beyond the head of the thigh-bone, and should be bound moderately tight to the limb. Then the limb being extended, either by means of the pestle-like piece of wood (formerly described), or by any of the other methods of extension, the limb which is carried over the step with the piece of wood attached to it, is to be forced downward, while somebody grasps the patient above the hip-joint. In this manner the extension will carry the head of the thighbone above the acetabulum, while the lever power that is exercised will push the head of the thigh-bone into its natural seat. All the above-mentioned powers are strong, and more than sufficient to rectify the accident, if properly and skillfully applied. For, as formerly stated, in most cases reduction may be effected by much weaker extension, and an inferior apparatus.

> Greek: 73. 73. εὕροι δʼ ἄν τις καὶ ἄλλους τρόπους τούτου τοῦ ἄρθρου ἐμβολῆς· εἰ γὰρ τὸ ξύλον τὸ μέγα τοῦτο ἔχοι κατὰ μέσον καὶ ἐκ πλαγίων φλιὰς δύο, ὡς ποδιαίας, ὕψος δὲ ὅκως ἂν δοκέοι ξυμφέρειν, τὴν μὲν ἔνθεν, τὴν δὲ ἔνθεν, ἔπειτα ξύλον πλάγιον ἐνείη ἐν τῇσι φλιῇσιν ὡς κλιμακτὴρ, ἔπειτα διέρσαι τὸ ὑγιὲς σκέλος μεσηγὺ τῶν φλιέων, τὸ δὲ σιναρὸν ἄνωθεν τοῦ κλιμακτῆρος ἔχειν ἁρμόζον ἀπαρτὶ πρὸς τὸ ὕψος καὶ πρὸς τὸ ἄρθρον, ᾗ ἐκπέπτωκεν· ῤηΐδιον δὲ ἁρμόζειν· τὸν γὰρ κλιμακτῆρα ὑψηλότερόν τινι χρὴ ποιέειν τοῦ μετρίου, καὶ ἱμάτιον πολύπτυχον, ὡς ἂν ἁρμόσῃ, ὑποτείνειν ὑπὸ τὸ σῶμα. ἔπειτα χρὴ ξύλον, ἔχον πλάτος μέτριον καὶ μῆκος, ἄχρι τοῦ σφυροῦ ὑποτεταμένον ὑπὸ τὸ σκέλος εἶναι, ἱκνεόμενον ἐπέκεινα τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ μηροῦ ὡς οἷόν τε· προσκαταδεδέσθαι δὲ χρὴ πρὸς τὸ σκέλος, ὅκως ἂν μετρίως ἔχῃ. κἄπειτα κατατεινομένου τοῦ σκέλεος, εἴτε ξύλῳ. ὑπεροειδέϊ, εἴτε τουτέων τινὶ τῶν κατατασίων, ὁμοῦ χρὴ καταναγκάζεσθαι τὸ σκέλος περὶ τὸν κλιμακτῆρα ἐς τὸ κάτω μέρος ξὺν τῷ ξύλῳ τῷ προσδεδεμένῳ· τὸν δέ τινα κατέχειν τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἀνωτέρω τοῦ ἄρθρου κατὰ τὸ ἰσχίον. καὶ γὰρ οὕτως ἅμα μὲν ἡ κατάτασις ὑπεραιωρέοι ἂν τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ ὑπὲρ τῆς κοτύλης, ἅμα δὲ ἡ μόχλευσις ἀπωθέοι τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ ἐς τὴν ἀρχαίην φύσιν. αὗται πᾶσαι αἱ εἰρημέναι ἀνάγκαι ἰσχυραὶ, καὶ πᾶσαι κρέσσους τῆς ξυμφορῆς, ἤν τις ὀρθῶς καὶ καλῶς σκευάζῃ. ὥσπερ δὲ καὶ πρόσθεν ἤδη εἴρηται, πουλύ τι ἀπὸ ἀσθενεστέρων κατατασίων καὶ φαυλοτέρης κατασκευῆς τοῖσι πλείοσιν ἐμπίπτει.

[¶4] 74. If the head of the bone slip outward, extension and counter-extension must be made as described, or in a similar manner. But along with the extension a broad lever is to be used to force the bone from without inward, the lever being placed at the nates or a little farther up, and some person is to steady the patient’s body, so that it may not yield, either by grasping him at the buttocks with his hands, or this may be effected by means of another similar lever, adjusted to one of the grooves, while the patient has something laid below him, and he is secured, and the dislocated thigh is to be turned gently from within outward at the knee. Suspension will not answer in this form of dislocation, for, in this instance, the arm of the person suspended from him, would push the head of the thigh-bone from the acetabulum. But one might use the piece of wood placed below him as a lever, in such a manner as might suit with this mode of dislocation; it must work from without. But what use is there for more words? For if the extension be well and properly done, and if the lever be properly used, what dislocation of the joint could occur, that might not be thus reduced?

> Greek: 74. 74. ἢν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔξω κεφαλὴ μηροῦ ὀλίσθῃ, τὰς μὲν κατατάσιας ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα χρὴ ποιέεσθαι, ὥσπερ εἴρηται, ἢ τοιουτοτρόπως· τὴν δὲ μόχλευσιν πλάτος ἔχοντι μοχλῷ μοχλεύειν χρὴ ἅμα τῇ κατατάσει, ἐκ τοῦ ἔξω μέρεος ἐς τὸ ἔσω ἀναγκάζοντα, κατά γε αὐτὸν τὸν γλουτὸν τιθέμενον τὸν μοχλὸν καὶ ὀλίγῳ ἀνωτέρω· ἐπὶ δὲ τὸ ὑγιὲς ἰσχίον κατὰ τὸν γλουτὸν ἀντιστηριζέτω τις τῇσι χερσὶν, ὡς μὴ ὑπείκῃ τὸ σῶμα, ἢ ἑτέρῳ τινὶ τοιούτῳ μοχλῷ, ὑποβάλλων καὶ ἐρείσας, ἐκ τῶν καπέτων τὴν ἁρμόζουσαν ἀντικατεχέτω· τοῦ δὲ μηροῦ τοῦ ἐξηρθρηκότος τὸ παρὰ τὸ γόνυ ἔσωθεν ἔξω παραγέτω ἡσύχως. ἡ δὲ κρέμασις οὐχ ἁρμόσει τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ τῆς ὀλισθήσιος τοῦ ἄρθρου· ὁ γὰρ πῆχυς τοῦ ἐκκρεμαμένου ἀπωθέοι ἂν τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ μηροῦ ἀπὸ τῆς κοτύλης. τὴν μέντοι ξὺν τῷ ξύλῳ τῷ ὑποτεινομένῳ μόχλευσιν μηχανήσαιτʼ ἄν τις, ὥστε ἁρμόζειν καὶ τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ τοῦ ὀλισθήματος, ἔξωθεν προσαρτέων. ἀλλὰ τί καὶ δεῖ πλείω λέγειν; ἢν γὰρ ὀρθῶς μὲν καὶ εὖ κατατείνηται, ὀρθῶς δὲ μοχλεύηται, τί οὐκ ἂν ἐμπέσοι ἄρθρον, οὕτως ἐκπεπτωκός;

[¶5] 75. In dislocation of the thigh, backward, extension and counter-extension should be made as has been described; and having laid on the bench a cloth which has been folded several times, so that the patient may lie soft, he is to be laid on his face, and extension thus made, and, along with the extension, pressure is to be made with a board, as in the case of humpback, the board being placed on the region of the nates, and rather below than above the hip-joint; and the hole made in the wall for the board should not be direct over, but should be inclined a little downward, toward the feet. This mode of reduction is particularly appropriate to this variety of dislocation, and at the same time is very strong. But perhaps, instead of the board, it might be sufficient to have a person sitting (on the seat of luxation?), or pressing with his hands, or with his foot, and suddenly raising himself up, along with the extension. None of the other aforementioned modes of reduction are natural in this form of dislocation.

> Greek: 75. 75. ἢν δὲ ἐς τοὔπισθεν μέρος ἐκπεπτώκῃ ὁ μηρὸς, τὰς μὲν κατατάσιας καὶ ἀντιτάσιας οὕτω δεῖ ποιέεσθαι, καθάπερ εἴρηται· ἐπιστορέσαντα δὲ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον ἱμάτιον πολύπτυχον, ὡς μαλακώτατον ἔῃ, πρηνέα κατακλίναντα τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὕτω κατανείνειν· άμα δὲ τῇ κατατάσει χρὴ τῇ σανίδι καταναγκάζειν τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ὡς τὰ ὑβώματα, κατʼ ἴξιν τοῦ πυγαίου ποιησάμενον τὴν σανίδα, καὶ μᾶλλον ἐς τὸ κάτω μέρος, ἢ ἐς τὸ ἄνω τῶν ἰσχίων· καὶ ἡ ἐντομὴ, ἡ ἐν τῷ τοίχῳ τῇ σανίδι, μὴ εὐθεῖα ἔστω, ἀλλʼ ὀλίγον καταφερὴς πρὸς τὸ τῶν ποδῶν μέρος. αὕτη ἡ ἐμβολὴ κατὰ φύσιν τε μάλιστα τῷ τρόπῳ τούτῳ τοῦ ὀλισθήματός ἐστι, καὶ ἅμα ἰσχυροτάτη. Ἀρκέσειε δʼ ἂν ἴσως ἀντὶ τῆς σανίδος καὶ ἐφεζόμενόν τινα, ἢ τῇσι χερσὶν ἐρεισάμενον, ἢ ἐπιβάντα, ἐξαπίνης ἐπαιωρηθῆναι ἅμα τῇ κατατάσει. ἄλλη δὲ οὐδεμίη ἐμβολὴ τῶν προειρημένων κατὰ φύσιν ἐστὶ τῷ τρόπῳ τούτῳ τοῦ ὀλισθήματος.

[¶6] 76. In dislocation forward, the same mode of extension should be made; but a person who has very strong hands, and is well trained, should place the palm of the one hand on the groin, and taking hold of this hand with the other, is at the same time to push the dislocated part downward, and at the same time to the fore part of the knee. This method of reduction is most especially conformable to this mode of dislocation. And the mode of suspension is also not far removed from being natural, but the person suspended should be well trained, so that his arm may not act as a lever upon the joint, but that the force of the suspension may act about the middle of the perineum, and at the os sacrum.

> Greek: 76. 76. ἢν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν ὀλίσθῃ, τῶν μὲν κατατασίων ὁ αὐτὸς τρόπος ποιητέος, ἄνδρα δὲ χρὴ ὡς ἰσχυρότατον ἀπὸ χειρῶν καὶ ὡς εὐπαιδευτότατον, ἐνερείσαντα τὸ θέναρ τῆς χειρὸς τῆς ἑτέρης παρὰ τὸν βουβῶνα, καὶ τῇ ἑτέρῃ χειρὶ τὴν ἑωυτοῦ χεῖρα προσκαταλαβόντα, ἅμα μὲν ἐς τὸ κάτω ὠθέειν τὸ ὀλίσθημα, ἅμα δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ γούνατος μέρος. οὗτος γὰρ ὁ τρόπος τῆς ἐμβολῆς μάλιστα κατὰ φύσιν τούτῳ τῷ ὀλισθήματί ἐστιν. ἀτὰρ καὶ ὁ κρεμασμὸς ἐγγύς τι τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν· δεῖ μέντοι τὸν ἐκκρεμάμενον ἔμπειρον εἶναι, ὡς μὴ ἐκμοχλεύῃ τῷ πήχεϊ τὸ ἄρθρον, ἀλλὰ περὶ μέσον τὸν περίνεον καὶ κατὰ τὸ ἱερὸν ὀστέον τὴν ἐκκρέμασιν ποιέηται.

[¶7] 77. Reduction by the bladder is also celebrated in dislocations at this joint, and I have seen certain persons who, from ignorance, attempted to reduce both dislocations outward and backward therewith, not knowing that they were rather displacing than replacing the parts; it is clear, however, that he who first invented this method intended it for dislocation inward. It is proper, then, to know how the bladder should be used, if it is to be used, and it should be understood that many other methods are more powerful than it. The bladder should be placed between the thighs uninflated, so that it may be carried as far up the perineum as possible, and the thighs beginning at the patella are to be bound together with a swathe, as far up as the middle of the thigh, and then a brass pipe is to be introduced into one of the loose feet of the bladder, and air forced into it, the patient is to lie on his side with the injured limb uppermost. This, then, is the preparation; some, however, do the thing worse than as I have described, for they do not bind the thighs together to any extent, but only at the knees, neither do they make extension, whereas extension should be made, and yet some people by having the good fortune to meet with a favorable case, have succeeded in making reduction. But it is not a convenient method of applying force, for the bladder, when inflated, does not present its most prominent part to the articular extremity of the femur, which is the place that ought to be more especially pressed outward, but its middle, which probably corresponds with the middle of the thigh, or still lower down, for the thighs are naturally curved, being fleshy, and in contact above, and becoming smaller downward, so that the natural configuration of the parts forces the bladder from the most proper place. And if a small bladder be introduced, its power will be small, and unable to overcome the resistance of the articular bone. But if the bladder must be used, the thighs are to be bound together to a considerable extent, and the bladder is to be inflated along with the extension of the body, and in this method of reduction both legs are to be bound together at their extremity.

> Greek: 77. 77. Εὐδοκιμέει δὲ δὴ καὶ ἀσκῷ τοῦτο τὸ ἄρθρον ἐμβάλλεσθαι· καὶ ἤδη μέν τινας εἶδον, οἵτινες ὑπὸ φαυλότητος καὶ τὰ ἔξω ἐκκεκλιμένα καὶ τὰ ὄπισθεν ἀσκῷ ἐπειρῶντο ἐμβάλλειν, οὐ γινώσκοντες, ὅτι ἐξέβαλλον αὐτὸ μᾶλλον, ἢ ἐνέβαλλον· ὁ μέντοι πρῶτος ἐπινοήσας δῆλον ὅτι πρὸς τὰ ἔσω ὠλισθηκότα, ἀσκῷ ἐμβάλλειν ἐπειρήσατο. ἐπίστασθαι μὲν οὖν χρὴ, ὡς χρηστέον ἀσκῷ, εἰ δέοι χρέεσθαι, διαγινώσκειν δὲ χρὴ, ὅτι ἕτερα πολλὰ ἀσκοῦ κρέσσω ἐστίν· χρὴ δὲ τὸν μὲν ἀσκὸν κατατιθέναι ἐς τοὺς μηροὺς ἀφύσητον ἐόντα, ὡς ἂν δύναιτο, ἀνωτάτω πρὸς τὸν περίνεον ἀνάγοντα· ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν ἐπιγουνίδων ἀρξάμενον, ταινίῃ πρὸς ἀλλήλους τοὺς μηροὺς καταδῆσαι ἄχρι τοῦ ἡμίσεος τῶν μηρῶν· ἔπειτα ἐς ἕνα τῶν ποδῶν, τὸν λελυμένον, ἐνθέντα αὐλὸν ἐκ χαλκείου, φῦσαν ἐσαναγκάζειν ἐς τὸν ἀσκόν· τὸν δὲ ἄνθρωπον πλάγιον κατακέεσθαι. τὸ σιναρὸν σκέλος ἐπιπολῆς ἔχοντα. ἡ μὲν οὖν παρασκευὴ αὕτη ἐστίν· σκευάζονται δὲ κάκιον οἱ πλεῖστοι, ἢ ὡς ἐγὼ εἴρηκα· οὐ γὰρ καταδέουσι τοὺς μηροὺς ἐπὶ συχνὸν, ἀλλὰ μοῦνον τὰ γούνατα. οὐδὲ κατατείνουσι, χρὴ δὲ καὶ προσκατατείνειν· ὅμως δὲ ἤδη τινὲς ἐνέβαλον, ῤηϊδίου πρήγματος ἐπιτυχόντες. εὐφόρως δὲ οὐ πάνυ ἔχει διαναγκάζεσθαι οὕτως· ὅ τε γὰρ ἀσκὸς, ἐμφυσώμενος, οὐ τὰ ὀγκηρότατα αὐτοῦ ἔχει πρὸς τῷ ἄρθρῳ τῆς κεφαλῆς, ἣν δεῖ μάλιστα ἐκμοχλεύσασθαι, ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑωυτὸν αὐτὸς μέσος, καὶ τῶν μηρῶν ἴσως ἢ κατὰ τὸ μέσον ἢ ἔτι κατωτέρω· οἵ τε αὖ μηροὶ φύσει γαυσοὶ πεφύκασιν, ἄνωθεν γὰρ σαρκώδεές τε καὶ ξύμμηροι, ἐς δὲ τὸ κάτω ὑπόξηροι, ὥστε καὶ ἡ τῶν μηρῶν φύσις ἀπαναγκάζει τὸν ἀσκὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐπικαιροτάτου χωρίου. εἴ τε οὖν τις μικρὸν ἐνθήσει τὸν ἀσκὸν, μικρὴ ἡ ἰσχὺς ἐοῦσα ἀδύνατος ἔσται ἀναγκάζειν τὸ ἄρθρον. εἰ δὲ δεῖ ἀσκῷ χρέεσθαι, ἐπὶ πουλὺ οἱ μηροὶ ξυνδετέοι πρὸς ἀλλήλους, καὶ ἅμα τῇ· κατατάσει τοῦ σώματος ὁ ἀσκὸς φυσητέος· τὰ δὲ σκέλεα ἀμφότερα ὁμοῦ καὶ καταδέειν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ τῆς ἐμβολῆς ἐπὶ τὴν τελευτήν.

[¶8] 78. The prime object of the physician in the whole art of medicine should be to cure that which is diseased; and if this can be accomplished in various ways, the least troublesome should be selected; for this is more becoming a good man, and one well skilled in the art, who does not covet popular coin of base alloy. With regard to the subject now on hand, the following are domestic means of making extension of the body, so that it is easy to choose from among the things at hand:—In the first place, when soft and supple thongs are not at hand for ligatures, either iron chains, or cords, or cables of ships, are to be wrapped round with scarfs or pieces of woolen rags, especially at the parts of them which are to be applied, and in this state they are to be used as bands. In the second place, the patient is to be comfortably laid on the strongest and largest couch that is at hand, and the feet of the couch, either those at the (patient’s?) head, or those at the feet, are to be fastened to the threshold, either within or without, as is most suitable; and a square piece of wood is to be laid across, and extending from the one foot to the other; and if this piece of wood be slender, it should be bound to the feet of the couch, but, not withstanding, if it be thick, there will be no necessity for this; then the heads of the ligatures, both of those at the head and those at the feet, are to be fastened to a pestle, or some such piece of wood, difficult to reduce at either end; the ligatures should run along the line of the body, or be a little elevated above it, and it should be stretched proportionally to the pestles, so that, standing erect, the one may be fastened to the threshold, and the other to the transverse piece of wood. Extension is then to be made by bending back the ends of the pestles. A ladder, having strong steps, if laid below the bed, will serve the purpose of the threshold and the piece of wood laid along (the foot of the couch?), as the pestles can be fastened to the steps at either end, and when drawn back they thus make extension of the ligatures. Dislocation, inward or forward, may be reduced in the following manner: a ladder is to be fastened in the ground, and the man is to be seated upon it, and then the sound leg is to be gently stretched along and bound to it, wherever it is found convenient; and water is to be poured into an earthen vessel, or stones put into a hamper and slung from the injured leg, so as to effect the reduction. Another mode of reduction: a cross-beam is to be fastened between two pillars of moderate height; and at one part of the cross-beam there should be a protuberance proportionate to the size of the nates; and having bound a coverlet round the patient’s breast, he is to be seated on the protuberant part of the cross-beam, and afterward the breast is to be fastened to the pillar by some broad ligature; then some one is to hold the sound leg so that he may not fall off, and from the injured limb is to be suspended some convenient weight, as formerly described.

> Greek: 78. 78. χρὴ δὲ περὶ πλείστου μὲν ποιέεσθαι ἐν πάσῃ τῇ τέχνῃ, ὅκως ὑγιὲς μὲν ποιήσεις τὸ νοσέον· εἰ δὲ πολλοῖσι τρόποισιν οἷόν τε εἴη ὑγιέας ποιέειν, τὸν ἀοχλότατον χρὴ αἱρέεσθαι· καὶ γὰρ ἀνδραγαθικώτερον τοῦτο καὶ τεχνικώτερον, ὅστις μὴ ἐπιθυμέει δημοειδέος κιβδηλίης. περὶ οὗ οὖν ὁ λόγος ἐστὶ, τοιαίδε ἄν τινες κατοικίδιοι κατατάσιες εἶεν τοῦ σώματος, ὥστε ἐκ τῶν παρεόντων τὸ εὔπορον εὑρίσκειν· τοῦτο μὲν, εἰ τὰ δεσμὰ τὰ ἱμάντινα μὴ παρείη τὰ μαλθακὰ καὶ προσηνέα, ἀλλʼ ἢ σιδήρεα, ἢ ὅπλα, ἢ σχοινία, ταινίῃσι χρὴ ἢ ἐκρήγμασι τρυχίων ἐρινεῶν περιελίσσειν ταύτῃ μάλιστα, ᾗ μέλλει τὰ δεσμὰ καθέξειν, καὶ ἔτι ἐπὶ πλέον· ἔπειτα οὕτω δεῖν τοῖσι δεσμοῖσιν· τοῦτο δὲ, ἐπὶ κλίνης χρὴ, ἥτις ἰσχυροτάτη καὶ μεγίστη τῶν παρεουσέων, κατατ ετάσθαι καλῶς τὸν ἄνθρωπον· τῆς δὲ κλίνης τοὺς πόδας, ἢ τοὺς πρὸς κεφαλῆς, ἢ τοὺς πρὸς ποδῶν, ἐρηρεῖσθαι πρὸς τὸν οὐδὸν, εἴ τε ἔξωθεν ξυμφέρει, εἴτε ἔσωθεν· παρὰ δὲ τοὺς ἑτέρους πόδας παρεμβεβλῆσθαι ξύλον τετράγωνον, πλάγιον, διῆκον ἀπὸ τοῦ ποδὸς πρὸς τὸν πόδα, καὶ, ἢν μὲν λεπτὸν ἔῃ τὸ ξύλον, προσδεδέσθω πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τῆς κλίνης, ἢν δὲ παχὺ ἔῃ, μηδέν· ἔπειτα τὰς ἀρχὰς χρὴ τῶν δεσμῶν, καὶ τῶν πρὸς τῆς κεφαλῆς, καὶ τῶν πρὸς τῶν ποδῶν, προσδῆσαι ἑκατέρας πρὸς ὕπερον, ἢ πρὸς ἄλλο τι τοιοῦτον ξύλον· ὁ δὲ δεσμὸς ἐχέτω ἰθυωρίην κατὰ τὸ σῶμα, ἢ καὶ ὀλίγον ἀνωτέρω, ξυμμέτρως δὲ ἐκτετάσθω πρὸς τὰ ὕπερα, ὡς, ὀρθὰ ἑστεῶτα, τὸ μὲν παρὰ τὸν οὐδὸν ἐρείδηται, τὸ δὲ παρὰ τὸ ξύλον τὸ παραβεβλημένον· κἄπειτα οὕτω τὰ ὕπερα ἀνακλῶντα χρὴ τὴν κατάτασιν ποιέειν. ἀρκέει δὲ καὶ κλίμαξ ἰσχυροὺς ἔχουσα τοὺς κλιμακτῆρας, ὑποτεταμένη ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην, ἀντὶ τοῦ οὐδοῦ τε καὶ τοῦ ξύλου τοῦ παρατεταμένου, ὡς τὰ ὕπερα, πρὸς τῶν κλιμακτήρων τοὺς ἁρμόζοντας ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν προσερηρεισμένα, ἀνακλώμενα, οὕτω τὴν κατάτασιν ποιέηται τῶν δεσμῶν. ἐμβάλλεται δὲ μηροῦ ἄρθρον καὶ τόνδε τὸν τρόπον, ἢν ἐς τὸ ἔσω ὠλισθήκῃ καὶ ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν· κλίμακα χρὴ κατορύξαντα, ἐπικαθίσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἔπειτα τὸ μὲν ὑγιὲς σκέλος ἡσύχως κατατείναντα προσδῆσαι, ὅκου ἂν ἁρμόσῃ, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ σιναροῦ ἐς κεράμιον ὕδωρ ἐγχέαντα ἐκκρεμάσαι ἢ ἐς σφυρίδα λίθους ἐμβαλόντα. ἕτερος τρόπος ἐμβολῆς· ἢν ἐς τὸ ἔσω ὠλισθήκῃ, στρωτῆρα χρὴ διαδῆσαι μεταξὺ δύο στύλων, ὕψος ἔχοντα σύμμετρον· προεχέτω δὲ τοῦ στρωτῆρος κατὰ τὸ ἓν μέρος δκόσον τὸ πυγαῖον· περιδήσας δὲ περὶ τὸ στῆθος τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἱμάτιον, ἐπικαθίσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐπὶ τὸ προέχον τοῦ στρωτῆρος· εἶτα προσλαβεῖν τὸ στῆθος πρὸς τὸν στύλον πλατέϊ τινί· ἔπειτα τὸ μὲν ὑγιὲς σκέλος κατεχέτω τις, ὡς μὴ περισφάλληται· ἐκ δὲ τοῦ σιναροῦ ἐκκρεμάσαι βάρος, ὅσον ἂν ἁρμόζῃ, ὡς καὶ πρόσθεν ἤδη εἴρηται.

[¶9] 79. It should be particularly known that the union of all bones is, for the most part, by a head and socket (cotyle); in some of these the place (socket?) is cotyloid and oblong, and in some the socket is glenoid (shallow?). In all dislocations reduction is to be effected, if possible, immediately, while still warm, but otherwise, as quickly as it can be done; for reduction will be a much easier and quicker process to the operator, and a much less painful one to the patient, if effected before swelling comes on. But all the joints when about to be reduced should be first softened, and gently moved about; for, thus they are more easily reduced. And, in all cases of reduction at joints, the patient must be put on a spare diet, but more especially in the case of the greatest joints, and those most difficult to reduce, and less so in those which are very small and easily reduced.

> Greek: 79. 79. πρῶτον μὲν οὖν δεῖ εἰδέναι, ὅτι πάντων τῶν ὀστέων αἱ ξυμβολαί εἰσιν ὡς ἐπὶ πουλὺ ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ ἡ κοτύλη· ἐφʼ ὧν δὲ καὶ ἡ χώρα κοτυλοειδὴς καὶ ἐπίμακρος· ἔνιαι δὲ τῶν χωρέων γληνοειδέες εἰσίν. ἀεὶ δὲ ἐμβάλλειν δεῖ πάντα τὰ ἐκπίπτοντα ἄρθρα, μάλιστα μὲν εὐθὺς παραχρῆμα ἔτι θερμῶν ἐόντων· εἰ δὲ μὴ, ὡς τάχιστα· καὶ γὰρ τῷ ἐμβάλλοντι ῤηΐτερον καὶ θᾶσσόν ἐστιν ἐμβαλεῖν, καὶ τῷ ἀσθενέοντι πουλὺ ἀπονωτέρη ἡ ἐμβολὴ, ἡ πρὶν διοιδεῖν, ἐστιν. δεῖ δὲ ἀεὶ πάντα τὰ ἄρθρα, ὁκόταν μέλλῃς ἐμβάλλειν, προαναμαλάξαι καὶ διακιγκλίσαι· ῥᾷον γὰρ ἐθέλει ἐμβάλλεσθαι. παρὰ πάσας δὲ τὰς τῶν ἄρθρων ἐμβολὰς ἰσχναίνειν δεῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, μάλιστα μὲν περὶ τὰ μέγιστα ἄρθρα καὶ χαλεπώτατα ἐμβάλλεσθαι, ἥκιστα δὲ περὶ τὰ ἐλάχιστα καὶ ῤηΐδια.

[¶10] 80. If any joint of the fingers is dislocated, whether the first, second, or the third, the same method of reduction is to be applied, but the largest joints are the most difficult to reduce. There are four modes of displacement-either upward, downward, or to either side; most commonly upward, and most rarely laterally, and in consequence of violent motion. On both sides of its articular cavity there is a sort of raised border. When the dislocation is upward or downward, owing to the articular cavity having smoother edges there than at the sides, if the joint of it be dislocated, it is more easily reduced. This is the mode of reduction:—The end of the finger is to be wrapped round with a fillet, or something such, that, when you lay hold of it and make extension, it will not slip; and when this is done, some person is to grasp the arm at the wrist, and another is to take hold of the finger which is wrapped in the fillet, and then each is to make considerable extension toward himself, and at the same time the projecting bone is to be pushed into its place. But, if the dislocation be lateral, the same mode of reduction is to be used; but when you think that the extremity of the bone has cleared the rim, at the same time that extension is made, the bone is to be pushed direct into its place, while another person on the other side of the finger is to take care and make counter-pressure, so that it may not again slip out there. The twisted nooses formed from palm-shoots are convenient for effecting reduction, if you will make extension and counter-extension by holding the twisted string in the one hand and the wrist in the other. When reduced, you must bind the part as quickly as possible with bandages; these are to be very slender and waxed with cerate, neither very soft nor very hard, but of middle consistence; for that which is hard drops off from the finger, while that which is soft and liquid is melted and lost by the increased heat of the finger. The bandage is to be loosed on the third or fourth day; but on the whole, if inflamed, it is to be the more frequently loosed, and if otherwise, more rarely; this I say respecting all the joints. The articulation of a finger is restored in fourteen days. The treatment of the fingers and of the toes is the same.

> Greek: 80. 80. δακτύλων δὲ ἢν ἐκπέσῃ ἄρθρον τι τῶν τῆς χειρὸς, ἤν τε τὸ πρῶτον, ἤν τε τὸ δεύτερον, ἤν τε τὸ τρίτον, ωὑτὸς καὶ ἴσος τρόπος τῆς ἐμβολῆς· χαλεπώτερα μέντοι ἀεὶ τὰ μέγιστα τῶν ἄρθρων ἐμβάλλειν. ἐκπίπτει δὲ κατὰ τέσσαρας τρόπους, ἢ ἄνω, ἢ κάτω, ἢ ἐς τὸ πλάγιον ἑκατέρωθεν, μάλιστα μὲν ἐς τὸ ἄνω, ἥκιστα δὲ ἐς τὰ πλάγια, ἐν τῷ σφόδρα κινέεσθαι. ἑκατέρωθεν δὲ τῆς χώρης, οὗ ἐκβέβηκεν, ὥσπερ ἄμβη ἐστίν. ἢν μὲν οὖν ἐς τὸ ἄνω ἐκπέσῃ ἢ ἐς τὸ κάτω διὰ τὸ λειοτέρην εἶναι ταύτην τὴν χώρην, ἢ ἐκ τῶν πλαγίων, καὶ ἅμα μικρῆς ἐούσης τῆς ὑπερβάσιος, ἢν μεταστῇ τὸ ἄρθρον, ῤηΐδιόν ἐστιν ἐμβάλλειν. τρόπος δὲ τῆς ἐμβολῆς ὅδε· περιελίξαι τὸν δάκτυλον ἄκρον ἢ ἐπιδέσματί τινι ἢ ἄλλῳ τρόπῳ τοιούτῳ τινὶ, ὅκως, ὁκόταν κατατείνῃς ἄκρου λαβόμενος, μὴ. ἀπολισθάνῃ· ὅταν δὲ περιελίξῃς, τὸν μέν τινα διαλαβέσθαι ἄνωθεν τοῦ καρποῦ τῆς χειρὸς, τὸν δὲ τοῦ κατειλημμένου· ἔπειτα κατατείνειν πρὸς ἑωυτὸν ἀμφοτέρους εὖ μάλα, καὶ ἅμα ἀπῶσαι τὸ ἐξεστηκὸς ἄρθρον ἐς τὴν χώρην. ἢν δὲ ἐς τὰ πλάγια ἐκπέσῃ, τῆς μὲν κατατάσιος ωὑτὸς τρόπος· ὅταν δὲ δὴ δοκέῃ σοι ὑπερβεβηκέναι τὴν γραμμὴν, ἅμα χρὴ κατατείναντας ἀπῶσαι ἐς τὴν χώρην εὐθὺς, ἕτερον δέ τινα ἐκ τοῦ ἑτέρου μέρεος τοῦ δακτύλου φυλάσσειν καὶ ἀνωθέειν, ὅκως μὴ πάλιν ἐκεῖθεν ἀπολίσθῃ. ἐμβάλλουσι δὲ ἐπιεικέως καὶ αἱ σαῦραι αἱ ἐκ τῶν φοινίκων πλεκόμεναι, ἢν κατατείνῃς ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν τὸν δάκτυλον, λαβόμενος τῇ μὲν ἑτέρῃ τῆς σαύρης, τῇ δὲ ἑτέρῃ τοῦ καρποῦ τῆς χειρός. ὁκόταν δὲ ἐμβάλῃς, ἐπιδεῖν δεῖ ὀθονίοισιν ὡς τάχιστα, λεπτοτάτοισι, κεκηρωμένοισι κηρωτῇ μήτε λίην μαλακῇ μήτε λίην σκληρῇ, ἀλλὰ μετρίως ἐχούσῃ· ἡ μὲν γὰρ σκληρὴ ἀφέστηκεν ἀπὸ τοῦ δακτύλου, ἡ δὲ ἁπαλὴ καὶ ὑγρὴ διατήκεται καὶ ἀπόλλυται, θερμαινομένου τοῦ δακτύλου· λύειν δὲ ἄρθρον δακτύλου τριταῖον ἢ τεταρταῖον· τὸ δὲ ὅλον, ἢν μὲν φλεγμήνῃ, πυκνότερον λύειν, ἢν δὲ μὴ, ἀραιότερον· κατὰ πάντων δὲ τῶν ἄρθρων ταῦτα λέγω. καθίσταται δὲ τοῦ δακτύλου τὸ ἄρθρον τεσσαρεσκαιδεκαταῖον. ὁ αὐτὸς δέ ἐστι θεραπείης τρόπος δακτύλων χειρός τε καὶ ποδός.

[¶11] 81. After all reductions of joints the patient should be confined to a restricted diet and abstinence until the seventh day; and if there be inflammation, the bandages are to be the more frequently loosed, but otherwise, less frequently, and the pained joint is to be kept constantly in a state of rest, and is to be laid in the most convenient position possible.

> Greek: 81. 81. παρὰ πάσας δὲ τὰς τῶν ἄρθρων ἐμβολὰς δεῖ ἰσχναίνειν καὶ λιμαγχονέειν ἄχρι ἑβδόμης· καὶ εἰ μὲν φλεγμαίνοι, πυκνότερον λύειν, εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἀραιότερον· ἡσυχίην δὲ δεῖ ἔχειν ἀεὶ τὸ πονέον ἄρθρον, καὶ ὡς κάλλιστα ἐσχηματισμένον κέεσθαι.

[¶12] 82. Accidents at the knee are more mild than at the elbow, from its being compact, regular, and elegant in its construction; and, therefore, it is more readily dislocated and reduced. It is most frequently dislocated inward, but also outward and backward. The modes of reduction are these: by flexion at the knee, or by sudden calcitration, or having rolled a swathe into a ball, and fixed it in the ham, the patient’s body is to be suddenly dropped on its bended knees. Dislocation backward, also, as in the case of the elbow, may be reduced by moderate extension, and to either side, either by flexion or calcitration, but also by moderate extension. The adjustment is the same in all cases. In dislocations backward which are not reduced, the patient cannot bend the joint, but neither can he, to any great extent, in the other varieties; the thigh and leg are wasted in front; but if inward the patients become bow-legged, and the external parts are wasted; but if outward they become more bandy-legged, but the impediment is less, for the body is supported on the larger of the bones, and the inner parts are wasted. When these accidents happen at birth or during adolescence, they follow the rule formerly stated.

> Greek: 82. 82. γόνυ δὲ εὐηθέστερον ἀγκῶνος διὰ τὴν εὐσταλίην καὶ τὴν εὐφυΐην, διὸ καὶ ἐκπίπτει καὶ ἐμπίπτει ῤᾷον· ἐκπίπτει δὲ πλειστάκις ἔσω, ἀτὰρ καὶ ἔξω καὶ ὄπισθεν. ἐμβολαὶ δὲ, ἐκ τοῦ ξυγκεκάμφθαι· ἢ ἐκλακτίσαι ὀξέως, ἢ ξυνελίξας ταινίης ὄγκον, ἐν τῇ ἰγνύϊ θεὶς, ἀμφὶ τοῦτον ἐξαίφνης ἐς ὄκλασιν ἀφιέναι τὸ σῶμα. δύναται δὲ καὶ κατατεινόμενον μετρίως, ὥσπερ ἀγκὼν, ἐμπίπτειν, τὰ ὄπισθεν· τὰ δὲ ἔνθα ἢ ἔνθα, ἐκ τοῦ ξυγκεκάμφθαι, ἢ ἐκλακτίσαι, ἀτὰρ καὶ ἐκ κατατάσιος μετρίης. ἡ διόρθωσις ἅπασι κοινή. ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, τοῖσι μὲν ὄπισθεν, ξυγκάμπτειν οὐ δύνανται, ἀτὰρ οὐδὲ τοῖσιν ἄλλοισι πάνυ· μινύθει δὲ μηροῦ καὶ κνήμης τοὔμπροσθεν· ἢν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔσω, βλαισότεροι, μινύθει δὲ τὰ ἔξω· ἢν δὲ ἐς τὸ ἔξω, γαυσότεροι, χωλοὶ δὲ ἧσσον, κατὰ γὰρ τὸ παχύτερον ὀστέον ὀχέει, μινύθει δὲ τὰ ἔσω, Ἐκ γενεῆς δὲ καὶ ἐν αὐξήσει κατὰ λόγον τὸν πρόσθεν.

[¶13] 83. Dislocations at the ankle-joints require strong extension, either with the hands or some such means; and adjustment, which at the same time effects both purposes, as is common in all cases.

> Greek: 83. 83. τὰ δὲ κατὰ τὰ σφυρὰ, κατατάσιος ἰσχυρῆς δέεται, ἢ τῇσι χερσὶν, ἢ ἄλλοισι τοιούτοισι, κατορθώσιος δὲ ἅμα ἀμφότερα ποιεούσης· κοινὸν δὲ τοῦτο ἅπασιν.

[¶14] 84. Injuries of the foot are to be remedied like those of the hand.

> Greek: 84. 84. τὰ δὲ ἐν ποδὶ, ὡς καὶ τὰ ἐν χειρὶ, ὑγιέες.

[¶15] 85. The bones connected with the leg, and which are dislocated, either at birth or during adolescence, follow the same course as those in the hand.

> Greek: 85. 85. τὰ δὲ τῆς κνήμης ξυγκοινωνέοντα, καὶ ἐκπεσόντα ἐκ γενεῆς, ἢ καὶ ἐν αὐξήσει ἐξαρθρήσαντα, ταὐτὰ ἃ καὶ ἐν χειρί.

[¶16] 86. When persons jumping from a height pitch on the heel, so as to occasion separation (diastasis) of the bones, ecchymosis of the veins, and contusion of the nerves; when these symptoms are very violent there is danger of sphacelus, and that the case may give trouble during life, for the bones are so constructed as to slip from one another, and the nerves communicate together. And, indeed, in cases of fracture, either from an injury in the leg or thigh, or in paralysis of the nerves (tendons?) connected with these parts, or from neglect during confinement to bed, when the heel gets blackened the most serious consequences result therefrom. Sometimes, in addition to the sphacelus, there come on acute fevers accompanied with hiccup, aberration of intellect, and speedy death, with lividities of the large blood-vessels. With regard to the symptoms attending exacerbations, if the ecchymosed and blackened parts and those around be somewhat hard and red, and if along with the hardness there be lividity, mortification is to be apprehended; but if the parts be slightly livid, or even very livid, and the swelling diffused, or if greenish and soft, these appearances, in such cases, are all favorable. The treatment, if no fever be present, consists in the administration of hellebore, but otherwise (it is not to be given, but oxyglyky (decoction of honeycombs and vinegar) is to be given for drink, if required. Bandaging as in the other articulations: above all, more especially in contusions, the bandages should be numerous and softer than usual, but the compression should be less; most turns should be made around the heel. Position, like the bandaging, should be so regulated as not to determine to the heel. Splints are not to be used.

> Greek: 86. 86. ὁκόσοι δὲ πηδήσαντες ἄνωθεν ἐστηρίξαντο τῇ πτέρνῃ, ὥστε διαστῆναι τὰ ὀστέα, καὶ φλέβας ἐκχυμωθῆναι, καὶ νεῦρα ἀμφιφλασθῆναι, ὁκόταν γένηται οἷα τὰ δεινὰ, κίνδυνος μὲν σφακελίσαντα τὸν αἰῶνα πρήγματα παρασχεῖν· ῤοιώδη μὲν γὰρ τὰ ὀστέα, τὰ δὲ νεῦρα ἀλλήλοισι κοινωνέοντα. ἐπεὶ καὶ οἷσιν ἂν μάλιστα κατεηγεῖσιν, ἢ ὑπὸ τρώματος ἢ ἐν κνήμῃ, ἢ ἐν μηρῷ, ἢ νεύρων ἀπολυθέντων, ἃ κοινωνέει τούτων, ἢ ἐκ κατακλίσιος ἀμελέος ἐμελάνθη πτέρνη, καὶ τούτοισι τὰ παλιγκοτέοντα ἐκ τῶν τοιούτων. ἔστιν ὅτε καὶ πρὸς τῷ σφακελισμῷ γίνονται πυρετοὶ ὀξέες, λυγμώδεες, γνώμης ἁπτόμενοι, ταχυθάνατοι, καὶ ἔτι φλεβῶν αἱμοῤῥοιέων πελιώσιες. σημήϊα δὲ τῶν παλιγκοτησάντων, ἢν τὰ ἐκχυμώματα καὶ τὰ μελάσματα καὶ τὰ περὶ ταῦτα ὑπόσκληρα καὶ ὑπέρυθρα· ἤν τε ξὺν σκληρύσματι πελιδνωθῇ, κίνδυνος μελανθῆναι· ἢν δὲ ὑποπέλια ᾖ, ἢ καὶ πέλια μάλα καὶ ἐκκεχυμωμένα, ἢ ὑπόχλωρα καὶ μαλακὰ, ταῦτα ἐπὶ πᾶσι τοῖσι τοιούτοισιν ἀγαθά. ἴησις, ἢν μὲν ἀπύρετος ἔῃ, ἐλλέβορον· ἢν δὲ μὴ, μή· ἀλλὰ ποτὸν ὀξύγλυκυ, εἰ δέοι. ἐπίδεσις δὲ, ἄρθρων· ἐπὶ δὲ πάντα, μᾶλλον τοῖσι φλάσμασιν, ὀθονίοισι πλείοσι καὶ μαλθακωτέροισιν· πίεξις ἧσσον προσπεριβάλλειν δὲ τὰ πλεῖστα τῇ πτέρνῃ. τὸ σχῆμα, ὅπερ ἡ ἐπίδεσις, ὡς μὴ ἐς τὴν πτέρνην ἀποπιέζηται. νάρθηξι δὲ μὴ χρέεσθαι.

[¶17] 87. When the foot is dislocated, either alone or along with its epiphysis, the displacement is, for the most part, to the inside. If not reduced, in the course of time, the hip, the thigh, and the side of the leg opposite the dislocation, become atrophied. Reduction is the same as in the wrist, but the extension requires to be very powerful. Treatment, agreeably to the general rule for joints. Exacerbations do occur, but less frequently than in dislocations at the wrist, provided the parts get rest. While they remain at rest the diet should be restricted. Those which occur at birth, or during adolescence, follow the rule formerly stated.

> Greek: 87. 87. οἷσι δʼ ἂν ἐκβῇ ὁ ποὺς ἢ αὐτὸς, ἢ ξὺν τῇ ἐπιφύσει, ἐκπίπτει μὲν μᾶλλον ἐς τὸ ἔσω. ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐμπέσῃ, λεπτύνεται ἀνὰ χρόνον τό τε ἰσχίον καὶ ὁ μηρὸς καὶ κνήμης τὸ ἀντίον τοῦ ὀλισθήματος. ἐμβολὴ δὲ ἄλλη, ὥσπερ καρποῦ, κατάτασις δὲ ἰσχυρή. ἴησις δὲ, νόμος ἄρθρων. Παλιγκοτέει, ἧσσον δὲ καρποῦ, ἢν ἡσυχάσωσιν. δίαιτα μείων, ἐλινύουσιν. τὰ δὲ ἐκ γενεῆς ἢ ἐν αὐξήσει, κατὰ λόγον τὸν πρότερον.